BiddingDocument 20200619

MINISTRY OF HOME AFFAIRS,
IMMIGRATION, SAFETY AND

SECURITY
DEPARTMENT OF
NAMIBIAN CORRECTIONAL SERVICE
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
ISSUED ON: ………………………
FOR
PROCUREMENT OF:
A CONTRACTOR FOR:
THE CONSTRUCTION OF A HIGH SECURITY FENCE
AT THE WALVIS BAY CORRECTIONAL FACILITY
PROCUREMENT REFERENCE NO: W\ONB\06-05\2019

CLOSING DATE:…………………………
CONTRACT AMOUNT (ALL INCLUSIVE): …………………………………………………….
BIDDER’S DETAILS
Company Representative:
Name:
Tel: Cell:
Fax: E-Mail:
Standard Bidding Document
Table of Contents
PART 1 – Bidding Procedures.......................................................................................................... 1
Section I - Instructions to Bidders..................................................................................................... 2

Section II - Bidding Data Sheet (BDS) ........................................................................................... 20
Section III - Bidding Forms ............................................................................................................ 26
Section IV - Evaluation Criteria ..................................................................................................... 48
PART 2 – Employer’s Requirements ............................................................................................. 51
Section V - Employer’s Requirements ............................................................................................ 52

Section VI – Bill of Quantities...................................................................................................... 195
PART 3 – Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms .............................................................. 238
Section VII - General Conditions of Contract ............................................................................... 239

Section VIII - Special Conditions of Contract ............................................................................... 258
Section IX - Contract Forms ......................................................................................................... 263
PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

1
PART 1 – Bidding Procedures

Section I- Instructions to Bidders 2
Section I - Instructions to Bidders
Table of Clauses
A. General ............................................................................................................................ 4
1. Scope of Bid ..................................................................................................................... 4

2. Source of Funds ................................................................................................................ 4
3. Public Entities Related to Bidding Documents & to application for review ....................... 4
4. Fraud and Corruption ........................................................................................................ 4
5. Eligible Bidders ................................................................................................................ 5
6. Qualifications of Bidders .................................................................................................. 6
B. Contents of Bidding Document ...................................................................................... 9
7. Sections of Bidding Document.......................................................................................... 9

8. Clarification of Bidding Document ................................................................................... 9
9. Site visit/Pre-bid meeting .................................................................................................. 9
10. Amendment of Bidding Document .................................................................................... 9
C. Preparation of Bids ....................................................................................................... 10
11. Cost of Bidding............................................................................................................... 10

12. Language of Bid ............................................................................................................. 10
13. Documents Comprising the Bid ...................................................................................... 10
14. Bid Submission Form and Schedules .............................................................................. 11
15. Alternative Proposal........................................................................................................ 11
16. Bid Prices and Discounts ................................................................................................ 11
17. Currencies of Bid and Payment ....................................................................................... 12
18. Documents Comprising the Technical Proposal .............................................................. 12
19. Period of Validity of Bids ............................................................................................... 12
20. Bid Security/Bid Securing Declaration ............................................................................ 12
21. Format and Signing of Bid .............................................................................................. 13
D. Submission and Opening of Bids .................................................................................. 14
22. Sealing and Marking of Bids ........................................................................................... 14

23. Deadline for Submission of Bids ..................................................................................... 14
24. Late Bids ........................................................................................................................ 14
25. Withdrawal, Substitution, and Modification of Bids ........................................................ 14
26. Bid Opening ................................................................................................................... 14
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids ............................................................................ 15
27. Confidentiality ................................................................................................................ 15

28. Clarification of Bids........................................................................................................ 15
29. Determination of Responsiveness.................................................................................... 15
30. Nonconformities, Errors, and Omissions ......................................................................... 15
31. Correction of Arithmetical Errors.................................................................................... 15

Section I – Instructions to Bidders 3
32. Margin of Preference ...................................................................................................... 16

33. Evaluation of Bids .......................................................................................................... 16
34. Comparison of Bids ........................................................................................................ 16
35. Qualification of the Bidder.............................................................................................. 17
36. Employer’s Right to Accept Any Bid, and to Reject Any or All Bids .............................. 17
F. Award of Contract ........................................................................................................ 18
37. Award Criteria ................................................................................................................ 18

38. Notification of Award ..................................................................................................... 18
39. Signing of Contract ......................................................................................................... 18
40. Performance Security ...................................................................................................... 19
41. Advance Payment and Security ....................................................................................... 19
42. Plant and Materials on site .............................................................................................. 19
43. Debriefing....................................................................................................................... 19

Section I - Instructions To Bidders
A. General
1. Scope of Bid 1.1 The Public Entity as defined in Section II “Bidding Data Sheet”
(BDS) also referred to herein as Employer invites bids for the
construction of Works, as described in the BDS and Section
VII, “Special Conditions of Contract” (SCC).
The name and identification number of the Contract are
provided in the BDS and the SCC.
1.2 The successful Bidder shall be expected to complete the Works

by the Intended Completion Period specified in the BDS.
1.3 Throughout these bidding documents, the terms:
(a) the term “in writing” means communicated in written
form (e.g. by mail, e-mail, fax,) with proof of receipt;
(b) if the context so requires, “singular” means “plural” and
vice versa;
(c) “Day” means calendar day unless otherwise stated.
2. Source of Funds 2.1 The Works shall be financed by the Public Entity’s own
budgetary allocation, unless otherwise stated in the BDS.
3. Public Entities 3.1 The public entities related to these bidding documents are the
Related to Public Entity, acting as procurement entity (Purchaser), the
Bidding Procurement Policy Unit, in charge of issuing standard
Documents & to bidding documents and responsible for any amendment these
application for may require, the Central Procurement Board in charge of
review vetting Bidding document, receiving and evaluation of bids in
respect of major contracts and the Review Panel, set up under
the Public Procurement Act, 2015 (hereinafter referred to as
the Act.)
The Chairperson
Review Panel
Ministry of Finance
Private Bag 13295
Windhoek, Namibia
4. Fraud and 4.1 The Government of the Republic of Namibia requires that
Corruption bidders/suppliers/contractors, participating in procurement in
Namibia, observe the highest standard of ethics during the
procurement process and execution of contracts.

4.2 The Employer will reject a proposal for award if it determines

that the Bidder recommended for award has, directly or
through an agent, engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive,
coercive or obstructive practices in competing for the contract
in question;
For the purposes of this Sub-Clause:
(i) “corrupt practice” is the offering, giving, receiving or
soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything of value to
influence improperly the actions of another party;
(ii) “fraudulent practice” is any act or omission, including a
misrepresentation, that knowingly or recklessly
misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party to obtain a
financial or other benefit or to avoid an obligation;
(iii) “collusive practice” is an arrangement between two or
more parties designed to achieve an improper purpose,
including to influence improperly the actions of another
party;
(iv) “coercive practice” is impairing or harming, or
threatening to impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any
party or the property of the party to influence improperly
the actions of a party;
(v) “obstructive practice” is deliberately destroying,
falsifying, altering or concealing of evidence material to
the investigation or making false statements to
investigators in order to materially impede an
investigation into allegations of a corrupt, fraudulent,
coercive or collusive practice; and/or threatening,
harassing or intimidating any party to prevent it from
disclosing its knowledge of matters relevant to the
investigation or from pursuing the investigation.
4.3. Bidders, suppliers and public officials shall also be aware of the
provisions stated in section 67 and 68 of the Public
Procurement Act, 2015 which can be consulted on the website
of the Procurement Policy Unit (PPU) :
www.mof.gov.na/procurement-policy-unit
5. Eligible Bidders 5.1 A Bidder may be a natural person, private entity, or
government-owned entity or any combination of them in the
form of a joint venture, under an existing agreement, or with the
intent to constitute a legally-enforceable joint venture. All
partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of
the Contract in accordance with the Contract terms.
5.2 A Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest. All Bidders found
to have a conflict of interest shall be disqualified. A Bidder
may be considered to have a conflict of interest with one or
more parties in this bidding process, if :

(a) they have a controlling partner in common; or

(b) they receive or have received any direct or indirect subsidy
from any of them; or
(c) they have the same legal representative for purposes of
this bid; or
(d) they have a relationship with each other, directly or
through common third parties, that puts them in a position
to have access to information about or influence on the Bid
of another Bidder, or influence the decisions of the
Employer regarding this bidding process; or
(e) a Bidder participates in more than one bid in this bidding
process. Participation by a Bidder in more than one Bid
will result in the disqualification of all Bids in which the
party is involved. However, this does not limit the
inclusion of the same subcontractor in more than one bid;
or
(f) a Bidder or any of its affiliates participated as a consultant
in the preparation of the design or technical specifications
of the contract that is the subject of the Bid; or
(g) a Bidder, or any of its affiliates has been hired (or is
proposed to be hired) by the Employer as Engineer for the
contract.
5.3 (a) A bidder that is under a declaration of ineligibility by the
Government of Namibia in accordance with applicable laws
at the date of the deadline for bid submission and thereafter
shall be disqualified
(b) Bids from contractors appearing on the ineligibility lists of
African Development Bank, Asian Development Bank,
European Bank for Reconstruction and Development, Inter-
American Development Bank Group and World Bank Group
shall be rejected.
5.4 Government-owned enterprises in the Republic of Namibia

shall be eligible only if they can establish that they are legally
and financially autonomous and operate under commercial law,
and that they are not a dependent agency of the Government.
6. Qualifications of 6.1 All bidders shall provide in Section III, a preliminary description
Bidders of the proposed work method and schedule, including drawings
and charts, as necessary.

6.2 Bidders shall include the information and documents listed

hereunder with their bids, unless otherwise stated in the BDS.
The non-submission of the documents by the Bidder within the
prescribed period may lead to the rejection of its bid.
(a) copies of original documents defining the constitution or
legal status, place of registration, and principal place of
business of the Bidder;
(b) total monetary value of construction works performed for
each of the last five years;
(c) experience in works of a similar nature and size for each of
the last five years or as otherwise stated in the BDS; and
clients who may be contacted for further information on
those contracts;
(d) major items of construction equipment proposed to carry
out the Contract;
(e) qualifications and experience of key site personnel and
technical personnel proposed for the contract;
(f) report on the financial standing of the Bidder for the last
three years, such as certified copies of Financial
Statements/Audited Accounts as filed at the Registrar of
Companies;
(g) evidence of adequacy of working capital for this Contract
(access to line(s) of credit and availability of other financial
resources);
(h) authority to seek references from the Bidder’s bankers; and
(i) information regarding any litigation, current or during the
last five years, in which the Bidder was/is involved, the
parties concerned, the issues involved, the disputed
amounts, and awards;
(j) proposals for subcontracting components of the Works
amounting to more than 10 percent of the Contract Price.

6.3 To qualify for award of the Contract, bidders shall meet the
following minimum qualifying criteria:
(a) a minimum average annual financial amount of
construction work over the period specified in the BDS.
(b) experience as prime contractor in the construction of a
minimum number of works of a nature and complexity
equivalent to the Works over a period as specified in the
BDS (To comply with this requirement, works cited
should be at least 70 percent complete);
(c) proposals for the timely acquisition (own, lease, hire, etc.)
of the essential equipment listed in the BDS;
(d) a Contract Manager/Supervisor with five years’
experience in works of an equivalent nature and volume,
including no less than three years as Manager or as
otherwise specified in the BDS; and
(e) liquid assets and/or credit facilities, net of other
contractual commitments and exclusive of any advance
payments which may be made under the Contract, of no
less than the amount specified in the BDS.
A consistent history of litigation or arbitration awards against
the Applicant or any partner of a Joint Venture may result in
disqualification.

B. Contents of Bidding Document

7. Sections of 7.1 The Bidding Document consists of all the Sections indicated
Bidding below, and should be read in conjunction with any Addenda
Document issued in accordance with ITB 10.
Section I - Instructions to Bidders (ITB) Pink
Section II - Bidding Data Sheet (BDS) Pink
Section III - Bidding Forms Green
Section IV - Evaluation Criteria Green
Section V - Employer’s Requirements Blue
Section VI – Bill of Quantities Yellow
Section VII - General Conditions of Contract Green
Section VIII - Special Conditions of Contract Green
Section IX - Contract Forms White
7.2 The Invitation for Bids issued by the Employer is not part of the
Bidding Document.
8. Clarification of 8.1 A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification of the Bidding
Bidding Document shall contact the Employer in writing at the
Document Employer’s address indicated in the BDS.
The Employer will respond in writing to any request for
clarification, provided that such request is received 14 days
prior to the deadline for submission of bids.
Should the Employer deem it necessary to amend the Bidding
Document as a result of a request for clarification, it shall do so
following the procedure under ITB 10.
9. Site visit/Pre-bid 9.1 Bidders, at the Bidders’ own responsibility and risk, are
meeting encouraged to visit and examine the Site of Works and its
surroundings and obtain all information that may be necessary
for preparing their Bids and entering into a contract for
construction of the Works. The costs of visiting the Site shall
be at the Bidders’ own expense.
9.2 The Bidder or its designated representative is invited to attend
a pre-bid meeting, as provided for in the BDS. The purpose of
the pre-bid meeting will be to clarify issues and to answer
questions on any matter that may be raised at that stage.
Both the Site Visit and the Pre-Bid meeting shall take place on
the same day as per the BDS and will be compulsory for all
Bidders.
10. Amendment of 10.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of bids, the
Bidding Employer may amend the Bidding Document by issuing
Document addenda and extend the deadline for submission of bids, if
needed.

C. Preparation of Bids
11. Cost of Bidding 11.1 The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation
and submission of its Bid, and the Employer shall in no case be
responsible or liable for those costs irrespective of the outcome
of the bidding process.
12. Language of Bid 12.1 The Bid, supporting documents as well as all correspondence
relating to the bid exchanged by the Bidder and the Employer
shall be in English Language.
13. Documents 13.1 The Bid shall comprise of the following:
Comprising the
Bid (a) Bid Forms in the format indicated in Section III;
1. Form 1: Bid Submission Form;
2. Form 2: Bid Securing declaration;
3. Form 3: Written undertaking;
4. Form 4: Constitution of Legal Status of Bidder;
5. Form 5: Schedule of Work Executed by Bidder
6. Form 6: List of Construction Equipment
7. Form 7: Schedule of Key Personnel and CV’s
8. Form 8: Schedule of Proposed Sub-Contractors
9. Form 9: Letter of Undertaking by Financial Institution for
The Issue of a Performance Guarantee and Supply of
Bank Rating for The Project Statements and References
10. Form 10: Company Vat Registration Certificate
11. Form 11: Preliminary Programme
12. Form 12: Certificate of Compulsory Site Inspection
Attendance
13. Form 13: Certificate of Good Standing with Receiver of
Revenue
14. Form 14: Certificate of Good Standing with The Social
Security Commission
15. Form 15: Affirmative Action Compliance Certificate or
Exemption
16. Form 16: SME Status Certificate
17. Form 17: Knowledge of Local Conditions
18. Form 18: Notices to Bidders
(b) Qualification information and documentary evidence
establishing the Bidder’s qualifications to perform the
contract;
(c) completed Bill of Quantities / Activity Schedule;

(d) the following (Compulsory) documentary evidence in full,

including all amendments, and must be certified by a Notary
Public or police station (Police Officer) within at least six (6)
months before bid closing date:
1. Police Certified Copy of valid Company Registration
Certificate;
2. Original valid Good Standing Tax Certificate;
3. Original valid Good Standing Social Security
Certificate with specific reference to this bid;
4. Police Certified Copy of Affirmative Action
Compliance Certificate or proof from Employment
Equity Commissioner that bidder is not a relevant
employer or exemption issued in terms of Section 42
of the Affirmative Action Act, 1998;
5. Police Certified Copy of a certificate indicating SME
Status (for Bids reserved for SMEs);
6. Submit an undertaking on the part of the Bidder that
the salaries and wages payable to its personnel in
respect of this proposal are compliant to the relevant
laws, Remuneration Order, and Award, where
applicable and that it will abide to sub-clause 4.6 of
the General conditions of Contract if it is awarded the
contract or part thereof.
14. Bid Submission 14.1 The Bid Submission Form, Schedules, and all documents listed
Form and under ITB 13.1 shall be prepared using the relevant forms, if so
Schedules provided.
15. Alternative 15.1 Alternative Technical Proposals and completion dates if
Proposal allowed shall be indicated in Section V - Specifications. The
evaluation methodologies for their consideration shall be given
in Section IV – Evaluation Criteria.
16. Bid Prices and 16.1 The Contract shall be for the whole Works, as described in ITB
Discounts Sub-Clause 1.1, based on the priced Activity Schedule/Bill of
Quantities submitted by the Bidder.
16.2 Bidders shall fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works
described in the Bill of Quantities. Items for which no rate or
price is entered by Bidders, shall not be paid for by the Public
Entity when executed and shall be deemed covered by the other
rates and prices in the Bill of Quantities. Corrections, if any,
shall be made by crossing out, initialing, dating and
rewriting.
16.3 All duties, taxes, and other levies payable by the Contractor
under the Contract, or for any other cause, as of the date 14 days
prior to the deadline for submission of bids, shall be included in
the rates, prices, and total Bid price submitted by Bidders.

16.4 The price to be quoted in the Bid Submission Form shall be the
total price of bid after any discount offered.
The discount if any and the conditions of its application shall be
indicated separately.
17. Currencies of Bid 17.1 The bid price and rates shall be in Namibian Dollars and fixed
and Payment for the duration of the contract unless otherwise specified in
the BDS.
17.2 Unless otherwise specified in BDS interim payment for Plant
and Material on site is applicable as per GCC 39.7.
18. Documents 18.1 The Bidder shall furnish a Technical Proposal including a
Comprising the statement of work methods, equipment, personnel, schedule
Technical and any other information as stipulated in the Bidder
Proposal Qualification Form (section III), in sufficient details to
demonstrate the adequacy of the Bidders’ proposal to meet the
work requirements and the completion time.
19. Period of 19.1 Bids shall remain valid for a period specified in the BDS. The
Validity of Bids Bid Validity period should not exceed 180 days.
19.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original bid
validity period, the Employer may request that the bidders
extend the period of validity for a specified additional period.
The request and the responses thereto shall be made in writing.
20. Bid Security/Bid 20.1 The Bidder shall furnish either a subscription to a Bid Securing
Securing Declaration or a Bid Security in its original form with its bid as
Declaration part of its bid, if so required in the BDS.
20.2 Bid Security shall be in the form of a Bank Guarantee from a
local commercial bank as per the format contained in section III
and shall be valid for a period of 30 days beyond the validity
period of the bid or beyond any period of extension.
20.3 Any bid not accompanied by an enforceable and substantially
compliant Bid Security or a subscription to a Bid Securing
Declaration in the Bid Submission Form, if required in
accordance with ITB 20.1, shall be rejected by the Employer as
non-responsive.
20.4 Bid Security shall be forfeited or the Bid Securing declaration
exercised for non-compliance on the part of the Bidder for
reasons mentioned in the Bid Security format contained in
Section III or the Bid Suring Declaration contained as
Appendix to the Bid Submission Form.

21. Format and 21.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original of the documents
Signing of Bid comprising the bid as described in ITB 13.1 and clearly mark it
“ORIGINAL”. In addition, the Bidder shall submit the number of
copies as specified in the BDS, clearly marked with the label
“COPY.” In the event of any discrepancy between the original
and the copies, the original shall prevail.
21.2 The original and all copies of the bid shall be typed or written
in indelible ink and shall be signed by a person duly authorized
to sign on behalf of the Bidder.

D. Submission and Opening of Bids

22. Sealing and 22.1 Bidders may always submit their bids by mail or by hand.
Marking of Bids Procedures for submission, sealing and marking are as follows:
(a) Bidders submitting bids by mail or by hand shall enclose the
original and each copy of the Bid, including alternative bids,
if permitted in accordance with ITB 15, in separate sealed
envelopes, duly marking the envelopes as “ORIGINAL”,
“ALTERNATIVE” and “COPY.” These envelopes containing
the original and the copies shall then be enclosed in one
single envelope. The rest of the procedure shall be in
accordance with ITB sub-Clauses 22.2.
22.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall:
(a) bear the name and address of the Bidder;

(b) be addressed to the Employer as indicated in ITB 22.1;
(c) bear the specific identification of this bidding process
indicated in accordance with ITB 1.1; and
(d) bear a warning not to open before the time and date for bid
opening.
23. Deadline for 23.1 Bids shall be delivered to the Employer at the address and no
Submission of later than the time and date specified in the BDS.
Bids
The Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the
submission of bids by amending the Bidding Document in
accordance with ITB 10.
24. Late Bids 24.1 Late bids shall not be considered. They will be returned
unopened.
25. Withdrawal, 25.1 No bid may be withdrawn, substituted, or modified in the
Substitution, and interval between the deadline for submission of bids and the
Modification of expiration of the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder
Bids on the Bid Submission Form or any extension thereof.
26. Bid Opening 26.1 The Employer shall open the bids at the time place and address
specified in the BDS in the presence of Bidders` designated
representatives who choose to attend.
26.2 The bidders' names, the Bid Prices, the total amount of each
bid, any discounts, any alternative bid, bid modifications and
withdrawals, the presence or absence of bid security, and such
other details as the Employer may consider appropriate, will be
announced and recorded by the Employer at the opening.

E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

27. Confidentiality 27.1 Information relating to the examination, evaluation,
comparison, and post-qualification of bids and
recommendation of contract award, shall not be disclosed to
Bidders or any other person not officially concerned with such
process.
27.2 Any attempt by a Bidder to influence the Employer in the
evaluation of the bids or Contract award decisions may result
in the rejection of its bid.
28. Clarification of 28.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison of the
Bids bids, and qualification of the Bidders, the Employer may, at its
discretion, ask any Bidder for a clarification of its bid. No
change in the prices or substance of the bid shall be sought,
offered, or permitted, except to confirm the correction of
arithmetical errors discovered by the Employer in the
evaluation of the bids, in accordance with ITB 31.
29. Determination of 29.1 The Employer’s determination of a bid’s responsiveness is to
Responsiveness be based on the contents of the bid itself, as defined in ITB13.
29.2 A substantially responsive bid is one that meets the
requirements of the Bidding Document without material
deviation, reservation, or omission.
29.3 The Employer shall examine the technical aspects of the bid
submitted in accordance with ITB 18, Technical Proposal, in
particular, to confirm that all requirements of Section V
(Employer’s Requirements) have been met without any
material deviation, reservation or omission.
29.4 If a bid is not substantially responsive to the requirements of the
Bidding Document, it shall be rejected by the Employer and
may not subsequently be made responsive by correction of the
material deviation, reservation, or omission.
30. Nonconformities, 30.1 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the Employer
Errors, and may waive any non-material non-conformity in the bid, request
Omissions that the Bidder submit the necessary information or
documentation, to rectify nonmaterial nonconformities in the
bid related to documentation requirements but not related to any
aspect of the price of the bid; and shall rectify quantifiable
nonmaterial nonconformities related to the Bid Price.
31. Correction of 31.1 Provided that the bid is substantially responsive, the Employer
Arithmetical shall correct arithmetical errors on the following basis:
Errors
(a) only for unit price contracts, if there is a discrepancy
between the unit price and the total price that is obtained
by multiplying the unit price and quantity, the unit price
shall prevail and the total price shall be corrected, unless in

the opinion of the Employer there is an obvious

misplacement of the decimal point in the unit price, in
which case the total price as quoted shall govern and the
unit price shall be corrected;
(b) if there is an error in a total corresponding to the addition
or subtraction of subtotals, the subtotals shall prevail and
the total shall be corrected; and
(c) if there is a discrepancy between words and figures, the
amount in words shall prevail, unless the amount expressed
in words is related to an arithmetic error, in which case the
amount in figures shall prevail subject to (a) and (b) above.
32. Margin of 32.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, Margin of preference
Preference shall not apply.
33. Evaluation of 33.1 The Employer shall use the criteria and methodology defined in
Bids this clause and no other evaluation criteria or methodologies
shall be permitted.
33.2 To evaluate a bid, the Employer shall consider the following:
(a) the bid price, excluding Provisional Sums and the
provision, if any, for contingencies in the Summary Bill of
Quantities for admeasurement contracts or Schedule of
Prices for lump sum contracts, but including Daywork
items, where priced competitively; and
(b) price adjustment for correction of arithmetic errors,
discounts, non-conformities, due to the supplementary
criteria as defined in Section IV, and Margin of Preference,
if applicable.
33.3 If this Bidding Document allows Bidders to quote separate
prices for different contracts, and to award multiple contracts to
a single Bidder, the methodology to determine the lowest
evaluated price of the contract combinations, including any
discount offered in the Bid Submission Form, is specified in
Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).
33.4 If the bid for an admeasurement contract, which results in the
lowest Evaluated Bid Price, is seriously unbalanced, front
loaded or substantially below updated estimates or if any item
in the Priced Activity Schedule is front loaded or contains an
erroneous amount in the opinion of the Employer, the Employer
may after clarification require the Bidder to produce detailed
price analysis for any or all items that the amount of the
performance security be increased at the expense of the Bidder.
34. Comparison of 34.1 The Employer shall compare all substantially responsive bids
Bids in accordance with ITB 33 to determine the lowest evaluated
bid.

35. Qualification of 35.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction whether the
the Bidder Bidder that is selected as having submitted the lowest evaluated
substantially responsive bid meets the qualifying criteria.
36. Employer’s Right 36.1 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any bid, and
to Accept Any to annul the bidding process and reject all bids at any time prior
Bid, and to to contract award, without thereby incurring any liability to
Reject Any or All Bidders.
Bids

F. Award of Contract
37. Award Criteria 37.1 Subject to ITB 36.1, the Employer shall award the Contract to
the Bidder whose offer has been determined to be the lowest
evaluated bid and is substantially responsive to the Bidding
Document, provided further that the Bidder is determined to be
qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
38. Notification of 38.1 Prior to the expiration of the period of bid validity, the
Award Employer shall, for contract amount above the prescribed threshold
of N$ 2 M, notify the selected bidder of the proposed award and
accordingly notify unsuccessful bidders. Subject to Challenge,
the Employer shall notify the selected Bidder, in writing, by a
Notification of award for award of contract. The Notification
of award shall specify the sum that the Employer will pay the
Contractor in consideration of the execution and completion of
the Works (hereinafter and in the Conditions of Contract and
Contract Forms called “the Contract Price”) and the
requirement for the Contractor to remedy any defects therein
as prescribed by the Contract. Within seven days from the
issue of notification of award, the Purchaser shall publish on
the Public Procurement Portal (www.mof.gov.na/procurement-
policy-unit) and the Purchaser’s website, the results of the
Bidding Process identifying the bid and lot numbers and the
following information:
(i) name of the successful Bidder, and the Price it offered,

as well as the duration and summary scope of the contract
awarded; and
(ii) an executive summary of the Bid Evaluation Report.

38.2 Until a formal contract is prepared and executed, the
notification of award shall constitute a binding Contract.
39. Signing of 39.1 Promptly upon issue of notification of award, the Employer
Contract shall send to the successful Bidder the Contract Agreement.
39.2 Within thirty (30) days of receipt of the Contract Agreement,
the successful Bidder shall sign, date, and return it to the
Employer.

40. Performance 40.1 Within thirty (30) days of the receipt of the notification of
Security award from the Employer, the successful Bidder shall furnish
the Performance Security in accordance with the conditions of
contract, using for that purpose the Performance Security Form
included in Section VIII (Contract Forms).
40.2 Failure of the successful Bidder to submit the above-mentioned
Performance Security or to sign the Contract Agreement within
the prescribed delay shall constitute sufficient grounds for the
annulment of the award and forfeiture of the bid security.
41. Advance 41.1 The Public Entity shall provide an Advance Payment on the
Payment and Contract Price as stipulated in the GCC, subject to a maximum
Security amount, as stated in the BDS. The Advance Payment shall be
guaranteed by a security as per the format contained in Section
VIII.
42. Plant and 42.1 Unless otherwise specified in BDS interim payment for Plant
Materials on site and Material on site is applicable as per GCC 39.7.
43. Debriefing 43.1 The Purchaser shall promptly attend to all debriefing for the
contract made in writing and within 30 days from the date of
the publication of the award or date the unsuccessful bidders
are informed about the award.

Section II- Bidding Data Sheet 20
Section II - Bidding Data Sheet (BDS)

The following specific data for the works to be procured shall complement, supplement, or amend the
provisions in the Instructions to Bidders (ITB). Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall
prevail over those in ITB.
A. General
ITB 1.1 The Public Entity is:

Ministry of Home Affairs, Immigration, Safety and Security
Department of Namibian Correctional Service
The Works are The Construction Of A High Security Fence At The

Walvis Bay Correctional Facility.
The name and identification of the Contract is: The Construction Of A

High Security Fence At The Walvis Bay Correctional Facility,
W\ONB\06-05\2019
ITB 1.2 The Intended Completion period is 180 Calendar Days (6 months) from
possession of site.
ITB 2.1 The Funding Agency is:

ITB 5.3 A list of firms debarred from participating in Public Procurement in Namibia
is available at http://www.mof.gov.na/procurement -policy-unit
A list of firms debarred by World Bank is available at
http://www.worldbank.org/debarr
ITB 6.2 The information required from bidders in ITB Sub-Clause 6.2 is modified as
follows: None
ITB 6.2 (c) Contractors should have at least three years of experience in similar works
and familiarity with the area and conditions will be advantageous.
ITB 6.3 (a) The Contractor must have completed work with a minimum average annual
financial construction value of N$ 1 500 000.00/year over the last 3 years.
ITB 6.3 (b) The number of works is: 2
The period is: 3 years

ITB 6.3 (c) The essential equipment to be made available for the Contract by the
successful Bidder shall include, but is not limited to the following:
· Hydraulic Grader;
· Hydraulic Front-End Loader
· Self-Propelled Compactors;
· Water Tankers;
· LDV’s (Light Delivery Vehicles);
· Tipper Trucks;
· Survey Equipment
· Dewatering Equipment
ITB 6.3 (d) The Contract Manager shall have at least five (5) years’ experience in works
of an equivalent nature or three (3) years’ experience with a tertiary
qualification in Project Management.
The Site Agent / Supervisor shall have at least 3 years’ experience in projects
of this nature.
ITB 6.3 (e) The minimum amount of liquid assets and/or credit facilities net of other
contractual commitments of the successful Bidder shall be 10% of the
contract price offered.

B. Bidding Documents
ITB 8.1 The Public Entity’s address for clarification is:
The Executive Director
Namibian Correctional Service
P.O. Box: 13281
5th Floor, Breendan Simbwaye Square
Block A & B
Goethe Street
Windhoek, Namibia
ITB 9.2 A compulsory pre-bid meeting has been scheduled for:
Date : 1 July 2020
Time : 14:15 p.m.
Venue : Walvis Bay Correctional Facilities.

C. Preparation of Bids
ITB 13.1(e) Any additional materials required to be completed and submitted by the
Bidders are:
1. The bidder shall attach evidence of the signatory authorized to sign
the bid (if applicable). This authorization shall consist of written
confirmation and may include a delegation of power by resolution of
the Board of a company or from the CEO, himself holding power
from the Board or from a Director being a shareholder of a company
or through a Power of Attorney. The name and position held by each
person signing the authorization must be typed or printed below the
signature.
2. The signatory authorized to sign the bid shall initial all pages of the
Bid Document including all attachments and documents attached by
the Bidder.
ITB 17.1 The Contract is not subject to price adjustment in accordance with GCC
Clause 44.
ITB 17.2 Interim Payment for Plant and Material on site is applicable as follows:
80% payment for materials on site for the full value of all plant and material
on presentation of the supplier’s tax invoices, proof of payment and by
cession of rights from the Supplier to the Contractor and from the Contractor
to the Employer.
ITB 19.1 The Bid shall be valid for 90 calendar days after the deadline set for the
submission of bid, the deadline being counted as day one of the validity period.
ITB 20.1 The Bid shall include a subscription to a Bid Securing Declaration.

D. Submission and Opening of Bids

ITB 21.1 In addition to the original of the bid, the number of copies is: Zero (0)
ITB 23.1 The deadline for submission of bids shall be:

Date: 3 August 2020
Venue:
P.O. Box: 13281
Block A & B
Goethe Street
Windhoek, Namibia
Time: before 10:00 a.m.
ITB 23.1 The Employer’s address for the purpose of Bid submission is:
Attention: Commissioner A. Nakale
Address:
P.O. Box: 13281
Block A & B
Goethe Street
Windhoek, Namibia
ITB 26.1
The bid opening shall take place at:
Venue:
P.O. Box: 13281
Board Room, Central Depot
Dr. Michael De Kock Street,
Northern Industrial Area
Windhoek, Namibia
Date: 3 August 2020
Time: 10:00 a.m.

E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

ITB 32.1 Margin of preference shall not apply.
ITB 33.2 (b) The application methodology is defined in Section IV – Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria
F. Award of Contract
ITB 40.1 The Standard Form of Performance Security acceptable to the Public Entity
shall be “a Bank Guarantee”. The Bank guarantee shall be 10 % of the
contract price inclusive of provisional and contingencies sums and VAT.
ITB 41.1 No advanced payments shall be applicable.
ITB 42.1 Interim Payment for Plant and Material on site is applicable as follows:
100% payment for materials on site for the full value of all material on
presentation of the supplier’s tax invoices, proof of payment and by cession
of rights from the Supplier to the Contractor and from the Contractor to the
Employer.

Section III – Bidding Forms 26
Section III - Bidding Forms

CONTENTS
FORM 1: BID SUBMISSION FORM ............................................................................................ 27
FORM 2: BID SECURING DECLARATION ............................................................................... 29
FORM 3: WRITTEN UNDERTAKING ........................................................................................ 30
FORM 5: SCHEDULE OF WORK EXECUTED BY BIDDER ................................................... 33
FORM 6: LIST OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT ................................................................ 35
FORM 7: SCHEDULE OF KEY PERSONNEL AND CV’S ........................................................ 36
FORM 8: SCHEDULE OF PROPOSED SUB-CONTRACTORS................................................ 36
FORM 9: LETTER OF UNDERTAKING BY FINANCIAL INSTITUTION FOR THE ISSUE

OF A PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE AND SUPPLY OF BANK RATING FOR THE
PROJECT STATEMENTS AND REFERENCES ........................................................................ 38
FORM 10: COMPANY VAT REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE ............................................... 39
FORM 11: PRELIMINARY PROGRAMME ............................................................................... 40
FORM 12: CERTIFICATE OF COMPULSORY SITE INSPECTION ATTENDANCE .......... 41
FORM 13: CERTIFICATE OF GOOD STANDING WITH RECEIVER OF REVENUE ........ 42
FORM 14: CERTIFICATE OF GOOD STANDING WITH THE SOCIAL SECURITY

COMMISSION ............................................................................................................................... 43
FORM 15: AFFIRMATIVE ACTION COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE OR EXEMPTION .... 44
FORM 16: SME STATUS CERTIFICATE ................................................................................... 45
FORM 17: KNOWLEDGE OF LOCAL CONDITIONS .............................................................. 46
FORM 18: NOTICES TO BIDDERS ............................................................................................. 47

NOTES:
Where the space provided in the bound documents is insufficient, separate schedules may be drawn up in accordance with the given
formats. These schedules shall then be bound together with a suitable contents page and submitted with the Bid Documents.
All schedules must be signed by the Bidder.
The Bidder is also reminded to complete the bid price on the cover sheet of this document.
THE FORMS MUST BE COMPLETED IN BLACK INK

FORM 1: BID SUBMISSION FORM (ON TENDERER LETTERHEAD)
Date: ____________________
Bidder’s Reference No.: ____________________
Procurement Reference No: ____________________
To: The Executive Director

P.O. Box: 13281
Block A & B
Goethe Street
Windhoek, Namibia
We, the undersigned, declare that:
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Documents, including Addenda
issued in accordance with Instruction to Bidders (ITB) Clause 10;
(b) We offer to execute in conformity with the Bidding Documents the following Works:
____________________________________________________________________________;
(c) The total price of our Bid after discounts, if any, offered in item (d) below is:
______________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________;
(d) The discounts offered and the methodology for their application are:
______________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________;
(e) Our bid shall be valid for a period of 90 calendar days from the closing date and fixed for the
bid submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall remain binding
upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period;
(f) We hereby confirm that we have read and understood the content of the Bid Securing Declaration
attached hereto and subscribe fully to the terms and conditions contained therein, if required. We
understand that non-compliance to the conditions mentioned may lead to disqualification.
(g) If our bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a Performance Security and a Preference Security (if
applicable) in accordance with the Bidding Document;

(h) We, including any subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the contract, do not have any
conflict of interest in accordance with ITB 5.2;
(i) We are not participating, as a Bidder in more than one bid in this bidding process other than
alternative offers submitted in accordance with ITB 15;
(j) Our firm, its affiliates or subsidiaries, including any Subcontractors or Suppliers for any part of
the contract, has not been declared ineligible under the laws of Namibia;
(k) We are not a government owned entity / We are a government owned entity but meet the
requirements of ITB 5.4;
(l) We understand that this bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included in your
notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a formal contract is
prepared and executed;
(m) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated bid or any other bid that
you may receive; and
(n) If awarded the contract, the person named below shall act as Contractor’s Representative:
______________________________________________________________________
Name: ________________________________
In the capacity of: ________________________________
Signed: ________________________________
Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and on behalf of: ________________________________
Date: ________________________________
Seal of Company: _______________________________

FORM 2: BID SECURING DECLARATION (ON TENDERER LETTERHEAD)
(Section 45 of Act) (Regulation 37(1)(b) an 37(5))
Date: ........................………..........................................
Procurement Ref No.: ..................................................
To: (Public Entity name and address)…………………….......................................................................................

I/We* understand that in terms of section 45 of the Act a public entity must include in the bidding document the
requirement for a declaration as an alternative form of bid security.
I/We* accept that under section 45 of the Act, I/we* may be suspended or disqualified in the event of
(a) a modification or withdrawal of a bid after the deadline for submission of bids during the period of validity;
(b) refusal by a bidder to accept a correction of an error appearing on the face of a bid;
(c) failure to sign a procurement contract in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in the bidding
document, should I/We* be successful bidder; or
(d) failure to provide security for the performance of the procurement contract if required to do so by the
bidding document.
I/We* understand this bid securing declaration ceases to be valid if I am/We are* not the successful Bidder
Signed: ..................................................................................................................................................
Capacity of:
Name: ...................................................................................................................................................
Duly authorized to sign the bid for and on behalf of:
Dated on ____________ day of __________________, _______
Corporate Seal (where appropriate)

[Note*: In case of a joint venture, the bid securing declaration must be in the name of all partners to the joint
venture that submits the bid.]
*strikethrough if not applicable / appropriate

FORM 3: WRITTEN UNDERTAKING
Republic of Namibia
Ministry of Labour, Industrial Relations and Employment Creation
Written undertaking in terms of section 138 of the Labour Act, 2015 and section
50(2)(D) of the Public Procurement Act, 2015
1. EMPLOYER’S DETAILS
Company Trade Name: …………………………………………………………..
Registration Number: …………………………………………………………….
VAT Number: ……………………………………………………………………
Industry / Sector: …………………………………………………………………
Place of Business: ………………………………………………………………..
Physical Address: ………………………………………………………………...
Tell No: …………………………………………………………………………..
Fax No: …………………………………………………………………………..
Email Address: …………………………………………………………………...
Postal Address: …………………………………………………………………..
Full name of Owner / Accounting Officer: ………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
Email Address: …………………………………………………………………...

2. PROCUREMENT DETAILS
Procurement Reference No.: ……………………………………………………..
Procurement Description: ………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………
Anticipated Contract Duration: …………………………………………………..
Location where work will be done, goods / services will be delivered: …………
……………………………………………………………………………………
3. UNDERTAKING
I........................................................................................................owner / representative
of ……………………………………………………............................name of company
hereby undertake in writing that my company will at all relevant times comply fully with
the relevant provisions of the Labour Act and the Terms and Conditions of Collective
Agreements as applicable.
I am fully aware that failure to abide to such shall lead to the action as stipulated in section
138 of the Labour Act, 2007, which include but not limited to the cancellation of the
contract / licence / grant / permit or concession.
Signature: …………………………………
Date: …………………………………
Seal: …………………………………
Please take note:
1. A labour inspector may conduct unannounced inspections to assess the level of compliance
2. This undertaking must be displayed at the workplace where it will be readily accessible and visible by the employees
rendering service(s) in relations to the goods and services being procured under this contract.

FORM 4: CONSTITUTION OF LEGAL STATUS OF BIDDER: [attach copy]
Individual bidders or individual members of joint ventures.
Place of registration: …………………………………
Principle place of business: …………………………………
Evidence of signatory authorized to sign the bid: Signatories on the behalf of companies must
confirm their authorization by attaching a copy of that decision by the board of directors, duly
signed and dated.
An example is displayed below:
CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORITY FOR SIGNATORY
By a decision taken by the board of directors at a meeting
held on ................................ 20............... at ...........................................
Mr (s) ........................................................................................................................................
whose signature appears below, is duly authorised to sign all documents in connection with this bid and for any
contract that may arise there from;
On the behalf of (capital letters, print) .................................................................................
SIGNED ON BEHALF OF THE COMPANY : .................................................................................
IN HIS CAPACITY AS : .................................................................................
DATE : .................................................................................
SIGNATURE OF SIGNATORY : .................................................................................
WITNESSES : 1. ................................................................................
: 2. .................................................................................
COMPANY STAMP : ................................................................................

Section IV - Evaluation Criteria 33
FORM 5: SCHEDULE OF WORK EXECUTED BY BIDDER
2.1 ANNUAL AMOUNTS OF CONSTRUCTION WORKS PERFORMED DURING THE LAST 5 YEARS:
Number of works of a nature and amount similar to the Works performed as prime Contractor over the
last 3 years: [Also list details of work under way or committed, including expected completion date(s).]
Project / Contract Name of Client Type of Work Value of Contract Year of

Name and and Contact Performed and in NAD Completion
Country Person Year of
Completion
SIGNED ON BEHALF OF THE BIDDER: …………………………………………………

2.2 PERFORMANCE EVALUATION SHEET
This sheet should be completed for a minimum of three (3) different projects from three (3) different
Project Managers.
A. Project Details:
Project Name: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Contractor Name: ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
Project Description:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
Approximate Value of Project: N$ ………………………………………………………………………

Location of Project: ……………………………………………………………………………………...
Contract Period: ………………………………………………………………………………………….
Name of Consulting Engineering/Project Management Firm:…………………………………………...
Name of Project Engineer/Manager: …………………………………………………………………….
Contact Details of Project Engineer/ Manager:…………………………………………………………..
Signature of Project Engineer/ Manager: …………………………………..Date: ………………………………….
B. Contractor Evaluation
The Contractor shall be graded on a scale of 1 to 10:

1 = exceptionally poor; 10 = exceptionally good
Was the contract completed within the contract period? Yes No
1 Management Skills 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2 Site Organisation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3 Site Cleanliness 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 Safety of Workmen 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 Co-ordination of Sub- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contractors
6 Quality of Workmanship 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
7 Finishing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8 Response to Defects 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
9 Programming 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 Communication 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

FORM 6: LIST OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
Major items of Contractor’s Equipment proposed for carrying out the Works. [Refer to ITB Sub-Clause
6.3.] (Proof of lease agreement/arrangements to be provided and/or arrangements to purchase
equipment)
After the award of the Contract, the contractor must satisfy the Project Manager that all equipment listed
hereunder, or equal, are available on the site when required. The appointed Contractor must maintain
the equipment in good working order for the duration of the Contract.
The Contractor furthermore undertakes without additional cost to the Employer, to provide any
additional equipment on the site which is necessary, in the opinion of the Employer, to complete the
Contract within the bidding contract period.
Item of Equipment Description, Make and Condition (New, Owned, Leased (From
Age (Years) Good, Poor) and Whom?) or to be
Number Available Purchased (From
Whom?)

FORM 7: SCHEDULE OF KEY PERSONNEL AND CV’S
Qualifications and experience of key personnel proposed for administration and execution of the
Contract. [Attach biographical data. Refer to ITB Sub-Clause 6.3 (d).]
The Bidder shall submit with his Bid abbreviated curriculum vitae for each candidate and alternative (if
offered) using as a minimum detail requirement which must clearly indicate their minimum experience.
The Bidder may if so desired attach more elaborate CV’s of the key staff proposed for the project. These
will be securely attached to this page by stapling or alternatively by submitting an Appendix Document
or file.
Position Name Years of Years of Nationality

Relevant Relevant
Experience in Experience in
Construction Proposed
Industry Position
FORM 8: SCHEDULE OF PROPOSED SUB-CONTRACTORS

Proposed subcontracts and firms involved. Refer to General Conditions of Contract Clause 7.
The Bidder shall list below the specialist subcontractors he intends to appoint for the various specialised
items of work on this contract.
If the Bidder intends to carry out the specialised work himself, he shall state this.
The acceptance of this Bid shall not be construed as approval of all or any of the listed specialist
subcontractors. Should any or all of the specialist subcontractors not be approved subsequent to the
acceptance of this Bid, this shall in no way invalidate this Bid and the bidding unit rates for the various
items of work shall remain final and binding even in the event of a subcontractor not listed below, being
approved by the Project Manager.
Sections of the Works % Value of Subcontractor (Name Experience in Similar

Subcontract and Address) Work

FORM 9: LETTER OF UNDERTAKING BY FINANCIAL INSTITUTION FOR THE ISSUE OF A

PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE AND SUPPLY OF BANK RATING FOR THE PROJECT
STATEMENTS AND REFERENCES
The Bidder shall provide a letter of undertaking from a financial institution stating that such financial
institution will issue a performance guarantee as required by the bidding document should the Bidder
be successful in his bid. The bidder must additionally supply a letter from a financial institution that
clearly indicate the amount of credit available for the Bidder to effectively complete the works or
alternatively indicate the bidder bank rating.

FORM 10: COMPANY VAT REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE
The Bidder shall provide the Company’s VAT registration certificate, securely attached to this page by
stapling or fixing with adhesive. All copies must be valid and certified by a by a Notary Public or police
station (Police Officer) within at least six (6) months before bid closing date.

FORM 11: PRELIMINARY PROGRAMME
The Bidder must set out here a preliminary programme indicating the proposed sequence and duration
of execution of the various activities included in the Contract. This programme is solely for the purpose
of assisting in the adjudicating the bids, and in no way replaces or supersedes the programme required
in terms of the General Conditions of Contract and the Particular Conditions of Contract.

FORM 12: CERTIFICATE OF COMPULSORY SITE INSPECTION ATTENDANCE
This is to certify that I,

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………….……………………………………………………...
representative of (Bidder)…………………………………………………………………………….......
……………………………………………………………………………................................................
of (address)……………………………………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………………....................................................
telephone number…………………………………………………………………………………………
fax number………………………………………………………………………………………………..
accompanied by (Project Manager)

...................................................................................................................................................................
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………
visited the Site on (date) …………………………………………………………………………………
Having previously studied the bid documents, I carefully examined the site.
I have made myself familiar with all local conditions likely to influence the work and the cost thereof.
I further certify that I am satisfied with the description of the work and explanations given by the Project
Manager and that I understand perfectly the work to be done, as specified and implied in the execution
of this contract.
……………………………………………………………. ……………………………………………
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIVE DATE
…………………………………………………………………............
SIGNATURE OF PROJECT MANAGER’S REPRESENTATIVE

FORM 13: CERTIFICATE OF GOOD STANDING WITH RECEIVER OF REVENUE
The Bidder shall provide an Original Certificate of Good Standing with the Receiver of Revenue,
attached securely to this page by stapling or fixing with adhesive.

FORM 14: CERTIFICATE OF GOOD STANDING WITH THE SOCIAL SECURITY COMMISSION
The Bidder shall provide an Original Certificate of Good Standing with the Social Security
Commission, attached securely to this page by stapling or fixing with adhesive.

FORM 15: AFFIRMATIVE ACTION COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE OR EXEMPTION
The Bidder shall provide a valid Police certified copy of Affirmative Action Compliance Certificate,
proof from Employment Equity Commissioner that bidder is not a relevant employer, or exemption
issued in terms of Section 42 of the Affirmative Action Act, 1998, attached securely to this page by
stapling or fixing with adhesive. All copies must be valid and certified by a by a Notary Public or police
station (Police Officer) within at least six (6) months before bid closing date.

FORM 16: SME STATUS CERTIFICATE
The Bidder shall provide a Valid Police Certified certificate indicating SME Status, attached securely
to this page by stapling or fixing with adhesive. The bid is not reserved for SME’s.

FORM 17: KNOWLEDGE OF LOCAL CONDITIONS
The Bidder shall state below what direct knowledge and experience of local conditions is held by his
employees and/or principals at the time of Bid and, if relevant, what steps, if any, he intends to take to
have such knowledge and experience at his disposal in the event that his Bid is successful.

FORM 18: NOTICES TO BIDDERS
In submitting my/our Bid, the Bid Sum given in my/our Bid Submission Form includes in full the effects
of the following notice(s) to Bidders. Notices are to be signed and affixed/attached behind this page.
NOTICE NUMBER SUBJECT MATTER OF NOTICE

Section IV - Evaluation Criteria
This section contains supplementary criteria that the Employer shall use to evaluate bids.
1. Evaluation
In addition to the criteria listed in ITB 33 the following criteria shall apply:
(a) Adequacy of Technical Proposal

Evaluation of the Bidder's Technical Proposal will include an assessment of the Bidder's
technical capacity to mobilize key equipment and personnel for the contract consistent
with its proposal regarding work methods, scheduling, and material sourcing in sufficient
detail and fully in accordance with the requirements stipulated in Section V (Employer's
Requirements).
(b) Multiple Contracts
Pursuant sub-clause 1.1 of the Instructions to Bidders, if Works are grouped in multiple
contracts, evaluation will be as follows:
The Works are not grouped in Multiple Contracts.
(c) Completion Time
An alternative Completion Time, if permitted under ITB 15.1, will be evaluated as
follows:
An Alternative Completion Time will be considered for this contract.
(d) Technical Alternatives
Technical alternatives, if permitted under ITB 15.1, will be evaluated as follows:
Technical alternatives will not be considered for this contract.
(e) Margin of Preference
No margin of preference shall apply.

Refer to the Technical Evaluation Sheet below for a breakdown of the criteria and point scale, which
will be used to assess the Bidders’ responsiveness and compliance.

TECHNICAL EVALUATION SHEET (Bidders to score a minimum of 60% to

be considered substantially responsive)
DESCRIPTION SCORE NOTES
1. Major Construction Equipment 10
Hydraulic Grader 2 Owned = full points

Hydraulic Front-End Loader 2 If leased = 50% of points
Self-Propelled Compactor 1 If leased and proof of lease
Water Truck / Tanker 1 arrangements are submitted
Tipper Truck 1 = 75% of points
Dewatering Equipment 1
Vehicles/concrete mixers/jack hammer 1
2. Similar Experience -
2.1. Personnel Experience 40

Details of Project Manager with 5 years 20 2 points for each area of
relevant experience or 3 years with a relevant experience as stated
qualification in civil engineering below with a maximum of 6
attached points per area of
Subcontractors to be used for specialist experience:
installations must be declared and Bulk Earthworks, Concrete
indicated as such in the bid with their Works, Bulk Light
relevant experience and CV’s. Installations & CCTV
Installations
Forman/Site Agent with minimum of 3 5 3 years’ experience in project

years’ experience management of
civil/structural contracts with
an electrical reticulation
component: 2.5 points per
project with a maximum of 5
points.
2.2. Prime Contractor Experience 30
Similar experience for a minimum 20 Bulk Earthworks = 2 point /

period of 3 years project with max 6 points
If subcontractors are to be used, they Concrete Works = 2 points /
must be declared and indicated as such project with max 6 points
in the bid with their relevant experience Bulk Light Installations = 2
and CV’s. points / project with max 6
points
CCTV Installations = 2 points
/ project with max 6 points
Contractor familiar with the project area 10 2 points for completing Form
and conditions 17 and
8 points for doing projects
within proven similar
conditions

3. Financial Capability 20
Financial Capacity 10 If bank rating letter is

submitted or sufficient proof
and fulfills requirements as
per BDS
Adequacy of working capital (credit 10 If credit lines are shown for

lines, money in hand, other financial leasing of equipment and
resources available) suppliers = 4 points
if letter of access to credit
facility is submitted indicating
substantial amounts to assist
the Bidder on this project = 6
points, but if no amount
indicated = 2 points
Bid document substantial responsiveness 100%

51
PART 2 – Employer’s Requirements

Section V – Employer’s Requirements 52
Section V - Employer’s Requirements
Table of Contents
VOLUME 1: CIVIL / STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 53
VOLUME 2: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................110
VOLUME 3: ELECTRONIC SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................121
VOLUME 4: SECURITY OUTER PERIMETER FENCE..............................................188
DRAWINGS .......................................................................................................................194

VOLUME 1: CIVIL / STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS
NO DESCRIPTION PAGE
5.1 PREFACE TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 54
5.2 CIVIL / STRUCTURAL PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS .............................. 55
5.3 CIVIL / STRUCTURAL PROJECT AMENDMENTS AND ADDITIONS TO

THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................. 65

5.1 PREFACE TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
The Project Specifications form an integral part of the contract documents and
shall be deemed to be included in and form part of the specifications. In the case
of any discrepancy or conflict with any part or parts of the Standard
Specifications, or the drawings, the Project Specification shall take precedence
and shall govern.
In certain clauses the Standard Specifications allow a choice to be specified in
the Project Specifications between alternative materials or methods of
construction and for additional requirements to be specified to suit a particular
contract. Details of such alternatives or additional requirements applicable to
this contract are contained in this part of the Project Specifications. It also
contains some additional specifications required for this particular contract.
The number of each clause and each payment item in this part of the Project
Specifications consists of the prefix followed by a number corresponding to the
number of the relevant clause or payment item in the Standard Specifications.
The number of a new clause or a new payment item which does not form part
of a clause or a payment item in the Standard Specifications and which is
included here, is also prefixed by PS followed by a new number. The new
numbers follow on the last clause or item number used in the relevant section
of the Standard Specifications.
The Standardized Specification for Civil Project Engineering Construction
(SANS 1200) have been written to cover all phases of work usually encountered
on Civil Engineering Projects, and they may therefore cover items of work not
contemplated on this particular project.
The Project Specifications form an integral part of the Contract Documents and
supplement the Standard Specifications. In the event of any discrepancy with a
part or parts of the Standard Specifications or the Schedule of Quantities, the
Project Specifications shall take precedence. The Standard Specifications which
form part of this contract have been written to cover all phases of work normally
required for Civil contracts, and they may therefore cover items not applicable
to this particular contract.

5.2 CIVIL / STRUCTURAL PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
The Project Specifications provides an overview of the work to be concluded

under this project.
CONTENTS – PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
NO DESCRIPTION PAGE
PS 1 INTRODUCTION 57
PS 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORKS 57
PS 2.1 GENERAL 57
PS 3 BULK EARTHWORKS 57
PS 4 NATURE OF GROUND AND SUBSOIL CONDITIONS 57
PS 5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMME 58
PS 6 SITE FACILITIES AVAILABLE 58
PS 7 SITE FACILITIES REQUIRED 59
PS 7.1 LABORATORY FACILITIES 59

PS 7.2 CONTRACTOR'S SITE SANITARY FACILITIES 59
PS 7.3 SITE OFFICE AND ASSOCIATED FACILITIES 59
PS 8 SURVEY BEACONS, BENCHMARKS AND REFERENCE PEGS 59
PS 9 LOCATION OF SITE CAMP AND MATERIALS STORAGE AREA 60
PS 10 ACCOMMODATION OF EMPLOYEES 60
PS 11 CONTRACT SIGNBOARDS 60
PS 12 PROVISION OF SURVEY INSTRUMENTS FOR ENGINEER’S

REPRESENTATIVE 60
PS 13 SAFETY AND SECURITY ON SITE 60
PS 13.1 SECURITY 60
PS 13.2 SAFETY 60
PS 13.3 SAFEGUARDING OF EXCAVATIONS 61
PS 14 OVERHAUL 61
PS 15 SOURCES OF MATERIALS 61
PS 15.1 CONCRETE AGGREGATES 61

PS 15.2 SELECTED GRANULAR BEDDING MATERIAL (BEDDING FOR PIPES) 61
PS 15.3 SELECTED FILL MATERIAL (BEDDING FOR PIPES) 61

PS 16 FEATURES REQUIRING SPECIAL ATTENTION 61
PS 16.1 EXISTING SERVICES 61

PS 16.2 SITE SUPERVISION AND TESTING 61
PS 16.3 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL OR SURPLUS MATERIAL 62
PS 16.4 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND ACCESS TO PROPERTY 62
PS 17 QUALITY CONTROL 62
PS 18 COPYRIGHT 63
All records connected with or referring to the contract in any way shall become the
property of the Employer in whom the copyright shall rest. 63
PS 19 APPLICABLE STANDARDIZED AND GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 64

INTRODUCTION
The contract consists of bulk earthworks, structural concrete and masonry
works, mass lighting, installation of a CCTV system, security fence installation,
specialised fence monitoring system and renovations of the existing
guardhouse. The site is located to the East of the Walvis Bay CBD and in the
townland’s boundaries of Walvis Bay. The locality is clearly shown on the tender
drawings.
This bidding document covers the construction of all disciplines i.e. Civil,
Electrical and Mechanical works.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORKS

The Contractor should take note that the General Description of the Works
serves to outline the extent of the works but does not limit the amount of work
which may be required of the Contractor under this contract. Reference must
be made to the Project Specifications, the Schedule of Quantities, and the
Construction Drawings for a more detail description of the works.
PS 2.1 GENERAL
The following activities will form part of the Contract:
a) Establishment of Equipment, Plant, and Site Camp of the Contractor;
b) Survey existing natural ground surface and existing service on site;
c) Setting out of the works;
d) Clearing and grubbing of site
e) Bulk Earthworks
f) Construction of security fence
g) Installation of CCTV system, mass lighting and fence monitoring system
h) Finishing and trimming of site.
BULK EARTHWORKS
The site must be cleared, grubbed of all vegetation and treated with ant and
plant poison. The site is then to be levelled by cut to fill and cut to spoil
operations before being ripped and recompacted according to specifications.
The in-situ roadbed shall then be protected against erosion with a 150mm layer
of subbase material with slopes and levels according to specifications. The bulk
earthworks consist of the following approximate quantities:
a) Site Area: ± 4.7ha
b) Cut to fill: ± 2,200m³
c) Cut to Spoil: ± 23,500m³
d) Subbase: ± 6,000m³
NATURE OF GROUND AND SUBSOIL CONDITIONS

No ground water is expected at the levels of excavation proposed for this
Contract. Ground water is however a factor to take into consideration due to the
shallow water table experienced in the greater area in and around Walvis Bay.
Bidders are to fully acquaint themselves with the subsoil conditions in this area.

No specific payment shall be made if water is encountered during construction.

The bidders must therefore, if considered necessary, allow in the normal
excavation rates for such possibilities and its risks.
The whole of the construction site is situated on soft to intermediate sand with
some areas that can be classified as hard sand. It is not expected to encounter
hard rock excavations but should it be encountered, blasting must be done by a
suitably qualified blasting specialist. The blasting specialist must be a registered
blaster with a license suitable for the specified blasting conditions. All safety
regulations applicable to blasting operations in built up areas shall be strictly
adhered to.
The above-mentioned information is a general guideline and will not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities in terms of the General Conditions of Contract
to satisfy himself with the conditions on site.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMME
The project duration will be as per ITB 1.2 in the BDS, which time should include
all periods during which the Contractor closes down (public holidays).
The construction programme required in terms of the General Conditions of
Contract shall include all the important features of the work, the various
operations to be carried out and must be submitted for approval to the Project
Manager within 14 days from the date of the Notification of award.
The expected target dates for this Contract are as follows:
(a) Bid Advertisement Wednesday, 1 July 2020
(b) Compulsory Site Meeting Wednesday 15 July 2020
(c) Bid closing Monday, 3 August l 2020
(d) Award of Contract Monday, 31 August 2020
(e) Commencement of Construction Monday, 10 September 2020
(f) Construction Period 6 (Six) Months Inclusive of All Holidays
The above-mentioned dates are estimated start dates and could vary depending
on various unforeseeable circumstances. Should the above dates not be met,
it will not entitle the contractor to claim for any additional cost.
SITE FACILITIES AVAILABLE

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the supply of water,
telecommunications and power required by him for the execution of the works.
The Bidder shall allow for the cost of all such arrangements.
Water, telecommunications, and electricity required for the Works may be taken
from suitably situated supply points, with approval from the relevant
authorities/owners.
Cost incurred in installing water, telecommunications or electrical supply line
from the supply points to the construction camp and/or Works shall be for the
Contractor’s account.
The Contractor will be held responsible for any damages to the supply lines and
fittings for the duration of the contract.

SITE FACILITIES REQUIRED

PS 7.1 LABORATORY FACILITIES
The Contractor will not be required to have a testing laboratory on site. A
recognised testing laboratory will be appointed by the contractor to carry out all
acceptance control as required by the Project Specifications. No additional
payments will be made towards the testing of work and the Contractor should
allow for the required testing in his Tender.
The Engineer will not require any laboratory facilities. Acceptance control testing
required by the Engineer will be carried out in special cases by an approved
independent laboratory. A provisional sum has been provided in the Schedule
of Quantities for any tests ordered by the Engineer.
PS 7.2 CONTRACTOR'S SITE SANITARY FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate and proper ablution
facilities for his site personnel. As the nature of the project will affect remote site
areas, adequate toilet facilities within 200 m of the work area must be maintained
at all times.
Latrines shall be effectively screened from view and maintained in a clean and
sanitary condition. The Contractor shall make all the necessary arrangements
for the regular removal and emptying of the sanitary pails at his own cost.
If at any time the contractor fails to observe the previously mentioned conditions
and after being notified by the Project Manager, fails to rectify conditions, the
Project Manager shall have the right to order such materials and appoint any
workers as may be seen necessary to maintain the sanitary facilities as set out
above. All related costs will be for the contractor’s account.
PS 7.3 SITE OFFICE AND ASSOCIATED FACILITIES
The contractor shall provide on the site of the works suitable office facilities to
ensure the smooth running of the works. The Contractor will also provide a
conference room of at least 12 square meters with a boardroom table and
seating for at least ten people at no additional cost to the Client. All contract
related documentation and drawings shall be kept available in this office. He
shall establish a means of communication for the receiving of notices and
instructions by telephone and fax or e-mail during all office hours.
A site office is not required for the project manager. However, the contractor
shall ensure that a complete set of all construction drawings is kept safely and
neatly on site at all times.
SURVEY BEACONS, BENCHMARKS AND REFERENCE PEGS

At the start of the project, the Contractor will receive a drawing indicating all of
the erf pegs that have must be placed by a registered surveyor. The Contractor
is responsible for the setting out of the Works and no separate payment will be
made therefore as the cost involved for the setting out of the Works is deemed
to be included in the bidding sum for the item "Contractor’s General Obligations".
The works shall be set out by a qualified surveyor. The Contractor shall also
ensure that no survey beacons, erf pegs, and benchmarks are covered up or
disturbed.

After the completion of the Construction and prior to the issue of the Practical
Completion Certificate, the Contractor will supply a Land Surveyor’s Certificate,
certifying that all pegs have been checked and re-established where necessary.
The cost of such a survey will also be for the account of the Contractor.
LOCATION OF SITE CAMP AND MATERIALS STORAGE AREA

The Contractor will establish his site camp and material storage area, including
free issue material, at a location on Site which is approved by the Project
Manager and Employer.
Before occupying the Site for the execution of this Contract, the Contractor shall
submit for the Project Manager's approval, a proposal for the layout of all his
camp and storage areas.
ACCOMMODATION OF EMPLOYEES
With the exception of a night watchman, employees may not be housed or
accommodated on the site of the Works without permission from the Employer.
CONTRACT SIGNBOARDS
One contract Sign Board is required to be erected for this contract. The Sign
Board shall be erected to the standards of the Association of Consulting
Engineers of Namibia (ACEN), which will be made available to the Contractor.
The position of the sign board shall be indicated on site.
PROVISION OF SURVEY INSTRUMENTS FOR ENGINEER’S

REPRESENTATIVE
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer’s representative with a good quality
Engineer’s level and levelling staff and other survey equipment as may be
necessary. The survey equipment shall be maintained in good order and
adjustment at all times.
The Contractor shall provide at his expense two men to assist the Engineer’s
representative when checking any section of the Works
SAFETY AND SECURITY ON SITE

PS 13.1 SECURITY
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to control access to the site during
the execution of the Contract to prevent any unauthorised persons from entering
the site.
The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 5 security guards at any given time
for 24 hours a day for each day of the contract.
PS 13.2 SAFETY
The Contractor shall appoint a Responsible Person as well as an assistant for
him and their names shall be forwarded to the Project Manager in writing before
any work may commence. The Responsible Person shall legally be responsible
for all safety on site. No work may be executed on site if neither of these two
persons is on site.

The Contractor will be responsible for the safety of his personnel and the site in
general at all times. All laws, rules, and regulations including the Machinery and
Occupational Safety Act shall be strictly followed in this regard and all the
necessary precautions and measures shall be taken to ensure the safety of
personnel, the public, and equipment.
PS 13.3 SAFEGUARDING OF EXCAVATIONS
The responsibility of safeguarding of excavations lies entirely with the
Contractor.
OVERHAUL
All bidding rates for material or excavation shall allow for all hauling to or from
the site. For this Contract “free haul” shall therefore continue indefinitely and no
overhaul shall be paid, unless otherwise specified.
SOURCES OF MATERIALS
PS 15.1 CONCRETE AGGREGATES
Concrete aggregates must be sourced by the contractor. These aggregates,
both course and fine, must be comprehensively tested for compliance and
approved by the Engineer before being delivered to site.
PS 15.2 SELECTED GRANULAR BEDDING MATERIAL (BEDDING FOR
PIPES)
The Contractor will have to identify his own sources for selected granular
material to be used for bedding flexible pipes. Excavated material can be used
for bedding if suitable. These materials will have to be tested and the results
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the construction activities
involving these materials. Because no overhaul is paid, it is of utmost importance
that each Tenderer identifies suitable sources of materials at Tender stage, so
as to establish the transport cost thereof to be included in the Tender.
PS 15.3 SELECTED FILL MATERIAL (BEDDING FOR PIPES)
Selected fill may be obtained from the specified trench excavations on the site.
FEATURES REQUIRING SPECIAL ATTENTION

PS 16.1 EXISTING SERVICES
The Contractor shall make himself acquainted with the position of all existing
services before any excavation or other work likely to affect the existing services
is commenced. The cost of working alongside or next to existing services should
be included in this rate or in the Bidder’s excavation rates.
The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to “known” existing
services caused by or arising out of his operations. Existing services will be
considered “known” if it is either shown on the construction drawings or shown
to the Contractor on site.
PS 16.2 SITE SUPERVISION AND TESTING
The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient supervisory staff, the required
transport, instruments, equipment, and tools are available to control works on

site. The Project Manager or his representative will not act as supervisor,
foreman or surveyor.
All construction activities shall be executed and supervised by suitably qualified
and experienced personnel. The responsibility of proving quality of work lies
with the Contractor. With the assistance of the Project Manager, an acceptable
quality assurance system shall be implemented. The Contractor will be required
to follow the procedures set by this Quality Assurance system. Failure to do so
will result in the rejection of work constructed in non-compliance with the
approved Quality Assurance system.
PS 16.3 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL OR SURPLUS MATERIAL
All costs related to the disposal of unwanted rubble and waste shall be deemed
to be included in the bidding rates and no additional claims in this regard will be
considered. Good quality surplus material obtained from on-site excavations
and not used as selected fill upon instruction to do so, can be spread on site
upon approval of the Project Manager.
Building rubble and domestic waste shall be removed from site and be dumped
at a location approved by the Project manager and Employer. Burning of any
kind of waste on site will not be allowed.
PS 16.4 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND ACCESS TO PROPERTY
The successful Contractor must allow for provision and erection of all necessary
barricading, road traffic sign-boarding, lighting and for the posting of flagmen
where required. When sections of a road have to be closed, the correct warning
signs have to be displayed in positions which will allow traffic to change course
without vehicles having to reverse or turn around. The road signs to be
displayed during the contract shall be in accordance with “The South African
Roads Traffic Signs Manual.”
All work shall be done with the least interference with traffic and the Engineer
shall have the power to demand rearrangements if, in his opinion, traffic is
unnecessarily hampered.
Access to site must be strictly monitored on a 24-hour basis for each calendar
day of the contract.
QUALITY CONTROL
It will be the full responsibility of the Contractor to undertake appropriate quality
control and quality assurance measures on site. The Project Manager shall
audit the Contractor’s Quality Assurance system on a regular basis to ensure
that adequate independent checks and tests are being carried out and to ensure
that the Contractor’s own controls are sufficient to identify any possible quality
problems which could cause a delay on the programme. The Project Manager
will submit a Quality Assurance Manual to the successful Contractor at the site
handover.
Quality control tests on materials and work executed will be very important on
this Contract. Materials not tested and approved will not be allowed on site.
Compaction tests on back fill materials to trenches shall be compulsory. The
Contractor shall include in his rates the testing of compaction effort as specified
in the particular specifications.

COPYRIGHT
All records connected with or referring to the contract in any way shall become
the property of the Employer in whom the copyright shall rest.

APPLICABLE STANDARDIZED AND GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

The applicable specifications for this Contract will be "Standardized
Specification for Civil Engineering Construction, SANS 1200, 1986 of the South
African Bureau of Standards”
Any reference to the General Conditions of Contract of the SANS 1200 will be
interpreted to be the General Conditions of Contract.
None of the above standard specifications are included into this document.
The following sections of the SANS 1200 will be applicable:

SANS 1200 A General
SABS 1200 C Site Clearance
SABS 1200 D Earthworks
SABS 1200 DA Earthworks (Small Works)
SABS 1200 DB Earthworks (Pipe Trenches)
SABS 1200 DM Earthworks (Roads, Subgrade)
SABS 1200 G Concrete (Structural)
SABS 1200 GB Concrete (Ordinary Buildings)
SABS 1200 LB Bedding (Pipes)
SABS 1200 LC Cable Ducts
SABS 1200 M Roads (General)
SABS 1200 ME Subbase
Further to the above standards, all electrical related works shall also be carried
out strictly in accordance with and all material and equipment supplied shall
comply with the latest editions of the following standards:
SANS 10199:2010 Designs and Installation of Earth Electrodes
SANS 10292:2013 Earthing of Low Voltage (LV) Distribution Systems
SANS 60439:2007 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies
SANS 1507:2007 Electric Cables with Extruded Solid Dielectric
Insulation for Fixed Installations (300/500V to
1900/3300V)
SANS 10225:2012 The Design and Construction of Lighting Masts
SANS 14713-2:2011 / ISO 14713-2:2009 Zinc Coatings – Guidelines and
Recommendations for the Protection against
Corrosion of Iron and Steel Structures Part 2: Hot
Dip Galvanizing
SANS 556-1:2004 Low Voltage Switchgear: Circuit Breakers

5.3 CIVIL / STRUCTURAL PROJECT AMENDMENTS AND ADDITIONS TO

THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Should any requirements of the Project Specifications conflict with any

requirements of the Standardized and /or Particular Specifications in this
document, the requirements of the Project Specification described herein shall
prevail and take preference.
PSA GENERAL......................................................................................................... 67
PSA 1 MATERIALS (clause 3)...................................................................................... 67

PSA 2 PLANT (clause 4) ............................................................................................... 67
PSA 3 survey (clause 5.1) .............................................................................................. 67
PSA 4 Protection of overhead and underground services (clause 5.4) ............................. 68
PSA 5 Accommodation of Traffic (Clause 8.8.2) ........................................................... 70
PSA 6 tolerances (clause 6) ............................................................................................ 70
PSA 7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................. 71
PSD PSD EARTHWORKS ....................................................................................... 73
PSD 1 MATERIALS (Clause 3.1) .................................................................................. 73

PSD 2 CONSTRUCTION (clause 5) .............................................................................. 73
PSD 3 TOLERANCES................................................................................................... 73
PSD 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................. 73
PSDB EARTHWORKS (PIPE TRENCHES) ............................................................. 74
PSDB 1 MATERIAL (Clause 3) ....................................................................................... 74

PSDB 2 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................................. 75
PSDB 3 TESTING (Clause 7)........................................................................................... 75
PSDB 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................. 75
PSDM EARTHWORKS (ROADS, SUBGRADE) ....................................................... 77
PSDM 1 MATERIALS...................................................................................................... 77
PSDM 2 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................................. 77
PSDM 3 OVERHAUL (Clauses 5.2.8.1 and 5.2.8.2) ......................................................... 78
PSDM 4 TOLERANCES................................................................................................... 78
PSG CONCRETE (STRUCTURAL) ........................................................................ 79
MATERIAL (Clause 3) ....................................................................................... 79

PLANT (Clause 4) .............................................................................................. 82
CONSTRUCTION (Clause 5) ............................................................................. 82
TOLERANCES (Clause 6) .................................................................................. 89
PSGA-7 TESTS (Clause 7) ................................................................................. 89
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (Clause 8)................................................. 91
PSLB BEDDING (PIPES) ........................................................................................... 94
CABLE DUCTS ................................................................................................ 96

SCHEDULED ITEMS (clause 8.2) ..................................................................... 96
PSME SUBBASE .......................................................................................................... 97
PSME 1 PHYSICAL properties ........................................................................................ 97

PSME 2 Selection (clause 3.5) .......................................................................................... 97
PSME 3 OVERHAUL ...................................................................................................... 97
PSME 4 TOLERANCES................................................................................................... 97

PSA GENERAL
PSA 1 MATERIALS (CLAUSE 3)
PSA 1.1 Quality (Clause 3.1)
All materials proposed by the Contractor shall be tested. The tests, as well as the
materials, shall be approved by the Engineer prior to any such materials being built into
the Works and all costs involved shall be deemed to be included in the rates tendered.
Any materials built in without the prior approval by the Engineer may be required to be
removed at the Contractor’s own cost.
Approved samples of material such as paving, kerbing etc. will be placed at the site
offices of the Contractor to be used as reference against material delivered to site.
Should material be delivered to site that is not of the same or higher quality as the
approved samples, such material will be removed from site on the Contractor’s own
cost.
If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall deliver samples of materials to be tested
to a laboratory indicated by the Engineer.
PSA 2 PLANT (CLAUSE 4)
PSA 2.1 Contractor's Offices, Stores and Services (Clause 4.2)
No housing is available for the Contractor's employees and the Contractor shall make
his own arrangements to house his employees off site and to transport them to site. Only
one security guard will be allowed on site overnight and over weekends.
The Employer will place an area of ground of approximately 1 ha at the disposal of the
Contractor. The Contractor will be required to provide his own facilities, for example,
a fenced in yard, offices, workshops, stores, and any other temporary structures required
by the Contractor for the storage of all material and plant. The extent of the Contractor’s
camp shall be restricted to the area allocated by the Engineer. The cost of providing
and removal of the Contractor’s facilities shall be paid for under provision of facilities
on site and removal of the site establishment respectively
Add the following:
The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the applicable regulations framed under the
Machinery and Occupational Safety Act, 1983 (Act No 6 of 1983). When working in
built-up areas, the Contractor shall provide and use suitable and effective silencing
devices for pneumatic tools and other plant that would otherwise cause a noise level
exceeding 85 dB during excavations and other work. Alternatively, he shall, by means
of barriers, effectively isolate the source of any noise in order to comply with the said
regulations
PSA 3 SURVEY (CLAUSE 5.1)
PSA 3.1 Setting out of Works (Clause 5.1.1)
Preservation and Replacement of Pegs subject to the Land Survey Act (Clause 5.1.2)

Existing erf pegs will be dealt with strictly according to Clause 5.1.2 of SABS 1200 A.
Add the following:
Only the required erf pegs will be set out prior to construction. The Client accepts that
these erf pegs will be disturbed and that they will be replace at no additional cost to the
Contractor. All other pegs must be protected as set out in Clause 5.1.2.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the setting out of the works. Further, the
Contractor shall, prior to commencing with any construction activities, determine the
existing ground levels, left centre and right and at every stake value. This will be done
for roads and sewer lines.
Should these levels differ from the level provided by the Engineer, the Contractor must
inform the Engineer in writing in order to agree the construction quantities prior to the
commencement of the construction.
Should the Contractor commence with construction without submitting any survey
information and/or do not inform the Engineer of any discrepancies between the survey
information provided by the Engineer and that of the Contractor, the quantities
calculated by the Engineer will be accepted as correct and no claim for additional
payment will be accepted due to such discrepancies.
No additional payment will be made by the Client for any survey work required by the
Engineer.
PSA 4 PROTECTION OF OVERHEAD AND UNDERGROUND SERVICES (CLAUSE 5.4)
Before commencement of construction the Contractor shall, in conjunction with the

relevant authority, determine the exact position on site of all underground services. All
such services shall be deemed to be known services. No payment will be made to verify
"known" services.
The Contractor shall excavate all existing services by hand to establish their exact
position and level.
PSA 4.1 Existing Services
(a) General
The location of some existing services is indicated on the drawings but it is, however,
not guaranteed that these are all the existing services on the Site. The Contractor must
have the positions of services on the drawings confirmed by the service departments.
The location of all existing services obtained from the relevant municipal and other
departments are shown at their approximate positions on the Drawings. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to find the exact position of existing services. If it is
required to relocate or change existing services, the Contractor must inform the
Engineer immediately after having determined the location of the service, to enable him
to make timeous arrangements with the relevant authorities for the relocation or changes
to the service in question. The Contractor shall excavate the necessary trenches to
enable the relocation of services by other departments. Having located a service, it shall
be considered a known service and the Contractor must keep records of co-ordinated

positions of each service. A copy of these records shall be submitted to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall take extreme care to avoid damage to such a service as the cost for
the repair of such a service will be for the account of the Contractor. The Contractor
must furthermore co-operate with the relevant Municipal departments and allow them
reasonable access and sufficient space and time to carry out the required work.
Sewerage lines shall where and if required, be relocated by the Contractor.
A method has to be developed by the Contractor to search for all existing services with
hand excavation. It is suggested that trenches are formed at intervals across the
sidewalk(s) of the street, or the street itself if necessary, to determine the positions of
all the services.
The Contractor has to accept liability for the cost to repair known services damaged as
a result of his operations, either by his authorised signature, or by admittance to the
Engineer, who will confirm such admittance in writing to the Contractor. The Engineer
reserves the right to deduct the cost to have such damaged services repaired by the
relevant service departments, from payments due to the Contractor. The Contractor is
also responsible for the cost of temporary arrangements for water supply if the time
needed for repair exceeds 12 hours.
All exposed pipes, cables and appurtenant structures shall be backfilled before nightfall,
and if this is not possible, watchmen shall be placed at the exposed services to ensure
that the exposed pipe, cable or other service is not damaged or stolen during the night.
Should anything be stolen or damaged in this way, the Contractor is also responsible
for the cost of the repair and replacement thereof.
Any damage or loss resulting from failure to comply with this Clause will be to the
Contractor's account.
(b) Encasing of Pipes (Clause 5.4L)
The encasing of pipes, ducts or any other services shall only be done where and when
instructed by the Engineer. Class 25 MPa concrete shall be used for all encasings.
Measurement and payment shall be done in accordance with Clause 8.2.12 L.
PSA 4.2 Measurement and payment for location existing services
The Contractor will be compensated for hand excavation in soft material in accordance
with authorised dimensions agreed with the Engineer prior to excavation. The rate shall
include full compensation for the detection, exposure, excavation, backfilling, watering,
and compaction of the backfill to at least the same density as the in-situ material before
excavation. The rate shall also include proper documentation of the services.
Unit: Cubic Meter (m3)
PSA 4.3 Measurement and payment for protection of existing services by encasing in concrete
Where instructed by the Engineer, existing services will be protected by means of

encasing in 25 MPa concrete. The rate shall include all formwork, concrete, placing
and finishing as per the approved dimensions.
Unit: Cubic Meter (m3)

PSA 5 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC (CLAUSE 8.8.2)
PSA 5.1 General
The Contractor shall ensure that all streets adjacent to or crossing the Site and which
are affected by the Works and/or Temporary Works are kept in a safe condition for
pedestrians and vehicular traffic.
The Contractor shall organise his work so as to reduce the inconvenience to traffic to a
minimum, and no public road or street shall be completely closed without prior
approval. If so ordered, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges at street and
driveway crossings where traffic must cross open trenches. The Contractor shall
construct temporary accesses to adjacent private properties if necessary to ensure access
The Contractor must protect completed layerworks in order to prevent damage thereto.
Any damage caused to completed layerworks shall be for the Contractor’s expenses.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in proper condition all necessary barricades,
lights, warning signals and all direction signs necessary to enable traffic to follow the
routes of diversion throughout their length. The Contractor shall provide flagmen at all
deviations and/or obstructions where deemed necessary by the Engineer.
All signs shall be as shown on the signs and deviation drawings. All traffic signs and
the control of traffic shall be in accordance with either the South African (1982) or
Namibian Road Traffic Signs Manual (also see drawing no. P5985CPTP4). Typical
signs and equipment covered under this section, includes: Moveable Barricades, Road
Closed Sign, Residents Only Signs, Stop and Go Sign, Drums, Traffic Cones and other
signs specified by drawing no. P5985CPTP4.
The Contractor shall liaise and co-operate with the relevant Traffic Authorities and
Engineers Representatives wherever the Works affect existing roads. The Contractor
shall sign an indemnity clearing the Local Authority, as applicable, from all liabilities
in respect of excavations and works on or adjacent to trafficked roads.
PSA 5.2 Measurement and Payment for General Traffic Accommodation
Provide and maintain in terms of the Namibian Road Sign policy the required traffic
accommodation signage for construction work for the duration of the contract. Payment
of incremental amounts (calculated by the division of the Tendered sum by the number
of months required to complete the activities for which the relevant sum was tendered)
will be authorised in each of the subsequent progress certificates until the sum tendered
has been paid.
Unit: Sum
PSA 6 TOLERANCES (CLAUSE 6)
PSA 6.1 Degrees of Accuracy (clause 6.2)
A Degree of Accuracy II will be applicable to this contract.

PSA 7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PSA 7.1 Payment
(a) Fixed-charge and value-related items (Clause 8.2.1)

Replace sub-clause 8.2.1 to read as follows:
Payment of the fixed charge and value related items will be made in three instalments,
as follows:
(1) The first instalment, 50 % of all items listed under 8.3, in the schedule of
quantities, will be paid in the first payment certificate after the contractor
has met all his obligations under these items and has made a substantial
start with construction in accordance with the approved programme.
(2) The second instalment, 35 % of the items stated above, will be paid when
the value of the work done reaches one half of the tendered amount,
excluding contingencies and price adjustments.
(3) The third and final instalment, 15 % of the items stated above, will be paid
when the works have been completed and the Contractor has fulfilled all
the requirements of the contract.
These items will be subject to the reduction of retention money as provided for in the
contract.
Add the following:
The tender amount for this item shall be limited to a maximum of 15% of the total
Tender Sum excluding the contingency amounts allowed for in the Schedule of
Quantities.
PSA 7.2 Sums Stated Provisionally by the Engineer (Clause 8.5)
(a) Provisional Sum for the compilation of “As Built” drawings

This provisional sum shall cover the costs for the updating and record keeping of all as-
built information of the project. The information must be updated electronically and a
full hard-copy and electronic set of drawings are to be handed to the engineer.
Unit: Provisional Sum (PS)
(b) Provisional Sum for Control tests ordered by Engineer

This provisional sum shall cover the cost of acceptance control tests specifically ordered
by the Engineer and executed by an approved commercial laboratory.
(d) Provisional Sum for Land Surveying

This provisional sum shall cover the costs of all surveying work requested by engineer,
either from the contractor or from a professional surveyor.

PSA 7.3 Percentage charges and profit
The item will cover all additional cost the Contractor might incur such as bank charges,
financing cost etc. for items noted under PSA 7.2
Unit: Percentage (%)

PSD PSD EARTHWORKS
PSD 1 MATERIALS (Clause 3.1)
PSD 1.1 Classes of Excavation (Clause 3.1.2)
The classification "soft", "intermediate", "boulder excavation class A" and "boulder
excavation class B" shall not be applicable to this Contract. All material will be
measured as soft and the Contractor should allow in his rates for any additional cost
should he encounter hard excavation. Refer to PSDB 1.1 for classes of excavations.
PSD 2 CONSTRUCTION (clause 5)
PSD 2.1 Safeguarding of excavations (Clause 5.1.1.2)
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the safety of all excavations.
PSD 2.2 Disposal (Clause 5.2.2.3)
All excess material shall be disposed of at a site to be found by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer.
PSD 2.3 Free-haul (Clause 5.2.5.1)
The free-haul distance for all earthworks on this Contract shall be unlimited.
PSD 2.4 Overhaul (Clause 5.2.5.2)
No overhaul shall be paid and the transport of all material shall be deemed to be within
the free-haul distance.
PSD 3 TOLERANCES
PSD 3.1 Positions, dimensions, levels etc. (Clause 6.1)
All excavations, terraces, and embankments shall be done to comply with the
requirements for finishing to a Degree of Accuracy II.
PSD 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PSD 4.1 Basic Principles (Clause 8.1)
Free-haul shall be unlimited. No overhaul shall be paid.

PSDB EARTHWORKS (PIPE TRENCHES)
PSDB 1 MATERIAL (CLAUSE 3)
PSDB 1.1 Classes of Excavation (Clause 3.1)
The classification of "Soft", "intermediate", "boulder excavation class A" and "boulder
excavation class B" in terms of sub-clause 3.1.2 of SABS 1200 D shall not be
applicable. All material which does not classify as "hard rock excavation", in terms of
sub-clause 3.1.2(c) of SABS 1200 D shall be classified as "soft excavation".
PSDB 1.2 Backfill Material (Clause 3.5)
All road reserves shall be considered as areas subject to traffic loads, and therefore the
backfill shall be compacted in layers not more than 150 mm to a minimum of 95% of
Modified AASHTO maximum density. For gravel material and 100% of Modified
AASHTO maximum density for sand. (See also clause 5.7.2)
PSDB 1.3 Safety of Excavations (Additional sub-clause)
It will be the full responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all excavations are safe.
See also SABS 1200 D Clause 5.1.1 Safety. The costs of all safeguarding of
excavations will be deemed included in the rate for excavation.
PSDB 1.4 Trench Bottom (Clause 5.5)
Trenches shall be excavated, and trimmed to a depth of not less than 100mm below the
bedding level of the pipes, as indicated on pipeline longitudinal sections. These depths
shall be maintained for the full width and length of the trench and all stones, rocks or
other projections trimmed accordingly.
PSDB 1.5 Disposal of Excavated Material (Clause 5.6.3 and 5.6.4)
Surplus material from the trench excavation shall be disposed at a site to be found by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
PSDB 1.6 Deficiency of Backfill Material (Clause 5.6.5)
The free-haul distance shall be unlimited.
PSDB 1.7 Completion of Backfilling (Clause 5.6.6)
The Contractor shall be responsible for settlement of backfill. In the event that the
completed backfill is eroded, it shall be responsibility of the contractor to ensure that
the backfill is restored to its original state to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the
Contractor's expense.

The finishing-off of the pipeline surface shall be included in the price for excavation
and backfill.
PSDB 2 CONSTRUCTION
PSDB 2.1 Transport for Earthworks for Trenches (Clause 5.6.8)
No distinction shall be made or paid for overhaul, and freehaul shall be deemed to
extend indefinitely.
PSDB 2.2 Accommodation of Traffic (Clause 5.1.3)
The provision of accommodation of traffic as set out in PSA 5 will also be relevant to
this clause and no additional payment will be made for accommodation of traffic.
PSDB 3 TESTING (CLAUSE 7)
PSDB 3.1 Testing (Additional sub-clause)
The Contractor shall bear the cost of all tests regardless of whether the test indicate
acceptable compaction or not, notwithstanding the contents of Sub-clause 7.1.
For this Contract the following minimum number of density tests shall be done by the
Contractor:
(a) Pipe Bedding: one density test per 20m of trench length or part thereof for each
pipe scheduled separately.
(b) Backfilling: one density test per 20m of trench length or part thereof for each
300mm layer of backfill for each pipe scheduled.
The positions of these minimum number of density tests, shall be determined randomly
by the Contractor, and shall be clearly documented with the results. The results of the
tests shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall prove to the Engineer that the work as
a whole was done satisfactorily.
Additional tests, over and above the minimum tests could be ordered by the Engineer.
Payment for these tests will be made under Payment item PSA 7.1 if the tests indicated
that the density is as specified. If any tests fail, the cost of such tests shall be for the
account of the Contractor.
PSDB 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PSDB 4.1 Excavation (Clause 8.3.2)
The rates shall cover the cost of safeguarding the excavations as well as interference
(limiting working space) caused by pipe routes running close to existing services and
structures.
Unit: meter (m)

PSDB 4.2 Reinstate Road Surfaces complete with all courses (Clause 8.3.6.1)
The road layers shall conform to that of all the gravel surfaces specified for construction
under this contract. The following payment items will be relevant:
(a) Reinstate surfaced road complete with all layers
Unit: Square Meter (m2)
(b) Reinstate gravel shoulder complete with all layers
Unit: Square Meter (m2)
PSDB 4.3 Accommodation of Traffic (Clause 8.3.7)
Payment for this item will be as stated in PSA 5.

PSDM EARTHWORKS (ROADS, SUBGRADE)
PSDM 1 MATERIALS
PSDM 1.1 Classification for Excavation Purposes (Clause 3.1)
The provisions of clause PSD 1.1 shall also apply to this clause.
PSDM 2 CONSTRUCTION
PSDM 2.1 Use of Material (Clause 5.2.2.3)
(a) General
The Contractor shall program his sequence of operations in such a way that:
- cuts are done progressively in advance on the next street(s) on the work
programme in order to haul material as far as possible directly to its final position
onto the street under construction (on the relevant completed roadbed, subgrade or
selected subgrade layer), to avoid double handling as called for in Clause 3.3.2 DM,
- heavy equipment above 3 tonnes are not allowed to drive over the completed final
pavement layer, before or after surfacing, surfacing operations excluded.
- Mica schist material in the existing pavements which need to be excavated due to
inadequate strength will in general be spoiled. The Engineer may also instruct
compaction at higher densities, at an extra - over payment to increase strength.
PSDM 2.2 Treatment of Roadbed (Clause 5.2.3.3)
(a) Preparation and Compaction of Roadbed

Roadbed preparation in fill areas in general shall be done by ripping the in-situ material
to a depth of 150mm, watering, mixing and re-compacting to minimum of 93%
Modified AASHTO maximum density for gravel and 100% Modified AASHTO
maximum density for sand.
PSDM 2.3 selected layer (Clause 5.2.5)
The selected layer for material other than sand shall be compacted to at least 93% MOD
AASHTO maximum density. For sands, the applicable material shall be compacted to
at least 100% MOD AASHTO maximum density. The specified material shall also
conform to the following requirements:
SELECTED LAYER SPECIFICATIONS

CBR at 93% MOD. AASHTO Density 15% min. –

PSDM 2.4 Finishing and Trimming (Clause 5.2.4.3)
Before the Works are taken over, the Site and affected areas shall be cleaned up by
clearing, finishing, tidying and disposing of waste materials, clearing stormwater inlets,
outlets and openings and by neatly finishing of all intersections and kerbing. Material
shall only be spoiled at approved sites. Payment shall be made as a lump sum in the
Schedule of Quantities.
The tendered rate shall cover all costs to trim and finish road reserves which shall also
comply to the gradients and dimensions as indicated on the Drawings.
Material dumped on the Site by parties other than the Contractor, shall be removed by
the Contractor, if so instructed by the Engineer, to dump sites.
PSDM 3 OVERHAUL (CLAUSES 5.2.8.1 AND 5.2.8.2)
No overhaul will be paid for fill material
PSDM 4 TOLERANCES
PSDM 4.1 Dimensions, Levels, etc (Clause 6.2).
Degree of accuracy II shall apply.

PSG CONCRETE (STRUCTURAL)
MATERIAL (Clause 3)
Cement (Clause 3.2)
Applicable Specifications
· Add the following at the end of this clause:
“The SABS approved the European Pre-standard (ENV) specifications for Common and
Masonry cements and issued these standards as SABS ENV 197-1 and SABS ENV 413-1
respectively for general use. These standard specifications (and specifications directly
related thereto) will be applicable to this contract and the reference to the various cements
to be used will be based on the descriptions, notations and types as specified therein.
SABS 471, SABS 626 and SABS 831 have however not been withdrawn and are still
applicable. SABS ENV 197-1, SABS ENV 197-2, SABS ENV 413-1 and SABS ENV 413-
2 shall therefore be deemed to be included wherever reference is made to SABS standard
specifications in the project document and on the drawings. In case of conflict, SABS ENV
197-1 and SABS ENV 413-1 will govern.”
Alternative Types of Cement
Portland Fly Ash Cement (Additional subclause)
Portland fly ash cement shall be used in concrete for all water-retaining structures. For that
purpose CEM II B-V 32,5 or CEM II B-W 32,5 in compliance with the requirements of
SABS ENV 197:1992 shall be used, or Portland fly ash cement may be produced on site by
blending CEM I 42,5 with 25% Pulverized Fuel Ash (PFA).
If aggregates to be used in this Contract are alkali-reactive, the cement used on this Contract
shall not have an alkali content (Na2O + 0,658 K2O) which exceeds 0,6 % by mass of the
cement. The total alkali content of the concrete shall not exceed 2,1 kg/m3 for aggregates
falling in the rapidly expanding group (e.g. Malmesbury Group Metasediments) or 2,8
kg/m3 for Cape Granite. The Contractor shall submit the necessary test results to prove the
above.
The concrete mix must be determined by means of a proper mix design by an accredited
laboratory and must be approved by the Engineer.
Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA)
If PFA is blended with OPC on site, the following additional requirements shall apply:
(a) PFA shall be obtained from only one power station, from which the PFA has to be
approved for use in concrete. Should the Contractor wish to change the source of PFA

during the Contract, he shall inform the Engineer accordingly in advance, carry out tests
on the PFA, produce trial mixes in accordance with the Specifications and obtain the
Engineer's approval in writing. After receiving the approval, the Contractor shall
inform the Engineer in writing as to the date when the PFA from the new source is to
be used.
(b) All PFA shall comply with the requirements of BS 3892 Part 1 1982.
(c) The Contractor shall obtain the producer's test certificates for each consignment of PFA,
which shall be retained as record documents.
(d) Each consignment shall be tested for loss of ignition (which shall not exceed 7 %), and
the percentage mass retained on a 45 micron sieve by wet screening (which shall not
exceed 12,5 %). Testing shall be carried out in accordance with the procedures specified
in BS 3892 Part 1 1982.
(e) In addition, the chloride content and sulphate (SO3) content of the PFA shall be tested
every three months for each power station source.
If PFA and OPC are blended on site, PFA shall be stored separately from cement and shall
have separate delivery facilities. It shall be stored in the same manner as specified for
cement. When handled in bulk and stored in silos, PFA shall require a greater silo capacity
and more efficient filters than portland cement, and furthermore, provision must be made
for aeration in the storage silo. The percentage of PFA by mass shall be 25 % of the total
cementitious material in the concrete, which is defined as the total mass OPC and PFA
combined.
Storage of cement (Clause 3.2.3)
· Add the following after the words “...may promote deterioration.” In the second paragraph:
“It is of prime importance that cement to be used in concrete for water-retaining structures
shall always be stored in a cool environment, and it is strongly advised that cement silos be
painted white to reduce any temperature rise in the stored cement.”
Water (Clause 3.3)
· Add the following to this clause:
To limit heat gain in concrete for water-retaining structures, the temperature of mixing
water must preferably be below 20 °C when added to the concrete mix.
Aggregates (Clause 3.4)
Applicable specifications (Clause 3.4.1)
· Add the following:

The aggregates shall comply with the requirements of SABS 1083. The maximum water
absorption of the coarse aggregate shall not exceed 1 % and the flakiness index shall not
exceed 25 %. The maximum water demand of the fine aggregate shall be 190 l /m3.
Aggregates to be used in this contract shall be tested in accordance with subsection C-15
of SABS 1083 to determine whether they are potentially alkali-reactive. If they are alkali-
reactive they shall either be replaced with aggregates that are non-reactive or the
requirements of PSG-3.2.2.1 in respect of alkali-reactiveness shall apply.
The content of chloride ion in the aggregates shall be determined and shall be within the
limits specified in SABS 1083. Test results in this regard shall be submitted to the
Engineer.
At tender stage the Contractor shall assure himself by means of tests and test mixes by an
accredited laboratory that the fine and coarse aggregates that he intends to use comply with
the specification. The tendered rates shall therefore be deemed to allow for the importation
of aggregates, if necessary, that do comply with the Specification.
The Contractor shall be responsible for locating the sources of all aggregates.
Storage of aggregates (Clause 3.4.3)
· Add the following additional subclauses:
“(c) the aggregate to be used for water-retaining structures shall at all times be stored in
a cool environment and, if at time of mixing, the ambient temperature exceeds 30 °C,
only the coarse aggregate shall be sprayed with water to assist cooling. It is advisable
that all aggregate stockpiles be shaded from the sun by means of 80% shade netting.”
The Contractor shall ensure adequate drainage of the coarse aggregate stockpile.
Admixtures (Clause 3.5)
Approval of Admixtures Required (Clause 3.5.1)
The Contractor shall, by way of the information required in sub clause 3.5.1, prove to
the satisfaction of the Engineer that proposed admixtures are non-toxic, suitable for
water retaining structures, beneficial and not detrimental to the durability of the
concrete. The use of plasticizers with air-entraining properties will not be allowed.
Air-entraining Agents (Clause 3.5.2)
Air-entraining agents shall not be used.

PLANT (Clause 4)
Formwork (Clause 4.5)
Ties (Clause 4.5.3)
Formwork ties in water-retaining structures shall be of the 12 mm Extended Coil Tie

with Water-Bar type by Form-scaff. No ferrules or ferrule pipes may be used in
structural elements of water-retaining structures. The Contractor shall allow in his rates
for the specified formwork ties and ensure that his formwork is compatible with these
ties.
After removal of plastic spacing cones of the extended coil ties from concrete, the
openings in the concrete shall be roughened with a mechanical wire brush. Thereafter
the openings shall be painted with cement mortar and filled with a non-shrink grout
such as "Standard Bedding Grout" by Samson or a similar approved non-toxic product
compatible with the chemicals used in the water. The grout filling shall be applied in
such a way as to protect the ties against corrosion.
CONSTRUCTION (Clause 5)
Reinforcement (Clause 5.1)
Cover (Clause 5.1.3)
In Sub clause 5.1.3(a) amend the words " ... or stirrup" to read: "bar, secondary
reinforcement, tie stirrup, tying-wire knots or wire ends."
Add to Sub clause 5.1.3 : "Tying wire shall not encroach on the specified minimum
cover by more than a single strand thickness."
The minimum concrete cover to reinforcement shall be 50mm.
The cover blocks for water-retaining structures shall be manufactured from concrete of
grade, durability, density and impermeability at least equal to that specified for the
respective elements except that 12 mm stone instead of 19 mm stone shall be used. The
size of the cover blocks shall be 60 mm x 60 mm, with a thickness equal to the specified
cover. Wires shall be cast into the blocks to enable them to be fixed to the
reinforcement. The wires shall be fully galvanised Class A as per SABS 675 - 1993.
The wires shall be carefully held in position while the concrete is setting to ensure that
all the wires are inserted to a uniform and consistent depth of 50 % of the thickness of
the cover block for all the cover blocks. The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted
by means of a vibrator or vibratory table and the blocks shall be protected against early
drying and shrinkage due to sun and wind, by being kept continually wet while still in
the mould. After the blocks have been removed from the mould they shall be kept in
water continuously until being used, and this period shall not be less than 14 days.

A proper mix design for concrete in cover blocks shall be submitted

to the Engineer for approval.
Splicing (Clause 5.1.4)
Splice lengths in the case of water-retaining structures shall not be less than
58 diameters and in non-water-retaining structures not less than 40 diameters. Where
applicable in water-retaining structures, splices shall be staggered so that they are
evenly spread throughout the structure.
Formwork (Clause 5.2)
Classification of finishes (Clause 5.2.1)
· Add the following additional sub-subclauses to subclause (c):
(i) Special off-shutter finish
Special off-shutter formwork shall produce a finish that will comply with the
requirements of degree of accuracy I according to SABS 1200 G clause 6.2. For this
contract the special off-shutter finish is applicable to all visible concrete.
Formwork for all classes of finish shall be made of steel panels. Small approved
laminated wooden board inserts to steel framed panels may only be used in confined
places and the use thereof will be subject to approval by the Engineer. The panels shall
be free from rust, ridges, fins, bulges, imperfections, irregularities, chips and holes. The
concrete surface shall be smooth and free from irregularities, bulges, ridges,
imperfections, air bubbles, honeycomb or surface discolouration. Grout checks shall be
used at all construction joints and chamfers at all corners.
Joints between panels shall be sealed tightly to prevent local honeycombing or leaching
of concrete. Joints between panels shall form straight horizontal and vertical lines
which shall be spaced evenly on the formed concrete surface, and shall be even and
smooth and require minimal or no finishing. The layout of all formwork panels and
construction joints shall be discussed with the Engineer before application and shall be
approved in writing prior to erection of formwork.
(ii) Finish on blinding layers underneath the floor of the pump station
A blinding layer of 15 MPa/19 mm concrete with a minimum thickness of 75 mm shall

be placed on the excavated or backfilled surface as applicable. Underneath the wall
footing this blinding layer shall be finished to a rough surface with a straight edge.
Elsewhere it shall have a wood-floated finish. A layer of 250 micron polyethylene sheet
shall be placed on top of the cement/sand mortar prior to the construction of the
reservoir floor.
(iii)Visible corners

All visible corners shall have a 25 mm x 25 mm chamfer.

Removal of formwork (Clause 5.2.5)
· Add the following to subclause 5.2.5:
Formwork for PFA concrete shall remain in place after placing of the concrete as
indicated in Table 2 for Portland Blastfurnace cement.
Concrete (Clause 5.5)
Quality (Clause 5.5.1)
Workability (Clause 5.5.1.3)
The workability range for all PFA concrete (slump) shall be between 50 and 75 mm.
Durability (Clause 5.5.1.5)
The maximum ratio of water to cementitious material shall be 0,5.
Strength concrete (Clause 5.5.1.7)
(a) Due to the design approach and assumptions adopted for this contract, it is of the utmost
importance that good strength concrete with consistent quality and composition is used
throughout. All possible measures to limit shrinkage shall be applied.
(b) In addition to the requirement that the Contractor design the mixes to the specified
strengths, the cementitious material content shall be such as not to cause alkali-aggregate
reaction and shall not exceed 380 kg/m3 for 30 MPa/19 mm concrete or 460 kg/m3 for 40
MPa/19 mm concrete.
(c) All concrete shall be based on designed mixes. Trial mixes shall be made by an approved
laboratory with suitable experience in the design of PFA concrete mixes and mix designs
and cube results submitted to the Engineer.
Mixing (Clause 5.5.3)
Ready-mixed concrete (Clause 5.5.3.2)
The use of ready-mixed concrete for this contract shall be permitted provided that it
complies with the requirements of this specification. Test results obtained by such a
production facility shall not be regarded as part of the quality control system, and the
Contractor shall take his own samples of concrete on site and have them tested in
accordance with clause 7 of SABS 1200 G and Clause
Placing (Clause 5.5.5)
· Add the following to subclause 5.5.5.1:

The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours’ notice of his intention to cast
concrete.
Concrete in water-retaining structures shall not be allowed to fall freely through a height
of more than 2,4 m.
Additional subclause after subclause 5.4.5.9
No kickers in walls or columns will be allowed.
Construction Joints (Clause 5.5.7)
Before construction work commences the Contractor shall indicate on the drawings his
proposal for positioning construction joints and submit these to the Engineer for his
comment and approval.
· Replace the first sentence of clause 5.5.7.3 with the following:
The method adopted for forming joints not covered by 5.5.7.1 and unforeseen joints
(see 2.4.3) in non-water-retaining structures shall be one of items (a) to (d) and in water-
retaining structures shall be as in subclause (e) hereafter.
Add the following additional paragraph to clause 5.5.7.3 after item (d):
(e) Construction joints in water-retaining structures:
Depending on the weather conditions, the surface of the concrete shall be sprayed
with a high pressure water jet within 24 hours of casting to remove all laitance and
fine particles to a depth of at least 10 mm and to expose the coarse aggregate
embedded in sound concrete. The Contractor shall ensure that the green concrete is
not damaged or disturbed during the preparation of the joint and that waterstops are
not damaged.
After the reinforcement for the next pour has been fixed and the formwork erected,
the construction joint shall be cleaned thoroughly with a pressurised water jet. The
joint shall then be wetted continuously with water for 24 hours to completely saturate
the concrete immediately before new concrete is cast. Before the new concrete is
cast all excess water shall be removed from the construction joint and the new
concrete shall be cast directly onto the prepared surface.
This procedure must be read in conjunction with the notes on the concrete drawings.
(f) Plastic sheets and tubes

Plastic sheets and tubes used for curing shall be waterproof and may not be torn or
be otherwise discontinuous. It shall be white or light-coloured. Black or other dark
coloured plastic sheets will not be allowed under any circumstances. Sheets and
tubes shall be held down or fixed securely to the elements being cured and joints in
sheets shall be taped to prevent loss of moisture from the concrete. Care shall be
exercised to prevent staining of exposed concrete.
(g) Duration of curing
The curing period shall be at least 10 days.
(h) General
Notwithstanding the preceding specifications, the Contractor shall also ensure that the
concrete shall not be exposed to thermal shocks during the first 28 days after casting
and he shall take the necessary, additional precautionary measures to shield the concrete
with plastic sheets or hessian during extreme warm, cold, dry or windy weather
conditions. Hessian shall be wetted should the conditions necessitate this. Curing shall
be done in such a manner as not to cause staining, contamination or marring of the
surface of the concrete.
The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to prevent water used for curing
from penetrating the soil underneath or adjacent to the structures. The water shall be
drained away effectively as soon as possible to prevent any ponding.
Adverse weather conditions (Clause 5.5.9)
PSG-5.5.9.2 Replace the first sentence with the following:
The temperature of the concrete when deposited shall not be allowed to exceed 25 °C.
Concrete Surfaces (Clause 5.5.10)
(a) Wood-floated Finish
When a wood-floated finish is specified, the surface shall first be treated as specified in
subclause 5.5.10.1, and after the concrete has hardened sufficiently, it shall be floated
to a uniform surface free from trowel marks with a wood float. The levelled surface
shall be wood-floated either by hand or by machine only, to remove trowel marks.
(b) Steel-floated Finish
When a steel-floated finish is specified, the surface shall be treated as specified for a
wood-floated finish above, except that when the bleed water has disappeared and the
concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent the migration of concrete foam to the

surface, the levelled surface shall be floated with a steel trowel on which a firm uniform
pressure shall be applied to provide a dense, smooth, uniform surface free from trowel
marks.
(c) Power-floated Finish
When a power-floated finish is specified, the surface shall be treated as specified for a
wood-floated finish above, except that the levelled concrete surface shall be power-
floated to provide a dense, smooth, uniform surface of high quality free from trowel
marks.
Watertight Concrete (Clause 5.5.11)
All water-retaining structures and valve chambers built under this contract shall be
watertight without the addition of supplementary cement plaster, coatings or
membranes. Ensuring watertightness is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor
and he shall take all the measures deemed necessary to achieve this. All remedial work
that has to be undertaken to ensure watertightness shall be for the Contractor's own
account. Refer also to the relevant payment clause in this regard.
Defects(Clause 5.5.14)
The method of repair of defects in the concrete shall be by first applying an approved
cement-based, epoxy-modified anti-corrosion and bonding agent like SikaTop-
Armatec110 EpoCem by Sika to the prepared surface, followed by an approved one-
component, non-sag, cement based patching and repair mortar like SikaRep LW by
Sika. All products shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
specification or such other methods as may be acceptable to the Engineer. All repair
materials shall be equivalent to concrete in respect of thermal properties and structural
elasticity. Such repairs will only be allowed after the defects were inspected by the
Engineer and his written approval has been obtained.
Items built into water-retaining structures (Additional Clause)
The building in of items, such as puddle pipes, into water-retaining structures may be
executed in either of the following ways, viz:
(a) the items shall be positioned prior to construction of the relevant part of the water
retaining structure and subsequently cast in simultaneously with the concreting of
the specific part of the water-retaining structure; or

(b) recesses or holes may be blocked out in or through the relevant part of the water-
retaining structure, and the item may then be positioned afterwards and grouted
or concreted in, in an approved manner.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact that the decision as to which alternative
to adopt is solely his and that finally the works shall be completed as specified and as
detailed on the drawings.
In the case of (b) above where pockets were left for the later casting in of items, the
following procedure shall be followed:
The old concrete surface shall be treated with an approved bonding agent such as
Baralatex. The pocket shall be filled with the same type and strength of concrete as the
original type. After removal of the shutters, the area shall be sealed with an approved
sealant to ensure that the concrete cures correctly, does not dry out quickly and therefore
does not shrink and crack, which will be unacceptable.
Building in of items will not be measured separately as it is included in the supply and
installation of the pipes and specials measured in Section 1200 L.
Items built into existing structures (Additional clause)
Where pipes or other items have to be built into existing water-retaining structures, the
existing concrete shall be cut out carefully to obtain sufficient space to install the items.
The building in of the items shall then proceed as described in PSG-5.7(b). Building in
of the items will not be measured separately as it is included in the supply and
installation of the pipes and pipe specials as measured in Section 1200 L. The cost of
breaking into existing concrete and making good after installation will however be
measured separately.
TOLERANCES (Clause 6)
Permissible deviations (Clause 6.2)
Specified PDs (Clause 6.2.3)
Replace the permissible deviation for cover to reinforcement (item (a)3)) with -0 +5 mm
irrespective of the Degree of Accuracy.
PSGA-7 TESTS (Clause 7)
Facilities and frequency of sampling (Clause 7.1)
Frequency of sampling (Clause 7.1.2)
Replace this clause with the following: (Clause 7.1.2.1)

“Subject to the requirements of 7.1.2.4, while concrete of a particular grade and in

sufficient quantity is being placed under the same conditions, sets of samples (each
sample, as defined in 2.3(b), being sufficient for four cubes) shall be taken until 30 valid
test results have been obtained.
The sets of samples shall be taken in accordance with SABS Method 861 as close as is
practicable to the start of placing and at appropriate intervals after that, or from one
particular batch and then from subsequent batches chosen at appropriate intervals.”

Testing (Clause 7.2)
General (Clause 7.2.1)
The Contractor shall allow in his tendered rates for all the costs for quality or
process control testing.
Early-strengths Testing (Clause 7.2.4)
Of each sample of four cubes, one cube shall be tested at 7 days and the
remaining three cubes at 28 days.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (Clause 8)
Measurement and rates (Clause 8.1)
Reinforcement (Clause 8.1.2)
Replace subparagraph (a) of clause 8.1.2.2 with the following:

“The mass of steel bars will be measured as the total mass of the steel,
irrespective of diameters.”
Amend clause 8.1.2.3 (a) as follow:
Delete the words “nominal size 25 mm” in the first line of this subparagraph
Delete subparagraph (b)
Concrete (Clause 8.1.3)
Payment for concrete in water-retaining structures will be made as follows:

(a) Full payment will be made for concrete when it has been placed and accepted by
the Engineer as described in subclause 8.1.3.3 and other relevant clauses, except
that payment for curing and testing for watertightness, including any repair work
necessary, will be made separately in the case of water-retaining structures.
(b) A provisional sum is allowed in the Schedule of Quantities for the curing of all
concrete in water-retaining structures measured under item 8.4.3 as scheduled. If
in the opinion of the Tenderer the provisional sum is not sufficient to cover all his
costs for curing, he shall make provision therefor in his tendered rates for concrete.
The provisional sum will be paid fully when curing has been done as specified.
If curing has not been done in accordance with the specifications, payment of the
full amount, or as much thereof as determined by the Engineer, will be withheld
permanently.

(c) A provisional sum is allowed in the Schedule of Quantities for testing the
watertightness of the concrete in water-retaining structures measured under
item 8.4.3 including the repair thereof if necessary, as described in PSG-7.2.5. This
amount will only be paid when the relevant structure has passed the watertightness
test in all respects and certified as such by the Engineer. If in the opinion of the
Tenderer the provisional sum allowed is not sufficient to cover his costs for the
watertightness tests, he shall make provision therefor in his tendered rates for
concrete.
Casting in of pipes and specials (Additional clause)
No separate items will be scheduled for building in items supplied under this Contract
except for those specially measured in the Schedule of Quantities. The relevant rates
for supply and installation shall cover the cost for casting in the items supplied under
this Contract whether the items are positioned prior to construction or subsequently
placed in blocked-out holes.
Scheduled Concrete items (Clause 8.4)
Strength concrete, grade (Clause 8.4.3)
· Add the following to the payment paragraph:
“The tendered rate for concrete to be used in water-retaining structures shall also
include all measures necessary to store cement, water and aggregates in a cool
environment to ensure that the ingredients of the concrete are cool at the time of
mixing.”
Clause 8.4.7
No-fines Concrete (describe class and position) (New clause and payment item)
Unit: m3
The relevant measurement and payment clauses for strength concrete (clause 8.4.3)
shall apply.
Clause 8.4.8
Disinfection of water-retaining structures (describe structure) (New clause and

payment item) Unit : Sum
The sum shall include all costs to disinfect the water-retaining structure as specified,
including discharge of wash water at a suitable site to be found by the Contractor.
Clause 8.4.9
Curing of concrete (structure to be stated) (Additional item)

Unit: Provisional Sum

The stated sum shall include all costs to cure the concrete as specified in Clause 5.5.8
and PSG-5.5.8 in the structures stated. The curing of concrete in other structures not
stated will be deemed to be included in the rates tendered for concrete under item 8.4.3.
Payment will be made in accordance with PSG-8.1.3(b).
Clause 8.4.10
Test for watertightness of structures (describe structure) (New clause and payment item)
.Unit: Provisional Sum
The stated sum shall include all costs associated with the execution of the watertightness
test as specified in PSG-7.2.5, including all labour, equipment and special fittings to
isolate the specific element under test. Water for the first watertightness test will be
provided free of charge by the Employer. In the event of failure, water for subsequent
tests shall be for the Contractor’s own account.
The full provisional sum will only be paid when the structure has passed the water
tightness test and has been certified as such by the Engineer. No payment will be made
for the test if the structure did not pass the test for water tightness.
Installation of pipes and pipe specials in existing concrete (describe items and
locality) (Additional clause and item)
Unit: Sum
The tendered sum for each item shall cover the cost of breaking out existing concrete
sufficient to allow the installation of the item in its correct position, additional cost for
installation not measured elsewhere, and making good of the concrete after completion
of the installation of the item. The sum tendered shall be regarded as an extra over the
cost for supply and installation of the item which has been measured elsewhere under
Section 1200 L.
Miscellaneous Items (New clause and payment item)
These items will be measured per metre, per square metre, or per number or as a sum
as scheduled.
The rate or sum shall cover the cost of the complete supply and installation of the
scheduled item in accordance with the specifications and as described in the schedule
of quantities and as detailed on the drawings including casting into concrete where
applicable.

BEDDING (PIPES)
PSLB 1 DEFINITIONS
Main fill (Sub clause 2.3)

Delete "150mm" in line and substitute "300mm:".
PSLB 2 MATERIALS
PSLB 2.1 SELECTION (Clause 3.4.2)
It is the Contractor's responsibility to find suitable sources of selected granular and

selected fill material.
Suitable material excavated from trenches can be used for bedding material. Otherwise
bedding material shall be transported from borrow pits or commercial sources. Only
one payment item has been included for selected granular material and one for selected
fill material, irrespective of the source.
The freehaul distance for obtaining material for bedding shall be unlimited.
PSLB 3 CONSTRUCTION
PSLB 3.1 DETAILS OF BEDDING (Clause 5.1.2)
Pipe bedding shall be in accordance with the bedding for flexible pipes Drawing LB-2.
PSLB 3.2 PLACING (Clause 5.1.3)
Placing and compaction of the pipe bedding shall be regarded as the most critical phase
of the backfilling operation. Backfilling beyond the bedding cradle and thereafter the
selected fill blanket shall only proceed after approval by the Engineer.
As soon as possible after trench bottoms have been passed by the Engineer, compacted
material forming the bedding cradle shall be placed and trimmed to the required grade
and level over the full width of the trench. Before laying the pipe, bell-holes for the
couplings shall be excavated to ensure that the pipe is supported on the trench bottom
over its full length and not on the coupling. The bell-hole shall be deep enough so that
the coupling is at least 50 mm from the trench bottom. Under no circumstances may
bricks, stones or pieces of timber be used for supporting pipes in the trench.
Bedding material shall be placed and compacted evenly on both sides of the pipe. The
method adopted shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. Whatever method is
adopted and approved, great care shall be exercised at all times to prevent damage to
the pipe or disturbance of the pipe level and grade. The top of the completed bedding
shall form a level surface completely filling the space between the pipe and trench walls,
including any cavities that might exist in the trench walls.
Compaction shall be in layers not exceeding 150mm measured in the loose and watered
to optimum moisture content and compacted to 93% of modified AASHTO maximum

density. Particular care shall be taken to compact the material in the "wedges" formed
by the curvature of pipe bottoms.
The Contractor may use his discretion as to whether he will backfill around joints before
the pipeline is hydrostatically tested. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
location and repair of any leaks on the pipeline under hydrostatic test and no extra
payment will be made for any re-excavation and subsequent reinstatement which may
be necessary to locate and remedy leaks. Should the Contractor elect to leave joint
holes open until after the hydrostatic test, he shall provide at his own expense effective
and approved barricades and fences around each hole for the protection of persons and
animals. In built-up areas, barricades shall be clearly marked at night time with red
warning lights.
PSLB 4 TOLERANCES
PSLB 4.1 MOISTURE CONTENT AND DENSITY (Clause 6.1)
Degree of accuracy II shall be applicable to bedding material.

PSLB 5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PSLB 5.1 PRINCIPLES (Clause 8.1)
PSLB 5.2 Volume of Bedding Material (Clause 8.1.3)
Add the following to Clause 8.1.3

(c) the area of the pipe will be subtracted from the area of the trench in the
calculation of the volume of bedding.
PSLB 5.3 FREEHAUL DISTANCE (Clause 8.1.6)
The freehaul distance for acquiring bedding material shall be unlimited.

CABLE DUCTS
SCHEDULED ITEMS (clause 8.2)
Excavation (clause 8.2.2)
The provision of clause PSD 1.1 shall apply to this item.

Unit: Cubic Meter (m3).

PSME SUBBASE
PSME 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
PSME 1.1 G5 SUBBASE MATERIAL (CLAUSE 3.2.2)
Replace clause 3.2.1.d with the following:

The CBR of the subbase layer will be 45% at a compaction of 95% of MOD
AASHTO maximum density. The subbase material shall be compacted to the
specified MOD AASHTO maximum density. In the event of the inability to
source the specified subbase material, some form of mechanical modification
may be required to achieve the required material specifications. The tendered
rates shall be deemed to include the above-mentioned circumstance.
The G5 Subbase material to be used for this contract must adhere to the
following specifications:
· CBR at 95% MOD. AASHTO Density 45

· MINIMUM COMPACTION (MOD AASHTO density) 95%
· Plasticity Index (max.) 10
· Maximum size (mm) 63
· Minimum Grading (GM) 1.5
PSME 2 SELECTION (CLAUSE 3.5)
The Contractor will be responsible to source all material required for the
construction as set out in the project specification. The material may be
obtained from commercial sources or from borrow pits identified by the
Contractor. Should material be obtained from borrow pits, written approval from
the Owner must be submitted to the Engineer for the approval of the use of the
borrow pit.
PSME 3 OVERHAUL
The free-haul distance for subbase material will be unlimited.
PSME 4 TOLERANCES
PSME 4.1 DIMENSIONS, LEVELS, ETC (CLAUSE 6.2).
Degree of accuracy II shall apply.

PA STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY OF PIPES, SPECIALS AND

FITTINGS FOR CIVIL WORKS
PA 1 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture and supply of CID and COD
fibre cement pipes, uPVC, GRP, polyethylene, galvanized and epoxy-coated
steel pipes, and stainless-steel pipes.
This specification is a supplement to the relevant SABS specifications and will
in no way relieve the Supplier or Contractor of the requirements of the relevant
SABS specifications.
Where this specification is required for a project the following specifications,
including this one, shall inter-alia, form part of the contract document.
Project Specifications SABS 1200 L
PA 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Pipes and fittings shall at all times be transported and handled in such a manner
as to guard against loss or damage.
All fittings and specials shall be designed and tested for a minimum working
pressure of 1,6 MPa or 1.5 time the working pressure of the pipeline whichever
the highest
PA 3 MATERIALS
The requirements of Clause 3 of SABS 1200 L shall apply mutatis mutandis.

PA 4 FIBRE CEMENT PIPES AND FITTINGS
PA 4.1 PIPES AND COUPLINGS
PA 4.1.1 Manufacture of pipes shall conform with SABS 1223

PA 4.1.2 Where single or double bitumen dipped pipes are specified, the pipes shall
be bitumen dipped in accordance with the Standard Specification for the
Bitumen Coating of Pipes and Couplings.
PA 4.2 FITTINGS
PA 4.2.1 All flanges shall be drilled to SABS 1123

PA 4.2.2 Fittings shall be manufactured from cast iron, hot dipped galvanised or
epoxy lined and coated mild steel
PA 4.2.3 Clause 7(epoxy lining and epoxy coating) shall apply to the corrosion
protection of steel fittings
PA 4.2.4 CID cast iron fittings shall have ends machined to class 18 dimensions
PA 4.2.5 Sufficient lubricant for couplings shall be supplied.
PA 4.2.6 Fittings shall be designed and tested for a minimum working pressure of
1,6 MPa or 1.5 times the working pressure of the pipeline whichever the
highest.

PA 5 UPVC PIPES AND FITTINGS
PA 5.1 PIPES
PA 5.1.1 Pipes meet all the requirements of SABS 966 and shall carry the SABS
mark.
PA 5.1.2 Pipes shall have rubber ring joints
PA 5.1.3 All fittings shall be supplied with sealing rings
PA 5.1.4 The spigot end shall be chamfered at an angle of 15o . The chamfer shall
be evenly formed both over its length and circumference. The chamfer
shall in all respects conform to the SABS 966 specification.
PA 5.1.5 The socket end shall be of a constant diameter and be evenly formed so
as to allow the use of a standard sealing ring. The shape of the socket
shall be that to fit the SABS approved sealing ring.
PA 5.1.6 The sealing ring shall conform to the relevant SABS standard. No other
rings shall be acceptable. A stiffener shall be fitted within the sealing ring
and shall have dimensions such that the pipes can be jointed without the
use of abnormal force (i.e. beyond that recommended by the pipe
manufacturer's installation manual).
PA 5.1.7 The working pressures uPVC pipes shall be downgrade for the relevant
ambient and fluid temperatures and the Tenderer shall submit detailed
calculations of the downgrading of the pipes as well as laying and testing
instructions of the pipes with his offer. The Tenderer will be responsible
for obtaining the relevant temperature data. Tenderers also take into
account during their calculations that NamWater field test all newly
constructed pipelines 1.5 times the specified working pressure of the pipe.
PA 5.2 FITTINGS
PA 5.2.1 Fittings shall conform to SABS 966

PA 5.2.2 All fittings shall be supplied with sealing rings
PA 5.2.3 All fittings such as scour tees, hydrant tees, reducers, etc. shall be made
from cast iron, hot dipped galvanised or epoxy lined and coated mild steel
PA 5.2.4 Aluminium or uPVC fittings are not acceptable
PA 5.2.5 Fittings shall be designed and tested for a minimum working pressure of
1,6 Mpa or 1.5 times the working pressure of the pipeline whichever the
highest and shall have a rubber ring joint and internal shoulder where
applicable.
PA 5.2.6 All flanges shall be drilled to SABS 1123
PA 6 MPVC PIPES
No mPVC pipe offers will be accepted.

PA 7 POLYETHYLENE PIPES AND FITTINGS
Pipes and fittings shall be one of the following types:

Type 4 high density pipes and compression fittings to SABS 533 (if type not
specified)
Type 1 low density pipes and nylon insert fittings to SABS 533
Non SABS (Agro) pipes and nylon insert fittings.
PA 8 GALVANIZED PIPES AND SPECIALS
PA 8.1 STRAIGHT GALVANIZED PIPES
PA 8.1.1 Pipes shall conform to SABS 62

PA 8.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, pipes shall be medium class
PA 8.2 STEEL FITTINGS MANUFACTURED FROM STRAIGHT GALVANIZED
PIPES
PA 8.2.1 Damage to galvanized surface due to welding shall be kept to the

minimum
PA 8.2.2 Where accessible, welds on the inner surfaces of the fittings shall be
treated with one coat of cold-galvanizing paint.
PA 8.2.3 Welds on the outside of fittings shall be cleaned and treated with one coat
cold-galvanizing paint.
PA 8.2.4 Steel fittings to be hot-dip galvanized
PA 8.2.5 Fittings shall be manufactured from medium class pipe to SABS 62
PA 8.2.6 After fabrication fittings shall be hot-dip zinc-coated to SABS 763
PA 8.2.7 If not specified in SABS 763 or elsewhere, minimum thickness of
galvanizing shall be 65µm (455g/m2)
PA 9 EPOXY PAINTED STEEL PIPES AND SPECIALS
PA 9.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The pipes and specials shall be epoxy lined, on the inside, to SABS 1217
Unless otherwise specified, all buried steel pipes and pipes embedded in
concrete shall be epoxy coated, on the outside, to SABS 1217 and all other
pipes and specials, red lead primer coated, on the outside.
PA 9.2 MANUFACTURE
PA 9.2.1 Straight pipes

a) Pipes shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of SABS
719. Pipes shall be manufactured from grade A or grade B carbon steel,
except for branches, etc. of diameter 150 mm NB and smaller, which may
be manufactured from medium class uncoated steel pipe to SABS 62.
Pipes to be coupled by flexible couplings shall have the external weld bead
ground flush with the barrel for a length of 200 mm from the end to be
coupled.
d) The wall thickness shall be as specified on the drawings.

PA 9.2.2 Specials
a) Specials shall be manufactured from grade A or grade B carbon steel.
b) Specials to be coupled by flexible couplings shall have the external weld
bead ground flush with the barrel for a length of 200 mm from the end to
be coupled.
c) Flanges shall conform to the requirements of SABS 1123.
d) Dimensional requirements of specials pertaining to outside diameter, wall
thickness, pipe ends shall conform to requirements of SABS 719.
e) The wall thickness shall be as specified on the drawings.
f) Centrelines of barrels and branches shall intersect at right angles.
g) Thrust flanges and puddle flanges shall be fillet welded continuously to the
barrel, around the whole circumference, on both sides of the flanges.
h) Thrust flanges and puddle flanges shall conform to the dimensions of
SABS 1123 flanges, but left un-drilled and un-machined.
i) All finished specials shall be visually examined and shall be free of
injurious defects.
j) Welds shall be inspected by the application of a penetrate dye on the
inside of the welds and no trace of the dye shall appear on the outside.
The use of penetrate dye must not be used as a test, to evaluate the
pressure class or the water tightness of the fitting.
PA 9.3 LINING OF STEEL PIPES AND SPECIALS
PA 9.3.1 The surface to be lined shall be treated as follows:

a) Contaminants shall be removed by an appropriate method such as with
an organic solvent emulsion cleaner or a suitable detergent.
b) The surface shall be blast-cleaned with a suitable abrasive to achieve a
preparation grade of not less than Sa 3, and shall have an average surface
profile of 25 to100µm.
c) The surface shall be blown clean with clean dry compressed air, dusted
off with clean dry brushes or vacuum-cleaned so as to give dust and
debris, assessed in accordance with SABS 769, not greater than 0,1%.
d) The clean pipe surfaces should be coated as soon as possible, but in any
event before condensation, oxidation or contamination of the blast-
cleaned surface can take place.
e) Should immediate lining not be possible for reasons of breakdown, etc. or
should any atmospheric oxidation take place between the completion of
blast cleaning and commencement of lining, such oxidation shall be
removed by open nozzle type localized blasting to restore the specified
surface finish.

PA 9.3.2 The lining shall be applied as follows.

a) The lining material shall be Copon EP 2300T two pack epoxy coating or
Copon KSIR88 in the case of airless spray application. Substitute paints
shall not be used without prior approval:
b) 1st coat: All surfaces shall receive the first coat of epoxy resin in a colour
red oxide or similar colour distinctly different from the subsequent coats.
The application shall be free of all tears, runs, pinholes, holidays or dust
particles, and the dry film thickness of the coat shall not exceed 50mm,
above the peaks of the blast profile as measured by an eddy current
instrument, unless otherwise recommended by the coating manufacturer.
The first coat shall be allowed to dry for a minimum of 24 hours and a
maximum of 72 hours or such other intervals as specified by the supplier
of the epoxy resin, during which time the coat shall be protected against
contamination by dust or other foreign matter, shall be kept dry and
shaded from direct sunlight.
c) 2nd coat: The second coat shall then be applied in a colour pale oxide or
a shade tinted sufficiently to ensure complete and correct coverage of the
first coat application. The application shall be free of all tears, runs,
pinholes, holidays or dust particles. Drying and curing of the second coat
shall be as for the first coat.
d) 3rd coat: The third coat shall then be applied in a colour pale oxide or a
shade tinted sufficiently to ensure complete and correct coverage of the
second coat application. The application shall be free of all tears, runs,
pinholes, holidays or dust particles. Drying and curing of the third coat
shall be as for the first coat.
e) 4th and subsequent coats, if applicable, shall be applied, dried and cured
as specified for the previous coats.
f) The final lining shall have a total dry film thickness not less than 200µm in
any area measured by means of an eddy current instrument. The lining
shall be allowed to dry completely and cure for the time specified by the
supplier of the epoxy resin.
g) The ends of a pipe, intended to be butt-welded to another on site, shall be
left uncoated and unlined for a distance of 50mm from the end.
h) A flanged pipe that is to be lined shall have the lining continued as a
coating over the entire mating surface of the flanges.
i) The end of the pipe to be lined and joined to another pipe by means of a
coupling shall have the lining continued as a coating on the outside of the
pipe for at least 150mm from the end.
j) The whole lining shall be pinhole free when tested with a pinhole detector
using a voltage of 80 to 100 Volts.
PA 9.4 COATING OF STEEL PIPES AND SPECIALS
PA 9.4.1 Epoxy Coating

a) The surface preparation and application shall be as for the lining (Clause
PD 10.3)

b) The whole coating shall be pinhole free when tested with a pinhole
detector using a voltage of 80 to 100 Volts.
PA 9.4.2 Red lead primer coating
a) The surface preparation and application shall be as for the lining (Clause
PD 10.3)
b) A minimum of two coats of red lead primer, type 1 grade 2 to SABS 312
shall be applied.
c) The primer shall be brush applied.
d) The second coat shall not be applied until a minimum of 36 hours has
elapsed since the completion of the application of the first coat.
e) The total dry thickness of the coating shall be at least 60 µm.
f) The coating shall overlap the extension of the lining by at least 40mm.
PA 10 STAINLESS STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS
PA 10.1 GENERAL
PA 10.1.1 Pipes shall be manufactured from grade 304 stainless steel.

PA 10.1.2 End flanges shall be manufactured from grade 304 stainless steel (unless
specified to be mild steel)
PA 10.1.3 Thrust and puddle flanges to be embedded in concrete may be
manufactured from grade A or B carbon steel to SABS 719.
PA 10.1.4 Thickness of flanges shall be as specified by SABS 1123 for mild steel
flanges.
PA 10.1.5 Flanges shall be drilled to SABS 1123.
PA 10.1.6 Pipes shall have not more than one longitudinal seam.
PA 10.1.7 All welds shall be in accordance with the requirements of SABS 044 part
3
PA 10.1.8 Welds shall be inspected by the application of a penetrant dye on the
inside of the welds and no trace of the dye shall appear on the outside.
The use of penetrate dye must not be used as a test, to evaluate the
pressure class or the water tightness of the fitting.
PA 10.1.9 Dimensional requirements of specials pertaining to outside diameter, wall
thickness, pipe ends shall conform to the requirements of SABS 719.
PA 10.1.10 The wall thickness shall be as specified on the drawings.
PA 11 FLANGES
Flanges shall be drilled off-center to suit mating flanges drilled to SABS 1123
PA 12 BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS AND GASKETS
PA 12.1 GENERAL
PA 12.1.1 If specified, all flanged items shall be supplied complete with bolts, nuts,
washers and rubber insertion gaskets for jointing up to adjacent fittings
PA 12.1.2 All bolts, nuts and washers to be hot dip galvanized to SABS 763

PA 12.1.3 All bolts and nuts shall be ISO metric with hexagon heads to SABS 135
PA 12.1.4 Bolts shall be of sufficient length for at least two screw threads to protrude
outside nuts when assemblies are fully tightened
PA 12.1.5 One washer will be supplied per stud/nut or bolt/nut combination
PA 13 TOLERANCES OF WELDED STEEL SPECIALS AND FITTINGS
PA 13.1 GENERAL
PA 13.1.1 Dimensional requirements of specials pertaining to outside diameter, wall

thickness, pipe ends shall conform to requirements of SABS 719
PA 13.1.2 The total angle of bends shall not deviate more than that given in the
Schedule of Quantities by more than 30 minutes. Bends for pipes of
outside diameter 219 mm or less may be of even curvature, but for bigger
pipes all bends shall be gusseted and dimensional requirements and
tolerances shall be in accordance with BS 534.
PA 13.1.3 Tees shall be fabricated in accordance with BS 534 but the branch axis
shall be truly at right angle to the barrel axis.
PA 13.1.4 Specials and fittings for which “exact” lengths are specified shall be
subject to a tolerance of ±6 mm.
PA 14 REQUIREMENTS TO BE SPECIFIED
In addition to the nominal bore, working pressure and flange table, the following
requirements are to be specified on the drawings or in the tender document:
PA 14.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PA 14.1.1 Whether nuts, bolts, washers and gaskets are to be supplied (applicable
to supply-and-delivery tenders only).
PA 14.1.2 Point of delivery.
PA 14.2 FIBRE CEMENT PIPES
Whether un-dipped, single or double bitumen dipped.

PA 14.3 POLYETHYLENE PIPES
Type of pipe
PA 14.4 GALVANIZED PIPES AND SPECIALS
Whether steel fittings shall be manufactured from straight galvanized pipe (9.2),
or hot dip zinc coated (9.3)
PA 14.5 EPOXY PAINTED STEEL PIPES AND SPECIALS
Whether epoxy painted coating or red oxide primer is required on the outside of
the pipe or special.
PA 15 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PA 15.1 GENERAL

All items shall be measured as set out in Clause 8 of SABS 1200L and as
specified in the Schedule of Quantities and payment will be made in accordance
with the tender price per unit of the particular item. In manufacture, supply and
deliver Contracts it will be measured by length of pipes and number fittings and
specials supplied at point of delivery.
Distinction shall be made between different types of pipes, fittings and specials
as well as diameter and pressure ratings and shall be scheduled as separated
items.
The rate tendered shall include for the fabrication, testing, lining and coating,
protection, transport to site, off-loading storing and installation, where
applicable, all in accordance with the relevant clauses of the specifications.
All pipes, fittings and specials manufactured, tested, lined and coated, in
accordance with the specifications and transported and delivered to Site, stored
and accepted and installed where applicable on Site, will be measured for
payment purposes under this section and shall include for supplementary
protection material required.

PB STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY OF VALVES AND OTHER

PIPELINE ACCESSORIES FOR CIVIL WORKS
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture and supply of isolating valves
and flexible couplings.
This specification is a supplement to the relevant SABS specifications and will
in no way relieve the Supplier or Contractor of the requirements of the relevant
SABS specifications.
Where this specification is required for a project the following specifications,
including this one, shall inter-alia, form part of the contract document.
Project Specifications SABS 1200 L
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Design Pressure
Each valve and coupling shall have a working pressure as stated on the
drawings and in the tender document.
Flanges
Flanges shall be drilled off-center to suit mating flanges drilled to SABS 1123
Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Gaskets

PB 2.3.1 If specified, flanged valves or any other item shall be supplied complete with
bolts, nuts, washers and rubber insertion gaskets for jointing up to adjacent
fittings
PB 2.3.2 All bolts, nuts and washers to be hot dip galvanized to SABS 763
PB 2.3.3 All bolts and nuts shall be ISO metric with hexagon heads to SABS 135
PB 2.3.4 Bolts shall be of sufficient length for at least two screw threads to protrude
outside nuts when assemblies are fully tightened.
PB 2.3.5 One washer will be supplied per stud/nut or bolt/nut combination
Painting of Valves and other Accessories

Valve bodies from ferrous metals and the jointing faces thereof shall be given a
protective coating of suitable paint as specified in Sections 8.3 and 8.4 of
Particular Specification PA: STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY
OF PIPES, SPECIALS AND FITTINGS FOR CIVIL WORKS.
Spares
Spares shall be easily procurable
RESILIENT SEAL VALVES
General

Valves shall conform to SABS 664 (VOSA, AINSWORTH or equivalent)

Closure of valves shall be by clockwise rotation of handwheels.
Valves shall be of the non-rising spindle type.
All gears with a ratio of 1:3 and lower, shall be provided with easily replaceable
shear pins to prevent damage to the valve if excessive force is applied.
BALL VALVES
Medium duty
PB 4.1.1 Valves shall be of the full flow in-line ball valve type, ITAP or equivalent
PB 4.1.2 The valve bed shall be nylon-lined
Heavy duty
PB 4.2.1 Valves shall be of the full flow in-line ball valve type, Glen or equivalent
PB 4.2.2 360 ° rotation of the handles shall be possible
PB 4.2.3 The valve bed shall be rubber-lined
PB 4.2.4 The handle shall be manufactured from mild steel
FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
General
PB 5.1.1 Flexible couplings and flange adaptors shall be KLAMFLEX, VIKING
JOHNSON, or equivalent
PB 5.1.2 Couplings and flange adaptors shall be hot-dip galvanized or epoxy painted
as specified
PB 5.1.3 Couplings shall be supplied without centre register unless otherwise
specified
PB 5.1.4 Bolts, nuts, washers to be hot-dip galvanized
MALLEABLE CAST IRON FITTINGS
Malleable cast iron fittings shall conform to SABS 1190
REQUIREMENTS TO BE SPECIFIED
In addition to the nominal bore, working pressure and flange table, the following
requirements are to be specified on the drawings or in the tender document:
General Requirements
Whether nuts, bolts, washers and gaskets, etc. are to be supplied (applicable to
supply-and-delivery tenders only)
Valves
a) Flanged, spigotted, socketted or wafter type

b) With or without gearbox and with or without handwheel or cap

top
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
General
PB 8.1.1 All items shall be measured as set out in clause 8 of SANS 1200l.
PB 8.1.2 The unit of measurement shall be as specified in the schedule of quantities
and shall be the number of items supplied and installed, inclusive all nuts,
bolts, washers, rubbers and gaskets needed. In manufacture, supply and
deliver contracts it will be measured by the number items supplied at point
of delivery.
PB 8.1.3 Distinction shall be made between different types of items as well as
diameter and pressure ratings and shall be scheduled as separated items.
PB 8.1.4 The rate tendered shall included for the fabrication, testing, lining and
coating, protection, transport to site, off-loading storing and installation,
where applicable, all in accordance with the relevant clauses of the
specifications.
PB 8.1.5 All items manufactured, tested, lined and coated, in accordance with the
specifications and transported and delivered to site, stored and accepted
and installed where applicable on site, will be measured for payment
purposes under this section and shall included for supplementary protection
material required.
PB 8.1.6 Payment will be made in accordance with the tender price per unit of the
particular item.

PD “DENSO" WRAPPING
SCOPE
This specification covers the protection of buried steel pipes, specials and
couplings by means of petrolatum impregnated tape, “Denso”, “Petro Tape”, or
equivalent.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The corrosion protection system shall be based on a specially formulated cold-
applied high temperature petrolatum tape for corrosion protection of steelwork
and pipelines.
PROTECTION OF STEEL PIPES AND SPECIALS
Wire brush all pipes surfaces to remove loosely adhering corrosion product and
other dirt. Prime bare metal surfaces with Denso Primer, leaving a thin film.
Window Denso Tape circumferentially around the pipe, taking care to exclude
air pockets. For pipes in excess of 80 NB, maintain 25 mm overlaps. Wind PVC
outer wrap circumferential over the Denso Tape, staggered with the overlaps of
the Denso Tape, Secure the PVC outer wrap at the ends of the rolls by one
complete turn of self-adhesive tape.
PROTECTION OF COUPLINGS
Remove all sand and dirt from the pipe barrel and coupling. Apply “Denso”
Priming Solution liberally to bolt heads and nuts and a thin film on all other bare
metal surfaces. Apply “Denso” Mastic to cover bolt heads and nuts on outside
of flanges, and between flanges, to give 13 mm over on sleeve. Mould up to but
not over bolts. Apply “Denso” Tape circumferentially over the mastic, taking
care to exclude air pockets. Do not stretch the tape. One complete turn of tape
is required, making an 80 mm overlap at the ends. Smooth the “Denso” tape
over the mastic, pressing out any air pockets. Apply “Layflat” sheeting
circumferentially over the whole joint. Use two complete turns of sheeting and
secure the ends onto the pipe barrel by means of self-adhesive PVC tape.

VOLUME 2: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS
ES 1 LAWS, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS ...............................................111
ES 2 LOCAL SYSTEM AND OPERATING CONDITIONS .................................113
ES 3 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED .........................113
ES 4 TEST CERTIFICATES AND TESTS .............................................................114
ES 5 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE ...............................................................................114
ES 6 AREA LIGHTS ................................................................................................115
ES 7 BUILDING ELECTRICS ................................................................................117

ES 1 LAWS, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
ES 1.1 All material and equipment supplied and/or installed under this contract shall
be new and the best of their respective kinds and shall comply with the
requirements laid down in the latest editions of the relevant SANS, IEC and
NRS Standards and their amendments (if any) and the requirements of this
Specification
ES 1.2 In the event of items bearing the SABS mark being available in respect of the
materials and equipment required, only items bearing this mark will be
acceptable.
ES 1.3 The workmanship under this contract shall be of a high standard and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
ES 1.4 The work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the following laws:
ES 1.4.1 Labour Act of Namibia (Act 11 of 2007)
ES 1.5 The work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with and all material and
equipment supplied shall comply with the following regulations where
applicable:
ES 1.5.1 The latest edition of the "Code of Practice for the Wiring of
Premises", SANS 10142-1, as amended
ES 1.5.2 The "Electricity Supply By-Laws and Regulations" of the Supply
Authority
ES 1.5.3 The Post Office Regulations

ES 1.6 The work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with and all material and
equipment supplied shall comply with the latest editions of the following
standards:
ES 1.6.1 SANS 10199:2010 Designs and Installation of Earth Electrodes

ES 1.6.2 SANS 10292:2013 Earthing of Low Voltage (LV) Distribution
Systems
ES 1.6.3 SANS 60439:2007 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear
Assemblies
ES 1.6.4 SANS 1507:2007 Electric Cables with Extruded Solid Dielectric
Insulation for Fixed Installations (300/500V to 1900/3300V)
ES 1.6.5 SANS 10225:2012 The Design and Construction of Lighting Masts
ES 1.6.6 SANS 14713-2:2011 / ISO 14713-2:2009 Zinc Coatings –
Guidelines and Recommendations for the Protection against
Corrosion of Iron and Steel Structures Part 2: Hot Dip Galvanizing
ES 1.6.7 SANS1200 A:1986 Standardized Specification for Civil
Engineering Construction Section A: General
ES 1.6.8 SANS1200 LC:1981 Standardized Specification for Civil
Engineering Construction Section LC: Cable Ducts
ES 1.6.9 SANS1200 DB:1999 Standardized Specification for Civil
Engineering Construction Section DB: Pipe Trenches
ES 1.6.10 SANS 556-1:2004 Low Voltage Switchgear: Circuit Breakers
ES 1.7 All equipment installed under this contract shall comply with the Government
Notice No R.2246 and any other applicable rules and regulations in respect
of radio and TV interferences.
ES 1.8 Any equipment found producing interference subsequent to commissioning,

shall be suppressed or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer without
any additional cost.
ES 1.9 The contractor will be responsible for serving all notices and paying all fees
due in terms of the above laws, regulations and standards.

ES 2 LOCAL SYSTEM AND OPERATING CONDITIONS
ES 2.1 All materials and equipment supplied and/or installed under this Contract
shall be suitable for satisfactory operation and shall have prescribed
characteristics under the following ambient operating conditions:
ES 2.1.1 Altitude: Sea Level

ES 2.1.2 Minimum Ambient Temperature: 0 Degrees Celsius
ES 2.1.3 Maximum Ambient Temperature: +30 Degrees Celsius
ES 2.1.4 Humidity: Up to Saturation Point
ES 2.1.5 Dusty with Sand Storms
ES 2.2 All materials and equipment supplied and/or installed under this Contract
shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following low voltage
electrical system conditions unless otherwise indicated:
ES 2.2.1 Low Voltage System: 420V/240V

ES 2.2.2 Frequency: 50 Hz
ES 2.2.3 Number of Phases 3
ES 2.2.4 Neutral Earthing: Effective
ES 2.2.5 Type of System: Underground Cable
ES 2.2.6 Minimum Fault Current: 15 kA
ES 3 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED
ES 3.1 The following drawings and information shall be submitted on completion of

the Works:
ES 3.1.1 Two sets of paper prints of all the drawings showing all "as built"
features of the installation.
ES 3.1.2 Three complete sets of operating and maintenance manuals
containing all drawings, test certificates, settings of equipment as
commissioned, installation, commissioning and maintenance
details, operating instructions, as well as a complete list of spare
parts with reference numbers and technical descriptions to enable
the client's technical personnel to maintain service and repair the
installation.

ES 4 TEST CERTIFICATES AND TESTS
ES 4.1 Where test certificates are required for individual pieces of equipment, these
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before commissioning.
ES 4.2 Where witnessing of tests is required by the Engineer, arrangements shall be

made by the Contractor for the Engineer to witness such tests.
ES 5 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE
ES 5.1 Low voltage cable installation and testing shall be carried out in accordance
with SANS 1507:2007 Part 3.
ES 5.2 The cable shall be installed in a trench of 600 millimetre depth.
ES 5.3 Cable lengths are given for tendering purposes only and correct lengths of
cable shall be measured and installed. Payment shall be for lengths
installed, termination to termination.
ES 5.4 The cable route shall be marked out and confirmed with the Engineer and
Principal Contractor before any excavation may commence.
ES 5.5 All measures shall be taken to prevent damage to other services.
ES 5.6 The trench shall be clear of stones and other obstructions and a cable
bedding of minimum 150mm of soft sand shall be prepared and properly
dispersed before cable laying.
ES 5.7 During cable laying, the cable shall be snaked so that any longitudinal
expansion or contraction can be accommodated.
ES 5.8 The trench shall be properly compacted to 93% of modified AASHTO density
in layers of 300mm and a warning tape shall be installed.
ES 5.9 Compaction tests shall be performed and the Contractor shall allow for such
testing in his tendered rates.
ES 5.10 After installation, each cable shall be tested by means of a suitable insulation
resistance tester and the phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral and phase-to-
earth resistance tabulated and certified.
ES 5.11 No cable joints shall be accepted.
ES 5.12 All cables shall be phased out to ensure correct phase connections.

ES 6 AREA LIGHTS
ES 6.1 Light fittings shall be supplied and installed complete with control
gear/drivers etc as applicable. Only drivers from Osram, Philips and Tridonic
shall be accepted.
ES 6.2 The luminaires colour shall be of the standard grey.
ES 6.3 An 5A fuse circuit breaker shall be installed in each area light pole.
ES 6.4 Backfill material shall be watered and properly compacted, using imported
gravel.
ES 6.5 Backfill material shall be imported where necessary.
ES 6.6 Pole strength shall be such to carry 3 x CCTV cameras (4,5Kg each)
mounted at ± 9m above natural ground level.
ES 6.7 Area lights shall be equal or similar approved to the Thorn LEDFIT 90W
9000 lumen asymmetrical beam.
ES 6.8 Pole Specification
The pole shall be constructed by the filament winding process to achieve optimum
results for strength and rigidity. The filament winding process shall be continuously
applied with uniform tension onto a rotating mandrel and shall result in a minimum mass
glass to resin ratio of 70:30. The surface shall be seamless, smooth and tapered.
The material of the finishing coat shall be a gel coat that shall comply with the
requirements of SANS 1749 and shall be applied to a uniform thickness of between 250
and 500 microns. It shall provide a weatherproof, UV resistant, flame resistant and
impact strong surface in the colour specified.
A standard pole supporting a luminaire with a wind surface of 0.20m² shall not have a
pole top deflection of more than 5% of its height above ground when subjected to a
basic wind pressure of 500 Pa. A safety factor of 2.5 times the total maximum windload
shall be applicable.
The pole shall be manufactured in accordance with SANS 1749 under the ISO 9002
quality system.
If an access opening is required, the cut-out shall be covered by an access door cover
manufactured from glass filled nylon impregnated in the same colour as that of the
surface coat. It shall be secured to the pole by two stainless steel Allen head captive
screws into M4 brass inserts embedded in the pole.
A cable entry with a minimum diameter of 34mm shall be provided at a minimum depth
of 400mm below the ground surface.
A hot dipped galvanised glandplate, suitable for gland no. 0 or 1, complete with terminal
block and DIN rail for a miniature circuitbreaker, shall be provided and shall be mounted
to a bolt provided in the access opening.

Poles for direct embedment in the ground shall be provided with a 300x300x1.6mm hot
dipped galvanised baseplate complete with 2 x hot dipped galvanised steel hookbolts
and nuts. Base mounted poles shall have a hot dipped galvanised flange plate that can
be bolted to a foundation which shall be designed to withstand the forces the pole will
experience in service.
RELEVANT POLE DATA AND OTHER FACTORS CORRESPONDING CALCULATED KEY VALUES
Load to be Maximum
Diameter of
Total length Height of pole applied in permitted
pole at ground
of pole above ground pole-top deflection in
level
m m deflection test pole-top
mm
N deflection test
2.6 2.0 110 135.4 100
3.1 2.5 120 143.4 125
3.6 3.0 128 152.0 150
4.1 3.5 135 161.0 175
4.6 4.0 146 171.6 200
5.2 4.5 155 182.3 225
5.7 5.0 164 193.6 250
6.3 5.5 173 205.4 275
6.9 6.0 170 213.7 300
7.4 6.5 178 225.9 325
8.0 7.0 186 238.6 350
8.6 7.5 194 251.8 375
9.2 8.0 202 265.5 400
9.8 8.5 210 279.7 425
10.4 9.0 218 294.3 450
11.0 9.5 226 309.4 475
11.6 10.0 237 326.8 500
13.4 11.5 290 463.4 575
14.0 12.0 300 504.0 600
NOTES:
(1) Relevant pole data is based on a shape factor of 0.7 and a calculated wind
pressure of 500.14 Pa.
(2) Corresponding calculated key values are based on a luminaire surface area of 0.2
m2 with a shape factor of 1.

ES 7 BUILDING ELECTRICS
ES 7.1 General
Outlets for power, data or telephones shall be as per the schedule below:
Schedule of Outlets
ITEM DESCRIPTION (OR EQUAL

APPROVED)
Light switches - 16A - 1 lever 1 way Clipsal - S-2031/1/2 AWE

At 1200mm above 2 lever 2 x 1 way Clipsal - S-2032/1/2 AWE
final floor 2 lever 2 x 2 way Clipsal - S-2032/2/3 AWE
1 lever 2 way Clipsal - S-2031/2/3 AWE
Telephone Point - flush Clipsal - S-2031 RJ11
16A single switched socket flush Clipsal - ST-2015 WE

outlet (100 x 100)
16A double switched socket Clipsal - ST-2025 WE

outlet (100 x 100)
16A single dedicated socket Clipsal - S-2015 RD

outlet (100 x 100)
60A double pole flush isolators Clipsal - ST-2031 T 60 WE
35A DP weatherproof isolator - surface Clipsal - WHD 35 GY
20A TP weatherproof isolator - surface Clipsal WHT 20 GY
Trunking telephone and data outlet Clipsal LS-1005 with RJ11 and RJ45
sockets
Trunking 16A Socket outlet Clipsal LS-2002 with cover
Trunking 16A dedicated red socket outlet Clipsal LS-2003 with cover
Trunking 20A AC Isolator Clipsal LS-1005 twin cradle with isolator

ITEM DESCRIPTION (OR EQUAL

APPROVED)
and cord grip with clamp.
ES 7.2 Lighting
· General
Ø All light fittings are to be supplied and installed complete with lamps,
ballasts, electronic control gear, diffusers, mounting rings, etc. as
applicable.
Ø All light fittings shall be supplied with electronic control gear for energy
efficiency. All ballasts shall be marked with the CELMA EEI classification.
Only class A1, A2, A3 electronic ballasts will be acceptable.
Ø All LED Drivers shall be OSRAM or TRIDONIC.
Ø All recessed lights shall be fitted with 3m lead and 5A socket.
Ø All fittings shall be labelled using engraved labels indicating circuit
numbers.
· Light Circuits
All light circuits shall be wired using 2,5mm² conductors and earth conductor
shall be green PVC insulated. Conduits are to be flush installed where ever
possible except in roof spaces where they shall be hidden on top of trusses
and purlins.
· Photo switches
All photo switches shall be fitted in a bulkhead fitting for protection.
ES 7.3 Geyser Points
Ø The geyser points are to be standard flush 20A DP isolators with white
grip cord (under counter) cover plates. Surface industrial isolator for all
other geysers. The electrical contractor is to ascertain the exact
installation positions of geysers to allow the installation of the isolators in
close proximity. All wiring shall be 4mm².
Ø The rates shall include for the connection of equipment.
ES 7.4 Telephone Points
Ø The telephone installation shall be in accordance with the requirements

of the specification for “Facilities for telecommunication services in
Buildings 1988" issued by the Namibian Post Office Telecommunication
Services.

Ø All cable sleeves and conduits are to be installed together with 1,2mm
diameter galvanised steel draw wires. The telephone points shall
individually be linked back to the respective telephone DB using 25mm
conduit per point. No daisy chain allowed.
ES 7.5 Socket Outlets
Ø All socket outlets shall be Clipsal16A switched socket outlets and of one
make. Wall socket outlets are to be installed flush at 300mm a.f.f.l. unless
indicated otherwise on drawings. Socket outlets in trunking are to be
purpose made 16Amp Clipsal type complete with cover plates.
Conductors to be 4mm² with 2,5mm² earthwires.
Ø Single phase industrial switched sockets shall be of the GEWISS type
complete with male and female.
Ø All power outlets inside the factory shall be surface mounted using PVC
conduit and only spacer bar saddles shall be used.
Ø All outlets shall be labelled using Trefolite engraved labels.
ES 7.6 Three Phase/Single Phase Isolator Points
Ø These are to be mounted at ± 1400mm above finished floor level unless

indicated otherwise on drawings.
Ø Isolators shall be Clipsal 35A triple + N + E or double pole weather proof
type (WHT-35GY) and conductors shall be minimum 6mm². Rate shall
include the final connection to equipment.
Ø All power outlets inside the factory shall be surface mounted using PVC
conduit and only spacer bar saddles shall be used.
ES 7.7 Air Conditioner Outlets
Ø All air conditioners are to be wired using 4mm² phase and neutral
conductors with 2,5mm² bare earthwires.
Ø Outlets shall be as specified below:
a) single phase internal: flush 30A DP
b) single phase external: weatherproof - WHD 35-GY, Clipsal
c) three phase external: weatherproof - WHT-35-GY, Clipsal
d) single phase - trunking: Clipsal LS-1005 with 30A DP isolator and cord
grip
ES 7.8 Distribution Boards
(i) General
All distribution boards are to be surface or flush mounted as per drawing
details. The size of the DB’s must be such that 30% spare space for further

circuits must be allowed for. All DB’s shall have doors with square keys or
ring type locking facilities. No plastic locks shall be allowed. Distribution
boards shall be of the Prisma Modular type: Mild steel powder coated.
(ii) Surge Protection Devises

Surge protection devices shall be to IEC 61643-1 (SPD Class II) and IEC
61643-11 Type 2) for use in distribution boards.
(iii) Switchgear
Switchgear shall be of ABB or equal approved. All miniature circuit breakers
shall be Schneider to match existing. The fault rating of all DB’s shall be as
indicated on the drawings. All contractors to be rating AC-3.

VOLUME 3: ELECTRONIC SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS
PART I GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..............................................123
GTS 1 STANDARDS ...................................................................................................123

GTS 2 RADIO AND TV INTERFERENCE..................................................................123
GTS 3 REGULATIONS................................................................................................123
GTS 4 SYSTEM AND SITE CONDITIONS.................................................................124
GTS 5 CODES OF PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES ...........................124
PART II DETAIL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – STRUCTURED CABLING ..124
SCS 1 SCOPE OF WORKS ..........................................................................................124

SCS 2 DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................125
SCS 3 STANDARDS ...................................................................................................125
SCS 4 GENERAL TAXES AND DUTIES ...................................................................125
SCS 5 LOCAL SYSTEM AND OPERATING CONDITIONS ........................................126
SCS 6 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED..............................126
SCS 7 SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................126
SCS 8 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................126
SCS 9 100 OHM UTP STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS (SCS)..........................127
SCS 10 HIGH CAPACITY OPTICAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR VOICE, VIDEO
AND DATA.......................................................................................................131
SCS 11 QUALITY CONTROL ......................................................................................148
SCS 12 NAMIBIA COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (NCC) APPROVAL ...........148
SCS 13 DATA AND NETWORKING EQUIPMENT ....................................................148
SCS 14 MANUALS AND SAMPLES FOR APPROVAL ..............................................151
SCS 15 CONDUITS AND WIRE WAYS .......................................................................151
SCS 16 EARTHING & BONDING ................................................................................151
SCS 17 HANDING OVER OF INSTALLATION ..........................................................151
SCS 18 FOREMAN ON SITE ........................................................................................152
PART III DETAIL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - CCTV .................................152
TVS 1 SCOPE OF WORKS ..........................................................................................152

TVS 2 DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................152
TVS 3 STANDARDS ...................................................................................................153
TVS 4 RADIO AND TV INTERFERENCE..................................................................153
TVS 5 REGULATIONS................................................................................................153
TVS 6 LOCAL SYSTEM AND OPERATING CONDITIONS .....................................154
TVS 7 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED..............................154
TVS 8 TEST CERTIFICATES AND TESTS ................................................................154
TVS 9 BUILDER'S WORK ..........................................................................................154
TVS 10 LABELLING .....................................................................................................155
TVS 11 CONDUITS, TRUNKING AND TRAYS ..........................................................155
TVS 12 IP CCTV SYSTEM INSTALLATION ...............................................................155
PART IV PERIMETER FENCE MONITORING SYSTEM ....................................164

SCOPE OF CONTRACT ...................................................................................164

DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................164
GENERAL.........................................................................................................165
PRODUCT.........................................................................................................171
EXECUTION.....................................................................................................176
PART V SCHEDULE OF INFORMATION ................................................................179
1. NETWORK CABINET ......................................................................................179

2. ETHERNET SWITCH .......................................................................................180
3. CABLING .........................................................................................................180
4. COPPER PATCH PANEL .................................................................................181
5. fibre optic patch panel ........................................................................................181
6. CCTV SYSTEM ................................................................................................182
7. MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE .........................................................................182
8. fixed dome camera .............................................................................................183
9. fixed bullEt camera ............................................................................................183
10. fixed fisheye camera...........................................................................................184
11. Network video recorder ......................................................................................184
12. CCTV WORKSTATION ...................................................................................185
13. VIDEO WALL...................................................................................................185
14. CCTV STORAGE..............................................................................................186
15. PERMIETER FENCE MONITORING SENSOR CABLE .................................186
16. PERIMETER FENCE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROLLER ....................187

PART I GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
GTS 1 STANDARDS
All material and equipment supplied and/or installed under this Contract shall be
new and as per the product specification in Part IV and shall comply with the
requirements laid down in the latest editions of the relevant SABS or BS and
their amendments (if any) and the requirements of this Specification.
The material specified is the preferred material. If alternative materials are
offered, they shall be specified for approval of the Engineer. Rates entered in
the schedule of quantities shall be for the specified materials. A Schedule shall
be included in the Tender to reflect the saving.
In event of items bearing the SABS mark being available in respect of the
materials and equipment required, only items bearing this mark will be
acceptable.
The workmanship under this contract shall be of a high standard and to the
GTS 2 RADIO AND TV INTERFERENCE
All equipment installed under this contract shall comply with the Government
Notice No. R.2246 and any other applicable rules and regulations in respect of
radio and TV interferences. Any equipment found producing interference
subsequent to commissioning, shall be suppressed or replaced to the
satisfaction of the Engineer without any additional cost.
GTS 3 REGULATIONS
The work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with and all material and
equipment supplied shall comply with the following laws and regulations where
applicable.
The Machinery, Building, Demolition and Excavation Work Regulations, framed
under the Factories, Machinery and Building Work Ordinance 1952;
The latest edition of the “Code of Practice for the Wiring of Premises” SANS
10142 (as amended);
The Regulations and By-Laws of the Supply Authority.
The applicable regulations of Telecom Namibia.
The relevant SABS, NRS, BS, IEC and ISO supporting specifications referred
to in the standard specifications.
The manufacturer of each respective system must pursue ISO 9001 quality
assurance system which must be in place for at least 5 years and must be
demonstrated with relevant Certificate.
The manufacturer of each respective system must feature a valid ISO 14001
certificate regarding: Design, development, production and supply of information
and data management solutions that enable infrastructure owners to effectively
plan, purchase, implement, secure and manage their own physical layer
infrastructure throughout its lifetime.

GTS 4 SYSTEM AND SITE CONDITIONS
All materials and equipment supplied under this Contract shall be suitable for
operation under the conditions as specified in the Detailed Technical
Requirements.
GTS 5 CODES OF PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES
Apart from the codes named under general, the following Codes of Practice are
of particular importance:
SABS 0198 – Code of Practice for the selection, handling and installation of
electric power cables of rating not exceeding 33 kV.
Part I - Definitions and statutory requirements
Part III - Earthing systems – general provisions
Part VI - Transportation and storage
Part VII - Safety precautions
Part VIII - Cable laying and installation
Part XIII - Testing commissioning and fault location
Part XIV - Installation of aerial bundled conductor (ABC) cable.
PART II DETAIL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – STRUCTURED CABLING
SCS 1 SCOPE OF WORKS
The Structured Cabling Contractor here before and after called the Contractor,
will be responsible for the complete structured cabling installation and the proper
functioning of all equipment called for in this specification.
This Contract covers in broad terms the supply, delivery, installation, and
commissioning for 3 months and the maintenance and guarantee for 12 months
of the structured cabling installation as specified in this document.
The tenderer shall allow in his tender price for all material, labour, supervision,
transport, tests and all other items necessary to complete the Contract in its
entirety.
In the event where the supply and/or installation of any item, material or
equipment does not form part of this Contract, it will be specifically indicated as
such in his specification and/or the accompanying drawings.
The structural cabling work shall comprise of new structural cabling installation
services in the new buildings. It will include copper and fibre installation,
cabinets, brush panels, switches, fibre to copper and copper to fibre converters
and patch panels, etc.
The completion period of the contract shall be as per Main Contract.

SCS 2 DRAWINGS
One set Architects Drawings – available from WCE Offices if required.

The Contractor shall, on receipt of the Architect’s and Engineer’s drawings,
minutely compare the corresponding drawings and should any discrepancy,
ambiguity or conflicting information be found thereon, the Contractor shall
correlate any such discrepancy, ambiguity or conflicting information with the
Engineer before proceeding with any of the relevant works as no claim for any
extras due to the Contractor having failed to comply with this instruction will be
entertained.
Drawing No Drawing Name
824505-ELSP-01 Electronic Site Layout
SCS 3 STANDARDS
new and the best of their respective kinds and shall comply with the
requirements laid down in the latest editions of the relevant SANS (SABS) or BS
and their amendments (if any) and the requirements of this Specification.
In event of items bearing the SANS (SABS) mark being available in respect of
the materials and equipment required, only items bearing this mark will be
acceptable.
The workmanship under this Contract shall be of a high standard and to the
The work shall be carried out in accordance with the General Technical
Specification laid down in Part IV of this Specification.
SCS 4 GENERAL TAXES AND DUTIES
Tenderers shall allow in their tender for all VAT, taxes and duties, to be paid in
respect of all items of material, labour and equipment to be supplied in terms of
this Contract where relevant. VAT is to be added in the Final Summary as a
separate item.

SCS 5 LOCAL SYSTEM AND OPERATING CONDITIONS
The main power supply will be 230 V, 50Hz single phase and 400 V three phase
plus neutral, 50 Hz respectively.
All materials and equipment supplied and/or installed under this Contract shall
be suitable for satisfactory operation and shall have prescribed characteristics
under the following conditions:
a) Ambient Operating Conditions
i) Altitude : ± 1200 above sea level
ii) Minimum ambient temperature : -5 Degrees Celsius
iii) Maximum ambient temperature : +40 Degrees Celsius
iv) Humidity : Up to saturation point
SCS 6 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED
Drawings and information to be submitted on completion of the Works:

i) One sets of paper prints of all the drawings showing all "as built" features of
the installation to be submitted with the final claim.
ii) Three complete sets of operating and maintenance manuals containing all
drawings, test certificates, settings of equipment as commissioned,
installation, commissioning and maintenance details, operating instructions,
as well as a complete list of spare parts with reference numbers and technical
description to enable the client's technical personnel to maintain service and
repair the installation.
SCS 7 SCOPE OF WORK
This Contract covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning

and guarantee for the following:
(i) Structured Cabling Installation of the -
Visitors Area of the Evaristus Shikongo Correctional Facility.
SCS 8 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall be certified by the Structured Cabling Vendor in order that
the final installation be certified in accordance with the Vendors warranty
requirements.
The Contractor shall provide only skilled labour to complete work within the
agreed upon time frame.
The Contractor is responsible for the provision of all tools required to fulfil his
installation obligations in accordance with task at hand at his cost. This includes
specialist tools such as core drills etc.
The Contractor is solely responsible for the successful delivery of all
documentation pertaining to installed components e.g. Floor plans, excel sheets
and test results to the Engineer responsible for the project and NO OTHER

person, unless such an agreement has been made with the aforementioned
responsible person.
In the event that work has been commissioned by Engineer other than ICTS
Networks, contractors are reminded that the technical requirements of ICTS
Networks still apply.
The Contractor is solely responsible for the thorough pre-tender inspection and
installation evaluation of the contract Any oversight on the part of the Contractor
are for his account.
SCS 9 100 OHM UTP STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS (SCS)
SCS 9.1 General Product Conformance Requirements
· The minimum acceptable cable performance category to be installed

shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B Category 6 / ISO 11801 Class E (2002)
compliant.
· Only cable and connecting hardware specified for a given Vendor
Structured Cabling Solution shall be used.
· All installed components shall be new, complete, in good condition and
unused albeit for demonstration purposes.
· All cable reels are to be visually inspected for damage incurred during
shipping and transit prior to installation.
· Cable and connecting components found to be damaged or defective
prior and during the installation process are to be removed immediately
and returned to the supplier at no additional cost to client.
SCS 9.2 General Product Performance Requirements
· The supplied product shall, once installed, conform to ISO 11801 Class
E – 2002 electrical characteristics for the purposes of Vendor warranty.
· It is expected that installed products be capable of supporting voice and
data communications applications and protocols from baseline 56Kbps
to ISDN PRI for Analog and Digital Voice and 10Base T to 1000 Base T
for data as per the supported applications of ISO 11801 Class E (2002).
SCS 9.3 General Installation Practice Requirements
· Cable is not to be pulled in under excessive load. At all times during any
given “pull”, the cable under load should easily react and feed to pulling
tension.
· Cable being pulled in should be handled by no less than 2 individuals at
all times in order to avoid damage to the cable by means of kinks, twisting
along its own axis, getting snagged etc. It is recommended that 3
installers co-operate in the pulling in of any given cable run, 1 on each
end and another in the middle or positioned near any obstructions to feed
slack and thus avoid undue stress on the cable.

· Whenever possible cable should be placed into pathways as opposed to

pulled in under tension.
· Care should be taken not to score conductors during the removal of the
outer insulating sleeve of the cable when preparing to terminate pairs.
· Cable bends are to be kept to 25mm at minimum at all times (installed).
· Where purpose-installed conduits are to be used for structured cabling,
such conduits may never be filled beyond 40% of capacity and should
bend at a radius of no less than 6 times the outside diameter of such
conduit, nor shall more than two 90 degree bends along the total span of
such a conduit.
· During the installation process, installers are required to visually inspect
cable and connecting hardware components for damage. If such damage
is found, e.g. tears in the outer jacket of the cable, severe kinks as
identified by white/grey bands of discoloration on cable jacket, these
components are to be replaced immediately.
· Velcro Industrial ONE-WRAP Strap 20X330mm black to be used for
strapping. Cable ties are NOT acceptable.
· The installer is to make use of best practices when handling unjacketed
conductors. Care is to be taken as not to create pair spread, pair
wrapping, pair separation and the re-twisting of pairs.
· No more than 13mm of wire may be exposed for the purposes of
termination, the only acceptable exception being High band modules
where such practices are dictated by the design of the module.
· All cabling shall be permanently labelled at both ends to the rear of the
point of termination no more than 100mm from such a termination point
with a printed label(handwritten labels are not acceptable).
· All patch panel ports and workstation outlets shall be clearly labelled by
means of appropriately secured printed labels (handwritten labels are not
acceptable).
· All patch and workstation outlet cables shall be clearly labelled by means
of an appropriately secured printed label (handwritten labels are not
acceptable).
· All labelling schemes shall be confirmed with the Engineer before being
applied. This shall remain the responsibility of the contractor.
· The maximum number of screws or bolts as provided for by the design of
connecting hardware or SCS components and accessories are to be
used without exception.
SCS 9.4 Ducting and Supporting Structures
· Where support structures are used, such structures are to provide

support at a maximum of 1.5 meters along the length of the run as to
avoid cable tension as a result of the cumulative weight of such cable
acting upon itself at the next point of support.

· The surface of such support structures e.g. Cable hangers will not pose
a risk of damaging cable due to sharp edges or angular surfaces which
would act against the symmetry of wire pairs within the cable or a risk to
installers e.g. Cuts.
· Where Velcro strapping are used, they are to be securely fastened but
still permit for cable movement if tugged upon making use of reasonable
force.
· Velcro strapping are to be used at set intervals of 300mm for all cable
bundles thus presenting a uniform appearance.
· Under no circumstances shall any cable/s hang unsupported, vertical
runs are to be supported are no greater than 300mm intervals.
· When cable ties are cut; once appropriately fastened around cable
bundles, in order to remove protrusions beyond the buckle, the installer
will ensure that such a cut is clean and that no sharp edges are created
which would damage other cable being pulled past it or injure installers
and support staff.
· Cable shall under no circumstances be strapped to PVC electrical conduit
or any structures belonging to an unrelated functional unit such as an air
conditioning drainpipe as future maintenance by associated maintenance
staff may result in damage or removal in order to facilitate work
· Cable is at no point to be placed directly on top of suspended ceiling tiles.
· Contractors are to ensure that cable is not installed in areas such as roof
spaces or in direct sunlight where temperature ranges might exceed the
manufactures operating temperate specifications (typically not in spaces
where temperatures exceed 60 degrees Celsius.)
· All metallic support structures, be it conduit, ducting or trays, shall be
grounded in accordance with national electric regulations.
· Ducting systems shall be securely fastened to walls by means of the
appropriate fixing hardware so as to ensure a sound and durable
installation.
· Ducting system covers are to be fitted securely and any portion of the
ducting system found to be cracked or damaged is to be immediately
replaced.
SCS 9.5 Power and EMI Source Separation
· Cable may be laid adjacent to sources of interference such as 240V

electrical branch circuits with a minimum separation of 50.8mm where:
a) A continuous grounded metallic barrier exists between electric cable
and structured cabling.
b) A durable non-metallic insulation exists, other than the insulation
material of the cable.

· At no point may data cabling cross the path of any power or broadband
cable, fluorescent lighting unit (where suspension is used as a means of
separation) at an angle less or greater than 90 degrees.
· The installer is to ensure that electrostatic devices such as photocopiers
and sources of radiation such as x-ray devices, radio transmitters, their
antennae and associated broadband cables are to be avoided when
routing cable.
SCS 9.6 Post-installation Test and Certification
General Requirements
· Every cabling link is to be tested and must meet with the requirements of
ISO 11801 Class E (2002) across the full length of the link.
· Test requirements as per Permanent Link certification requirement for
which the appropriate test adapters are to be used.
· The contractor will ensure that the full plot data is stored for each and
every test.
· The test results shall also be in Fluke Networks Linkware format (.flw).
· Test results are to be stored and provided to the Engineer in electronic
format in .csv and .flw file formats
· Only Fluke DSP 4000 series testers will be used to certify the Client’s
SCS’s or their subcomponents running the current firmware revision ver
5.12 or later.
· The test equipment is to be well maintained and in good working order.
The Engineer reserves the right to insist on an annual factory calibration
certificate for the instrument to be used for testing.
· The Engineer further reserve the right to insist on being present during
the self-calibration of the test unit and the instruments initial configuration
prior to test and during the test process itself.
· The contractor is to advise the Engineer staff within 3 working days of
intent to commence testing in order that such a staff member may make
himself available to attend testing procedures.
· The contractor is required to make available the test equipment and
necessary personnel at no extra cost should the Engineer wish to perform
random acceptance testing on the installed cabling infrastructure.
· The Engineer reserves the right to decline acceptance of marginal
performing cables irrespective of their having passed testing based on
risk of future degradation over the life span of the installed product.
· Where it is found that the random tests do not match those presented,
the Engineer reserves the right to insist on a supervised re-test of any or
all installed cables prior to acceptance.
· It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to ensure that the appropriate
Vendor test and documentation requirements are met in order that the

Engineer be provided with a warranty certificate issued by the SCS

Vendor.
· Any contention regarding Vendor warranty requirements is to be resolved
between the Vendor and the contractor and has thus no bearing on the
Client’s requirements as outlined here.
· Documentation is to be provided in 3 parts:
a) An excel sheet indicating cable label, location of work area and
Telecommunications closet termination points etc. in electronic
format.
b) Detailed test results in .flw (Fluke Networks Linkware) format inclusive
of all plot data.
c) A floor plan or site diagram reflecting the routes taken to and location
of all installed cables in electronic format.
SCS 10 HIGH CAPACITY OPTICAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR VOICE,

VIDEO AND DATA
SCS 10.1 Terminology
The following is a list of acronyms that will be used within this specification:
AC : Alternate current
ANSI : American National Standards Institute
B/W : Black/White
CCTV : Closed Circuit TV
CIF : Common Image Format
CTS : Clear to Send
CORBA : Common Object Request Broker Architecture
DC : Direct Current
DP : Dial Pulse
DTMF : Dual Tone Multiple Frequency
EIA : Engineering Institute of America
EMC : Electro Magnetic Compatibility
EN : European Norms
EOW : Engineering Order Wire
GUI : Graphical User Interface
IEEE : Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
ISDN : Integrated Services Digital Network
ITU-T : International Telecommunications Union – Telephony
LAN : Local Area Network
M-JPEG : Motion Joint Photographic Experts Group

MPEG : Moving Pictures Experts Group

MTBF : Mean Time between Failures
NTSC : National Television System Committee
NMS : Network Management System
OC : Optical Carrier
PAL : Phase Alternating Line
PC : Personal Computer
PBX : Private Branch Exchange
PDH : Pleisiochrone Digital Hierarchy
PTZ : Pan Tilt Zoom
RAM : Random Access Memory
RTS : Request to Send
SDH : Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SNMP : Simple Network Management Protocol
SONET : Synchronous Optical Network
STM : Synchronous Transport Module
STS-N : Synchronous Transport Signal-Level N
TDM : Time Division Multiplexing
VMS : Video Management System
SCS 10.2 General
The Contractor shall install a high capacity optical transmission system based
on active access nodes linked by optical fibres forming a reliable and redundant
high-speed medium for the transparent transport of voice, data, LAN and video
services. The active access node must have a high add-drop capability (1.5 to
2.3 Gbps) and the transmission system must be available with STM4c/OC12c
STM16c/OC48c backbone capacity.
As the transmission system will be used as a backbone network, the system
shall have following characteristics:
· High Availability
· High Reliability
· Dual ring configuration
· Easy to install and operate
· Scalable
· High degree of flexibility with respect to the type of interfaces
The digital transmission system, based on state-of-the-art fibre optic technology,
is required to carry all voice, data, LAN and video information. Usage of copper
cable for long-distance transmission purposes is not allowed due to the inherent

disadvantages of copper cable (attenuation of signals, susceptibility to

electromagnetic influences and high costs for cable sizes necessary to carry the
required number of signals).
The transmission system based on TDM (Time Division Multiplexing) shall carry
all channels for voice, data, LAN and video communications in order to
guarantee independent and consistent communication between all applications.
Each application will be allocated a dedicated virtual channel with a minimum of
overhead. The load on one channel shall not affect the load on another channel.
Packet or cell-based networks that cannot guarantee consistent communication
between the required applications are not allowed and will be rejected.
As virtually all information is transmitted via the TDM system, the system must
be implemented using two physically independent cable routes. In case of a
partial network failure, this will ensure that the remaining part is not affected.
The high capacity fibre optic transmission system shall be able to transport all
the high capacity applications that are important today and, in the future, in
particular the digital video applications (MPEG, M-JPEG) and the newest
Ethernet standards (Gigabit Ethernet technology family).
SCS 10.3 System requirements
SCS 10.3.1 Topology
The backbone shall consist of access nodes interconnected by a dual fibre optic
ring. The dual ring structure is required for redundancy purposes. In normal
operation, only one of the two rings will carry the user information, the other ring
shall be in hot standby. The two rings shall be counter rotating.
The standby ring shall take over automatically with minimum delay whenever a
problem occurs on the active ring. If a complete cable break occurs, which
means that both the active and standby rings are interrupted, the system shall
automatically perform a loop-back operation, isolating the fault, and maintaining
communications of all user equipment connected to the network.
After a power failure, a ring reconfiguration or when a new node is added to the
ring, the complete network shall start up automatically.
SCS 10.3.2 Principles of Operation
The operation of the system shall be based on Time Division Multiplexing (TDM),
allowing many different services (voice, data, LAN, video) to be transported
independently on the same medium, with fixed time delays. Each connection will
be allocated a dedicated, virtual channel with a minimum of overhead. The load
on one channel shall not be affected by the load on another channel.
Cell or packet-based systems that cannot guarantee consistent communication
between the applications is not allowed.
The network shall allow setting up point to point links between users but also
broadcast, multipoint and multi-drop connections must be possible. Multipoint
connections, or bus connections, allow any device to communicate with any

other device connected to a common bus. Multi-drop connections allow a

“master” device to send information to various “slave” devices. The slave
stations can send something back on request of the master
SCS 10.3.3 Availability and Reliability
To ensure maximum system availability and minimum downtimes, special

precautions must be taken on the system:
· Dual ring operation is compulsory. The standby ring shall automatically
take over whenever a fault occurs on the active ring. Moreover, the
system must be able to create a ring structure in case of a cable break or
a node failure (loop-back operation).
· The maximum reconfiguration time, in case of a node failure or cable
break, shall not exceed 150 msec.
· A dual hot swappable power supply with separate power cords is
recommended.
· Configuration data and specific software shall be stored locally in every
access node to ensure an automatic and quick restart after a power
outage.
· The database holding all relevant information on the system configuration
shall be backed up in the Network Management System. If configuration
data is lost in a particular node, the Network Management System must
be able to restore the data.
The high reliability shall be proven by submitting MTBF values of each individual
module of the system, and by overall MTBF calculations of the system.
SCS 10.3.4 Electromagnetic compatibility
All cards shall comply with the following EMC standards:

· Emission: EN55022 Class A
· Immunity: EN50082-1
SCS 10.3.5 NODE Interconnection
It must be possible to connect the nodes in the ring via an optical connection.
Different types of lasers (range 1300-1550 nm) and receivers shall be available
to cover different distance requirements. List all relevant optical specifications.
SCS 10.3.6 System bandwidth and bandwidth allocation
The backbone bandwidth shall be 600 Mbps or higher. The allocation of the
bandwidth to the virtual channels shall be flexible and easy to perform via the
Network Management System.
The bandwidth granularity shall be such that low speed signals do not consume
unnecessary bandwidth. The smallest amount of bandwidth that can be
allocated shall not exceed 50 Kbps.

The backbone shall support following ITU-T/ANSI standard interfaces: STM-

4c/OC12c, STM-16/OC-48.
SCS 10.3.7 Multiple rings
It must be possible to interconnect two or more high speed rings. In this way, it
shall be possible to create networks consisting of many nodes and to extend
them over long distances.
The configuration and management of the full duplex link between two rings
shall be supported by the network management system.
SCS 10.4 Hardware requirements
SCS 10.4.1 General
The high capacity optical transmission system shall be the combination of a

passive part, i.e. the optical fibres, and an active part, i.e. the access nodes.
Each node shall be equipped with circuitry regenerating the optical signal,
providing interfaces to the applications and monitoring and controlling the
access node.
The access node shall be of a modular design allowing the installation of
additional modules or the replacement of modules.
The access node shall consist of a chassis, one or two hot swappable,
redundant power supplies, slots for interface cards, and the system module and
optical transceivers for the optical links.
The slots shall allow a mix of interfaces to be installed and all cards shall be
front accessible.
SCS 10.4.2 NODE Chassis
The chassis shall be 19" mountable and distinguishes itself through an industrial
quality design.
The interface modules shall be easy to install. It must be possible to insert and
remove interface cards during system operation
SCS 10.4.3 System Module
Every chassis shall be equipped with a system card that is responsible for the
TDM (de)multiplexing.
The system card shall control, monitor and maintain the ring(s) and shall pass
and receive status information from the other nodes. The internal logic and
software will discover a fault in the ring(s) and will cause the ring to reconfigure
in the most optimal way.
The system card shall have a display on the card allowing quick diagnostics.
The system card must be available in redundant version and it shall be possible
to remove redundant system cards.

SCS 10.4.4 Optical Transceivers
The optical transceivers shall interconnect the nodes using the optical
infrastructure. The transceivers shall support single mode or multimode fibre
cables and operate at 1300 nm or 1550 nm. The optical modules shall be hot
swappable. The available optical budget at the STM-16 data rate should cover
at least a range from +5 to -23 db. The available optical budget at the STM-4
data rate should cover at least a range from +5 to -31 db. The system shall
support SFP based CWDM transceivers according to ITU G.694.2.
SCS 10.5 Power Supplies
The node chassis shall be equipped with one or two (redundant and load
balancing) power supplies out of the group of 24 VDC, -48 VDC, 115 VAC and
230 VAC, which, each by themselves, must be able to feed the node.
If one power supply in the redundant node chassis fails, the other power supply
shall automatically take over.
One of the Power Supplies (DC) can serve as a battery backup when connected
to an external battery.
SCS 10.6 Network Management
SCS 10.6.1 General
The Fibre Optic Transmission System shall be equipped with a, user friendly,
MicrosoftÒ Windows 7-based Network Management System (NMS). The NMS
shall allow the operator to manage and monitor multiple sub-networks in an
efficient way.
The NMS shall have the following functionality: network configuration,
configuration of services, monitoring, diagnostics, activation-deactivation of
interface modules, bandwidth allocation, alarms and event logging and graphical
network representation.
The network management hardware shall consist of a Personal Computer,
which at the time of installation is the current industry standard.
The NMS architecture shall be based on client-server technology. It must be
possible to connect multiple active clients to the NMS server allowing network
management from multiple and/or remote locations or by multiple users.
SCS 10.6.2 Configuration Management
It must be possible to connect the NMS system to the network at any node via
Ethernet.
Via the NMS, it shall be possible to configure the hardware modules that make
up the network: nodes, network cards, interface cards and optical transceivers.
The network management system shall allow the user to activate or deactivate
an interface module.

It shall be possible to create various services over the network. The NMS shall
allocate the transmission channels to virtual point-to-point or multi-point services
in order to achieve an optimal bandwidth allocation.
It must be possible to configure the network and the services without being
connected to the network, either via the Graphical User Interface (GUI) or via
scripting.
SCS 10.6.3 Automatic Reconfiguration
The management platform shall not be critical in the reconfiguration sequence

of the system. It will only report the event in detail to the network operator.
Relevant configuration details shall be stored in the Random-Access Memory
(RAM) module of each node. After configuration, the network shall continue to
work autonomously and shall reconfigure in error situations. It is therefore
necessary that the reconfiguration algorithm resides in the nodes themselves.
SCS 10.6.4 NMS Database
The NMS shall contain the network database containing all kinds of information:
sub-network names, node names, and node configurations including installed
network and interface cards.
It must be possible to make following on-line changes: activation or deactivation
of interface cards, add or remove interface cards, and add, change or remove
services. Each change shall automatically update the database on the hard disk
of the network management PC and the RAM memory of the relevant node(s).
It must be possible to use the database to restore the network configuration in
case settings in one or more nodes are lost due to a hardware defect.
SCS 10.6.5 Fault Management and Alarm Management
It shall be possible to easily monitor the operation of the different sub-networks

that make up the network.
During normal operation, the NMS shall continuously poll all network nodes. It
shall compare the status of the network with the information resident in its
network database. If a fault or change occurs, the GUI screen on the NMS PC
will display an alarm message indicating the nature and location of possible
errors or changes. The alarm messages shall include at least the date, time,
node, interface slot and/or interface port, alarm severity and description.
Via the GUI, it must be possible to register following events: synchronisation
losses, network reconfiguration, node failure, interface card errors and external
alarms. It must be possible to store the events in the NMS database.
Errors and unexpected conditions shall be reported by the network management
system in another colour than the one used upon correct operation.

SCS 10.6.6 Internal Alarm Forwarding
The NMS shall be capable, via a Programmable Logic Controller (or PLC), to
forward the status of internal alarms to other devices such as beepers or lamps.
It shall be possible to use this alarm relay card to convey network alarms to a
third-party umbrella alarm management system.
An SNMP agent on the management system shall offer basic alarm forwarding
and retrieval to an SNMP-based umbrella management system.
It shall be possible to forward internal alarms to third party equipment via
CORBA (Common Object Request Broker Architecture).
SCS 10.6.7 External Event Management
It must be possible to display the status of external events on the NMS system.
It must also be possible to forward this alarm information to Programmable Logic
Controller (or PLC) connected to the NMS PC.
SCS 10.7 Interfaces
SCS 10.7.1 General
The following interfaces shall be available:

a) Voice (see paragraph 5.11.7.2)
b) Data (see paragraph 5.11.7.3)
c) LAN (see paragraph 5.11.7.4)
d) Video (see paragraph 5.11.7.5)
Preferably, only native interfaces shall be used. Convertors, modems and
codecs should be avoided.
The interfaces shall be fully transparent to all higher layer protocols.
SCS 10.7.2 Voice Interfaces
a) Analogue Voice
· The access nodes shall provide native 2-wire analogue voice interfaces
compliant with ITU-T recommendations G.712.
· The interfaces shall be transparent to all in band PBX features.
· The ports shall support DP and DTMF signalling.
· The number of ports per cards shall be flexible: 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 ports per
interface card.
· It shall be possible to eliminate distance limitations of conventional
analogue telephone networks.
· It shall be possible to configure a party line whereby one operator is
logically connected to multiple analogue phones at different locations.
· The system shall support direct connections between telephones for
hotline applications without PBX.

· The ports shall support 12 or 16 kHz metering pulses.

· It shall be possible to connect the analogue phones as well as the PBX
to the access nodes.
· The system shall provide the following status information: card
active/inactive, card type, on/off hook, ringing voltage status.
b) 2/4-wire Voice
· The access nodes shall provide native 2/4-wire analogue voice

interfaces compliant with ITU-T recommendations G.712.
· The ports shall have E&M signalling functionality at –48V.
· The number of ports per cards shall be flexible: 2, 4, 6, or 8 per interface
card.
· The 2/4-wire analogue voice interface must be able to handle analogue
signals in the range of 300 to 3400 Hz.
· The ports shall support E&M multidrop connections
· The system shall provide the following status information: card
active/inactive, card type, E&M status, Carrier Alarm (E&M), ringing
voltage availability.
· The system shall comply with following specifications:
Ø Crosstalk:
o < -60 dB (paths on the same circuit)
o < -70 dB (paths on different circuits)
Ø Solid State Relays:
o Voltage : max 56 V
o Current : max 100 mA
o Closed resistance: max 16 W
o Open resistance : min 108 W
· Disruptive voltage between M leads and control logic : min 3750 V
· It shall be possible to have 2/4 wire analogue voice interfaces on the
same interface card.
c) Digital Voice
· The access nodes shall provide native ISDN S0 interfaces. S0 is a

standard 4-wire 2B+D interface specified at the S-reference point (ITU-
T). This terminal interface shall offer two 64 Kbps B-channels for voice
and data and a 16 Kbps D-channel for signalling or packet data. The
interface card connected to the PBX shall be equipped with at least 6
ports.
· The interface card connected to the terminals shall be equipped with at
least 3 ports. This interface shall allow to enable or disable the line
voltage per circuit.
· The access nodes shall provide native UP0/E and/or UP0 interfaces.
UP0/E and UP0 are SIEMENS standards for interconnecting a HICOM
PBX and its digital telephone sets. These terminal interfaces shall offer
two 64 Kbps B-channels for voice and data and a 16 Kbps D-channel for
signalling.

· It shall be possible to eliminate distance limitations of conventional ISDN

networks (ITU-T recommendation I.430)
· The system shall at least provide the following status information: card
active/inactive, card type, circuit active, ringing voltage status, circuit
reset, card reset.
d) E1/T1 interfaces
· The access nodes shall provide native E1 interfaces (2048 Mbps)

compliant with ANSI T1.102, OFTEL OTR001 and ITU-T
recommendations G.703 and G.823.
· The access nodes shall provide native T1 interfaces (1544 Mbps)
compliant with Bellcore 000499, ANSI T1.102, T1.403 and T1.408, and
ITU-T recommendations G.703, G.824 and I.431.
· Each E1/T1 interface card shall be at least equipped with 4 ports. An E1
interface card shall support up to 24 ports.
· The E1/T1 ports shall be fully transparent to all higher protocols
(standard and proprietary)
· The system shall provide at least the following status information: card
active/inactive, card type, input fail alarm, remote alarm, code violation
alarm, synchronization alarm.
e) E1/T1 Grooming at 64 Kbps
· The access nodes shall provide an E1 interface (2048 Mbps) compliant

with ANSI T1.102, OFTEL OTR001 and ITU-T recommendations G.703
and G.823.
· The access nodes shall provide a T1 interfaces (1544 Mbps) compliant
with Bellcore 000499, ANSI T1.102, T1.403 and T1.408, and ITU-T
recommendations G.703, G.824 and I.431.
· Each E1/T1 grooming interface card shall be at least equipped with 1
port.
· It shall be possible to multiplex RS232/RS422 data and analogue voice
signals onto an E1/T1 frame.
· The interface card shall at least support CAS signalling.
· Point to point as well as multidrop connections shall be possible
f) High Quality Audio
· The high-quality audio interface shall connect audio equipment without

compromising on the quality of the analogue audio signal. The high-
quality audio interface shall transport audio signals with link quality up to
15 kHz (e.g. for high quality speech and music transmission).
· The interface card shall be equipped with at least 2 mono audio channels
per card. The two simplex mono channels can be used to broadcast
stereo audio.
· The High-Quality audio interface cards shall work in fixed or switched
mode.

· In fixed mode each interface card shall be equipped with at least 4 full
duplex RS422 ports for point to point connections or 2 full duplex RS422
ports for multidrop connections.
· In switched mode each interface card shall be equipped with at least 3
full duplex RS422 ports for point to point connections or 1 point to point
and 1 multidrop connection.
· It shall be possible to pass the switching commando’s coming from the
external audio control system to the fibre optic transmission system in a
direct way via RS422 (19,2 Kbps).
· It shall be possible to define several sub-networks or audio systems on
the same optic fibre transmission system. For each sub-network it shall
be possible to have at least 60 simultaneous audio connections.
· It shall be possible to send an audio signal to multiple audio ports residing
on the same interface card.
· It shall be possible to send an audio signal to multiple cards residing in
the same access node.
· It shall be possible to send an audio signal to multiple cards residing in
the same access node as the source.
· It shall be possible to put an audio port in mute via the Network
Management System.
· The interface card shall support the following data rates for RS422
control connections: 4.8 kbps, 9.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, 76.8 kbps,
100 kbps, 153.6 kbps, 307.2 kbps and 614.4 kbps;
· The interface card shall provide the following status information: card
active/inactive, card type, mute, loss of connection, overflow, pilot tone
in, TX/RX (RS422) and RTS/CTS (RS422).
SCS 10.7.3 LAN Interfaces
The access nodes shall provide physical layers supporting Ethernet service
interfaces. The network shall be able to transport the following Ethernet families:
Fast Ethernet (100 Mbit/s) and Gigabit Ethernet (1000Base-T).
a) Fast Ethernet Interface (100 Mbit/S)
· It should be possible to eliminate distance limitations of conventional
Ethernet networks.
· Each interface card supporting a direct Ethernet connection shall provide
at least 5 ports. It should be possible to assign each port to a separate
independent Ethernet Network.
· Each port shall support IEEE 802.3 compliant 10Base-T and IEEE
802.3u compliant 100Base-TX twisted pair interfaces, with RJ-45
connector. The ports shall support autosensing of 10Base-T vs.
100Base-TX.
· At least one port shall support IEEE 802.3z compliant 1000Base-T
twisted pair interfaces, with RJ-45 connector. This port shall support
autosensing of 10Base-T, 100Base-TX and 1000Base-TX.
· Each port shall support 10/100 Mbps half/full duplex operation mode.
The operation mode shall be selected via the auto negotiation feature or
manually via the Network Management System.

· The interfaces must be fully transparent for all higher-level Ethernet

protocols. The interfaces have to support port based VLAN (IEEE
802.1Q) or must be VLAN transparent. Each port shall support at least
two 802.1p priority queues.
· The fibre optic transmission system shall support multiple independent
Ethernet networks.
· The bandwidth per Ethernet network on the fibre optic transmission
system is selectable from 1Mbps to 180 Mbps.
· It shall be possible to use the Ethernet interface card in point to point or
multipoint configurations.
· The Ethernet interface card shall support flow control according to IEEE
802.3x
· The system should at least provide the following status information: card
active/inactive, card type, monitor selection, monitor active, data in input
buffer, data in output buffer, excessive collisions, packet too long, buffer
status, packet removed, input buffer overflow.
b) Gigabit Ethernet Interface (1000 Mbit/S)
The Gigabit Ethernet interface shall also eliminate distance limitations of
conventional Ethernet networks and shall be compliant with 802.3z (Gigabit
Ethernet).
Every high capacity node shall have up to 2 Gbps Ethernet capacity.
The Gigabit Ethernet interface shall have at least the following features:
· Auto negotiation which can be disabled via the management system
· Full duplex operation at 1000 Mbit/s
· Self-learning addresses with aging table
· Independent Ethernet networks in 1 transmission network must be
possible
· Point-to-point and multipoint links must be possible
· The interface must be fully transparent for all higher-level protocols
· The interface has to support port based VLAN (IEEE 802.1Q) or must be
VLAN transparent
· Each port shall support at least two 802.1p priority queues
· It should be possible to have a redundant Gigabit Ethernet connection in
the network
· The interface should have extensive alarm and fault indicators
· The Line Data Rate should be selectable (10, 100, 1000 Mbit/s) through
the Network Management System or by auto-negotiation
c) 64Kbps Interface Card
· It shall be possible to transport a 64Kbps digital stream between any two
points in the transmission system.
· The 64Kbps interface shall be compliant with ITU-T recommendations
G.703 (Co-directional) and G.823.
· The interface card shall have 6 independent ports.

SCS 10.7.4 Video Capabilities
a) Video Interfaces
Each of the inputs or outputs port shall have its own codec to ensure
independence of the other video ports. It is preferred that a port can be freely
configured as input or output port.
The video interface card shall provide at least one accompanying full duplex RS-
485 port for camera control (PTZ) or for control of other external CCTV
equipment.
The video interface card shall provide OSD (On Screen Display) functionality for
Titling and/or alarm display (25x12).
The video input interface card shall provide the necessary video test signals to
ensure the proper operation of the interface.
Following compression standards shall be available: MPEG4 and H.264.
In case MPEG compression is used, the video interface shall comply with the
following specifications (for each port):
· Resolution: 4CIF/CIF/QCIF
· Horizontal resolution: 704, 352 or 176 pixels per line
· Vertical resolution: 576, 288 or 144 active lines/frame (PAL); 480,
240 or 120 lines/frame (NTSC)
· Field rate: 50/60 fields/s (PAL/NTSC)
· All ports will be able to work simultaneously at full resolution (4CIF) and
Full frame rate (50/60fps)
· Colour information: 4:2:0
· Video bandwidth on the network per channel configurable from 512kbps
to 15 Mbps
· Different GOP structures shall be available for system optimization
· Optional support of Stereo High-Quality Audio, synchronized with the
video signal
· Optional Support of Teletext data (in PAL mode)
· End-to-end latency: < 180ms
· At least the following status information shall be available: interface card
active/inactive, interface card type, initialization status, firmware version,
codec parameters (e.g. PAL/NTSC), Video Signal Present/Not Present
b) IP Video Output
It shall be possible to provide video outputs in a video-over-IP format, so

that these video streams can be recorded on an NVR (Network Video
Recorder) or displayed on a digital Video Display Wall (e.g. BARCO Display
Wall).
The IP Video Output interface card shall provide 4 10/100Base-T ports and
one 10/100/1000Base-T Ethernet port.
The IP Video Output interface shall provide up to 60 Video-over-IP output
streams with a total accumulated video throughput of up to 180Mbps.

The IP Video Output interface shall be compatible with M-JPEG, MPEG2

and MPEG4 video streams.
Both Unicast and Multicast IP addresses shall be supported.
c) Virtual Matrix Video Switching Capability of the network
The video application will use a separate, dedicated partition of the network
bandwidth, to avoid interference with other services on the network.
It shall be possible to use the full network user bandwidth for video
applications.
Network performance shall be independent of network load.
The network shall:
· be able to set up connections between input ports to output ports, both
in point-to-point and in multipoint configurations.
· support semi-permanent and dynamically switched video connections.
The semi-permanent video connections shall be configurable from the
NMS system. The dynamically switched video connections (virtual
matrix) shall be controlled by the Video Management System.
· set up a dynamically switched video connection within 200ms
· provide access to up to 32 analogue input or output video interfaces in
every node. All analogue inputs and outputs per node must be available
independently and simultaneously.
· Provide up to 480 Video-over–IP outputs per node
· provide at least 570 independent video channels @ 4Mbps
(STM16c/OC48c Version) or 140 independent video channels @
4Mbps (STM4c/OC12c Version)
· be easily expanded by adding additional Video Interface cards or
additional nodes.
d) CCTV Applications and Integration Software Module
A modular CCTV Application & Integration Software shall be provided that

contains following functional blocks:
· Interfaces to different types of systems/equipment to allow the control
of CCTV functionality such as switching of video inputs to video outputs
over the network. Systems that could be used for controlling the CCTV
functionality include:
v Video Management System (provided by supplier or 3rd party as
requested in tender)
v Building Management System or other umbrella management
system that integrates CCTV together with other applications
v SCADA platforms (e.g.; WinCC)
v CCTV Keyboard/Joystick

To allow this, different interfaces must be available:

v Message-based protocol on a serial link (standard/custom)
v Software interface via DCOM
v Software interface via OPC
v Direct keyboard support via serial link
To enable smooth integration with new 3rd party equipment, the serial
interfaces should be easy to customize. Functionalities supported by the
serial protocol shall include video connection between any video input and
video output(s) on the network, on-screen display (camera & alarm titling),
PTZ control, alarm collection and auxiliary control.
· Interfaces towards equipment to be controlled by the CCTV
Applications & Integration Software, such as:
v The Virtual Matrix functionality in the network
v PTZ (Pan-Tilt-Zoom) units of cameras or High-Speed Dome
cameras (provided by supplier or 3rd party as requested in
tender)
v Digital Display Controller to select Video Wall Layout
To enable smooth integration with new 3rd party equipment, the serial
interfaces should be easy to customize.
· Translation functionality to convert between different protocols used to
control PTZ units or Matrices. This shall allow the integration of
equipment from different suppliers into one integrated video solution
· Routing Functionality: the system shall be able to set-up connections
over a cascade of matrices (or Virtual Matrices in the network) and
autonomously select an available trunk between the matrices
· Alarm/event handling: The Event Manager functionality adds
“intelligence” to the CCTV Application & Integration Software. This
allows the CCTV Application & Integration Software to perform
predefined actions in case an alarm or event occurs. Predefined actions
can include:
v Connecting video inputs to video outputs over the network or
analogue matrices
v Moving a PTZ or Dome camera to a predefined position
v Selecting a layout for a Digital Video wall on a Display Wall
Controller
v Start to play audio files or switch audio over the network
v Start Recording

e) Video Management System
If available, the supplier shall describe his Video Management System

(VMS) for controlling the CCTV functionality over the network.
The VMS shall be a standard Windows 7 PC-based system. The supplier
will specify the minimum system requirements for the proposed
configuration.
The VMS will have a client-server architecture whereby multiple clients
(workstations) with a graphical user interface (GUI) can be connected to a
single server. For small installations, it shall be possible to run the server
and a client on the same PC.
The graphical user interface (GUI) of the VMS client shall provide at least
following functionality:
· geographical view of the premises using maps or floor plans
· ability to navigate between a premises overview and the separate
location views
· on the geographical view of a single location, the camera icons can be
shown at their actual locations
· graphical representation of the control room environment, i.e.
positioning of video monitors
· Intuitive video management. Camera selection for viewing by drag &
drop: e.g. to make a video connection, a camera icon is dragged to a
corresponding monitor icon
· graphical Pan-Tilt-Zoom control for PTZ cameras or dome cameras,
including pre-set selection, pattern activation. It shall also be possible
to activated PTZ functions through a keyboard and joystick
· graphical control of sequences (camera carousel)
· graphical control of salvos
· graphical control of quad splitters and multiplexers
· graphical control (Start/Stop) of video recorders (VCR or DVR)
· access control and user management
The system shall support PTZ priority control when multiple operators are
configured.
The video management system must be adaptable to the customer’s
needs:
· it shall be able to support (or shall be able to support upon order)
various camera, quad splitter, multiplexer and video recorder brands
· drawing tools shall be available to import the customer’s premises
geographical layouts (maps/floor plans) into the GUI
· graphical configuration tools shall be included to configure camera,
monitor, quad, multiplexer and video recorder objects

· configuration of sequences and salvos shall be supported

· configuration of camera pre-sets and patterns shall be supported (for
those camera types supporting these functionalities)
SCS 10.8 2.11.8 Services
The supplier shall offer the following services:

· Engineering and documentation
· Factory acceptance tests
· Training
· Spare Parts
SCS 10.8.1 Engineering and Documentation
The supplier shall be responsible for supplying a fully functional system. The
system shall be designed, manufactured and configured according to the
customer’s specifications. The system shall be delivered fully configured with
the proper databases, jumper settings, etc. Furthermore, the systematic
marking of all modules, cables and wiring shall be included.
System engineering shall be required to provide the customer with a fully
configured, tested and documented system.
The project and standard documentation shall be submitted in English.
SCS 10.8.2 Factory Acceptance Tests
The supplier shall perform two types of factory acceptance tests:

· Quantitative acceptance
· Functional acceptance
All the ordered equipment shall be assembled as a complete system and setup
in the factory. The Quantitative Acceptance can be carried out on the basis of a
Quantitative Acceptance Document. Quantitative Acceptance (together with the
customer) implies the verification of the Final Bill of Quantities before shipment.
Together with the customer, a system test shall be performed according to the
procedures stipulated in the "Functional Acceptance Document" drafted by the
supplier. A sample configuration of the connections shall be tested in the
customer’s presence.
SCS 10.8.3 Training
Training shall be offered at the supplier’s premises or on site. All training

sessions shall be in English, the training documentation shall be in English.
After the training, the customer must be able to configure, operate and maintain
the system.

SCS 10.8.4 Spare parts
Spare parts shall be offered for 10 years with a confidence level of 95%. This
means the customer must be able to replace, in 95% of the cases, his failing
system parts for a period of 10 years while no repaired parts have been returned
to the site. The failing parts shall be sent to the supplier for repair. After repair
the supplier shall return the repaired parts to the site.
The supplier shall justify (calculations must be submitted) the quantities of the
spare parts list based on the MTBF figures of the different modules.
SCS 11 QUALITY CONTROL
A thorough quality control and assurance program shall be exercised by the

Contractor during the total contract. This shall be done in excess of the following
guidelines.
a) Assurance that all material delivered complies with SABS, BS, IEC or
other internationally accepted standards.
b) The foreman on site must be supplied with quality material. This also
includes items like nuts. bolts, washers, terminals, etc.
c) The material must be of proper size for its application.
d) The material must be of adequate strength and chemical composition to
last in its ambient conditions.
e) The foreman on site must be provided with the latest set of drawings and
also with workshop drawings as necessary, describing to him exactly all
installation work and material to be used.
f) The foreman shall continuously monitor all installation work and shall
satisfy himself that the work is done to highest quality standards.
g) The staff employed on site shall be qualified and experienced to handle
work of this nature.
SCS 12 NAMIBIA COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (NCC) APPROVAL
The contractor shall obtain the approval from Namibia Communications

Commission for all the equipment and installation offered.
The contractor shall ensure himself that the equipment offered complies with all
regulations required by Namibia Communications Commission and is
compatible with the public telephone network in Namibia (voltage, frequencies,
pulse types, DID, etc.) and the local network of the site.
SCS 13 DATA AND NETWORKING EQUIPMENT
SCS 13.1 General
The network system offered shall be compatible according to the latest CCITT
standards.

SCS 13.2 Equipment Specifications
Unless otherwise specified the equipment offered shall be of the following

makes: Nortel, Cisco, HP or equal and approved by the engineer. It shall comply
to the following minimum specifications and requirements:
SCS 13.2.1 Switch 48 port
· 48 RJ 45 10/100/1000 Base –Tx ports.

· Ethernet compatible.
· Manageable.
· 19” rack mountable.
· 230VAC.
· Switching capacity 100 Mbps.
· Multiple layer.
SCS 13.2.2 Switch 24 port
· 24 RJ 45 10/100/1000 Base –Tx ports.

· Ethernet compatible.
· Manageable.
· 230VAC.
· Switching capacity 100 Mbps.
· Multiple layer.
SCS 13.2.3 Patch panel
· 24 Port RJ 45.
· 19” Rack mountable.
· Height 1 U.
· CAT 5 compatible.
· Labelling for easy port identification
SCS 13.2.4 Patch leads
· RJ 45 connectors.
· 1,2 m and 2,4 m length.
· Clearly labelled at both ends to indicate the connection between patch
panel and switch.
SCS 13.2.5 Brush grommet panel
· Built-in cable management tray.

· Height 1U.

SCS 13.2.6 Floor standing cabinet
· Floor standing cabinet with wheels and lockable smoked glass front door.
· Height 42 U or 48 U.
· Roof mounted fan tray with 4 fans.
· Cable entry plates.
· Fully adjustable 19” panel mountings.
SCS 13.3 Power supply for switch
· ATS.
· 19” mountable.
· Input voltage ranges 84 to 264 Volts.
· Online double-conversion technology.
· Automatic bypass.
SCS 13.4 Cabling
The Contractor shall provide all network cabling in the building from the cabinet
in the server room to all data points.
CAT6 cable shall be used.
Above mentioned cable work forms part of this contract.
Labelling
All RJ45 outlet points shall be permanently labelled with a printed wrap-on label.
All end to end cabling shall be permanently labelled with a printed wrap-on label.
Termination modules and switch(es) shall be labelled.
Patch leads shall be permanently labelled with a printed wrap-on label.
Labelling convention to be approved by the engineer.
SCS 13.5 Other users
Sufficient space to be allowed in the cabinet for installation of the PABX system,
Access Control system, CCTV system and Intercom system.
The cabinet to allow sufficient space for future servers.

SCS 14 MANUALS AND SAMPLES FOR APPROVAL
The Contractor shall provide the Client with the following:

· General short description of the system.
The Contractor shall, at the Practical Completion Inspection, provide the client
with the following:
· Two sets of "handbooks/drawings" of the installations shall be furnished,
· A set shall consist of various items:
- General description of the system.
- Full operating instructions (detailed).
- All features available on the system (especially if not used at the
time).
- All installation requirements.
- Technical specification on the system (and on all individual parts).
- Details of parameters and all adjustments on the system
- All block, connection and termination diagrams.
- As-built drawings indicating positions and labelling of outlet points.
SCS 15 CONDUITS AND WIRE WAYS
Conduits and wire ways will be installed by the electrical Contractor. Contractors
shall remain responsible to ensure all requirements of wireways for installation
are available to electrical contractor.
SCS 16 EARTHING & BONDING
(i) Bonding
The bonding of all metal parts of the building shall be bonded and earthed
in accordance with SANS-10142 latest edition.
(ii) Building Earthing
Lightning protection shall be done as a subcontract to this contract by a
specialist Contractor.
SCS 17 HANDING OVER OF INSTALLATION
A “Defects list” will be issued during the construction period prior to the practical
completion inspection, which shall be completed and signed by the Contractor
and submitted to the Engineer one week before the practical completion
inspection date.
If the Engineer finds fault with the installation, he may at his discretion, refuse to
take practical completion and the Contractor will be responsible for any cost
incurred by the Engineer for subsequent transport and accommodation costs,
and the Engineer shall be entitled to deduct such costs from payments due to
the Contractor.

After rectification of all defects the installation will be handed over. The day of
handing over shall coincide with the contractor’s date of practical completion.
Practical completion will only be granted after the “AS-BUILT” drawings and final
payment claim have been submitted to the Engineer.
SCS 18 FOREMAN ON SITE
The Contractor shall provide a capable foreman, whose name shall be disclosed
in the tender. The Contractor shall ensure that this foreman supervises the entire
structured cabling installation to the satisfaction of the Contractor and Engineer.
This foreman shall be replaced with another capable foreman if required to do
so by the Contractor or Engineer.
The foreman shall attend all site meetings.
PART III DETAIL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - CCTV
TVS 1 SCOPE OF WORKS

This section of works covers in broad terms the supply, delivery, erection,
commissioning and maintenance for 3 months and guarantee for 12 months of
the CCTV installation as specified in this document.
The tenderer shall allow in his tender price for all material, labour, supervision,
transport, tests and all other items necessary to complete the Contract in its
entirety.
In the event where the supply and/or installation of any item, material or
equipment does not form part of this Contract, it will be specifically indicated as
such in his specification and/or the accompanying drawings.
The CCTV installation work shall comprise a new CCTV installation services in
the new buildings. It will include CCTV cameras, Network Video Recorders and
Management Software.
To minimise disturbances to the Employers business, some of the work within
this contract must be done on weekends and after hours. Costs for these works
are deemed to be included in tendered rates and no additional claims will be
entertained.
TVS 2 DRAWINGS
One set Architects Drawings – available from WCE Offices if required. The
Contractor shall, on receipt of the Architect’s and Engineer’s drawings, minutely
compare the corresponding drawings and should any discrepancy, ambiguity or
conflicting information be found thereon, the Contractor shall correlate any such
discrepancy, ambiguity or conflicting information with the Engineer before
proceeding with any of the relevant works as no claim for any extras due to the
Contractor having failed to comply with this instruction will be entertained.

TVS 3 STANDARDS
new and the best of their respective kinds and shall comply with the
requirements laid down in the latest editions of the relevant SANS (SABS) or BS
and their amendments (if any) and the requirements of this Specification.
In event of items bearing the SANS (SABS) mark being available in respect of
the materials and equipment required, only items bearing this mark will be
acceptable.
The workmanship under this Contract shall be of a high standard and to the
The work shall be carried out in accordance with the General Technical
Specification laid down in this Specification.
TVS 4 RADIO AND TV INTERFERENCE

All equipment installed under this Contract shall comply with the Government
Notice No. R.2246 and any other applicable rules and regulations in respect
of radio and TV interferences. Any equipment found producing interference
subsequent to commissioning, shall be suppressed or replaced to the
satisfaction of the Engineer without any additional cost.
TVS 5 REGULATIONS
The work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with and all material and
equipment supplied shall comply with the following laws and regulations where
applicable.
a) The latest edition of the "Code of Practice for the Wiring of Premises",
SANS 10142 (as amended);
The Contractor will be responsible for serving all notices and paying all fees due
in terms of the above laws and regulations.

TVS 6 LOCAL SYSTEM AND OPERATING CONDITIONS

The main power supply will be 230 V, 50Hz single phase and 400 V three phase
plus neutral, 50 Hz respectively.
All materials and equipment supplied and/or installed under this Contract shall
be suitable for satisfactory operation and shall have prescribed characteristics
under the following conditions:
Ambient Operating Conditions
Altitude ± 1200 above sea level
Minimum ambient temperature -5 Degrees Celsius
Maximum ambient temperature +40 Degrees Celsius
Humidity Up to saturation point
Electrical System Particulars
LT System
400V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50Hz AC with earthed neutral
TVS 7 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED

Drawings and information to be submitted on completion of the Works:
i) Two sets of paper prints of all the drawings showing all "as built" features
of the installation to be submitted with the final claim.
ii) Three complete sets of operating and maintenance manuals containing all
drawings, test certificates, settings of equipment as commissioned,
installation, commissioning and maintenance details, operating
instructions, as well as a complete list of spare parts with reference
numbers and technical description to enable the client's technical personnel
to maintain service and repair the installation.
TVS 8 TEST CERTIFICATES AND TESTS
Where test certificates are required for individual pieces of equipment,

these shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval immediately on
receipt of such certificates.
The Contractor shall be responsible for functional testing, quality
inspections and all testing required by the prescribed regulations and
rectification of all outstanding items and defects prior to the inspection
by the Employer and the Engineers.
Where witnessing of test are required by the Engineer, arrangements
shall be made by the Contractor for the Engineer to witness such tests.
TVS 9 BUILDER'S WORK

The Contractor shall be responsible for the making good of all builder's work
connected with conduits, outlet boxes, cable entry sleeves etc.

TVS 10 LABELLING
Each camera shall be labelled. Each cable to be labelled at both ends using
the same description.
Cost for labelling of cameras, readers, controllers and cables are deemed to
be included in the costs quoted for cameras and cables.
TVS 11 CONDUITS, TRUNKING AND TRAYS

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all conduits, trunking and
trays that are required for his installation have been installed in the right
position.
TVS 12 IP CCTV SYSTEM INSTALLATION
General
The CCTV video system shall be a HIKVision system as approved by the
engineer. Only HIKVision components with original manufacturer accessories
will be accepted.
The CCTV video system shall be an IP PoE network-based, fully distributed
digital video system. The CCTV video system will utilize local area networks
(LAN) as a transmission medium for video, configuration, as well as storage of
all data. The CCTV video system shall provide full video control at the main
control room, with additional full selection capability at any point within the
network from a workstation or a video console display. The CCTV video system
shall provide unlimited expansion capability for the addition or modification of
video inputs.
All encoders shall accommodate mounting into a standard EIA 19-inch rack or
separately into a wall mount bracket. The rack unit shall provide a dual power
supply or utilize a separate rack mountable power supply unit for powering
multiple rack units.
The dual-stream video encoder shall incorporate video optimization to select the
best image quality and frame rate for the target component (decoder,
workstation, or console) without affecting the recording rate. Video optimization
shall also allow the unit to select a high rate and low quality setting for recording
and alarm conditions, with three programmable alarm inputs (supervised or
unsupervised) and one relay output. The dual-stream video encoder shall
transmit video, audio and data over the IP network.
The dual-stream video encoder shall offer two CCTV modes, video loss
indicator, bidirectional audio support, and PTZ support.
The video encoders shall accept NTSC or PAL video signals from fixed
colour/black-white cameras, PTZ cameras, low light cameras, or any other
camera that provides a composite NTSC/PAL 1 Vp-p video signal.
The video encoder shall support dual encoded stream capability from a single
video source to allow simultaneous and independent viewing, recording, and/or
quality.

The video decoder shall support any digital video stream on the network and
allow for the decoding of up to four simultaneous streams from any video
encoder. It shall also allow for simultaneous and independent viewing at the
recording frame and quality rate.
The IP video CCTV system shall support matrix digital decoders that allow an
interface of video and data to analogue matrix systems. The matrix digital
decoder shall convert digital video streams into analogue video, outputting the
video to the matrix switcher.
The matrix digital decoder shall transmit video from the IP video CCTV system
and allow an operator to use the same analogue keyboard functions to view and
control video on both systems.
Each of the video encoders’ pan-tilt-zoom control latency shall not exceed 117
ms, excluding network transmission latency.
Each of the video encoders shall support an asynchronous serial port that can
be programmed for data rates up to 230 kbps and can be set to RS-422 or RS-
485 signal levels. The RS-485 mode shall support two-wire and four-wire
interfaces.
Each of the video encoders shall support three NO/NC dry-contact inputs and
one relay output. The latching alarm shall continue to record until user
acknowledgement can be programmed for a predetermined time-out.
Each of the video encoders shall transmit all command and control messages
using the TCP/IP protocol and use PKI RSA-128 bit encryption for secured
communication.
Each of the video encoders/decoders shall meet or exceed the following design
and performance specifications:
Video Resolution
· 2MP (1920x1080)
· 3MP (2048x1536)
· 5MP (2560x1920)
· 6MP (3032x2008)
· 8MP (3264x2448)
Each of the Video encoders shall have the capability to provide an advanced
built-in video motion detection separate from the Digital IP based recording
system to activate recording with a pre-alarm capability of up to 24 hours
Environmental Specifications
· Operating Temperature 0° to 35°C at unit air intake
· Operational Humidity 20% to 80%, non-condensing
· Storage Temperature -45° to 65°C
· Maximum Humidity Gradient 10% per hour
· Operating Altitude -16 m to 3,048 m
· All metal parts shall be 316L Stainless Steel or better
· All equipment shall be designed for an highly-corrosive enivironment and
UV stabilized.

Video CCTV System Capabilities

The IP video CCTV system network shall be arranged so each area will operate
independently and shall communicate to the system manager through no less
than a 1000Base-T Gigabit Network. The IP video CCTV system shall utilize
virtual matrix switcher capabilities through the use of a system manager. The
system manager shall provide a user interface and database management of
the IP video CCTV system. System manager software shall allow for the
restriction of users to logical configurable groups of cameras, monitors and
system operations.
The system manager shall be capable of performing as a NTP Server for the
entire system. The IP video CCTV system shall be synchronized to an NTP
server so that all system components function on the same time clock basis.
The NTP server shall reside within the system, and it shall be capable of being
driven by external time sources if needed. All time-zone corrections shall
automatically be provided in the system.
The system manager shall be capable of performing as a DHCP and UPnP
server for the entire system and components. The system manager shall provide
all connection and management communications between system devices
The system manager shall be capable of incorporating RSA 256 bit
public/private key authentication in addition to custom bit public/private keys.
The IP video CCTV system shall be capable of authenticating any video
produced by the encoder that was originally produced by the stream, NVR
recording the stream, or operator who exported the stream; all shall include
time/date stamped video.
The system manager shall manage rights and permissions for all devices,
persons, and any system video or other data.
The IP video CCTV system’s digital recording and monitoring system shall
incorporate a fault tolerant architecture and shall include redundancy in critical
areas of concern. Encoder power supplies and NVR/storage box power
supplies shall be capable of redundancy. As a standard, all NVRs and storage
boxes shall provide RAID 5 redundancy in the event of any system failure.
The IP video CCTV system shall provide an API/SDK that is capable of being
used at a level consistent with a full-featured gateway. The gateway shall
provide an RS232 ASCII interface, Ethernet interface, and the ability to create
custom plug-ins to the system user interface.
The IP video CCTV system shall provide multilevel diagnostics of each
component in all critical areas. These diagnostics shall be reported to a
diagnostic console for processing. The diagnostic data shall be capable of being
scripted into actionable events within the system. The diagnostics shall be
capable of being mined by network diagnostic systems such as OpenView,
Tivoli, and others.
The IP video CCTV system shall be able to handle future expansion of an
unlimited total capacity from what is shown in the drawings, including but not
limited to cameras, monitors, alarm circuits, and relay closures.

Basic System Capabilities

The following capabilities are considered essential for the IP video CCTV system
described in this specification:
· The IP-based video CCTV system software shall make use of video
analytics, pattern based analytic algorithms and teach-by-example
capabilities to trigger alarm states on the parimeter fence as a deterrent and
not function in a reactive manner.
· The IP-based video CCTV system software shall provide a built-in digital
video virtual matrix switcher. The IP video CCTV system shall support the
ability to switch any camera in the system to any monitor in the system,
through either a PC keyboard/mouse or a joystick controller to either an
analogue or VGA Monitor.
· All components of the system shall utilize a Linux®-based operating system,
with the exception of the workstation.
· The IP video CCTV system shall be an integrated hardware and software
platform. It shall provide distributed administration of multiple devices and
administer rights and privileges for all attached devices.
· The system manager shall manage system CCTV, functioning as a key
manager for user and device authentication. It shall also route
communication between all devices on large, sub-netted CCTV networks.
The system manager shall store and administer secure keys and shall have
multilevel and user permission management.
· The system manager shall function as the default system time network video
recorder, using the industry standard NTP protocol to ensure integrated
devices are synchronized. The system manager shall support UPnP
architecture and shall provide DHCP services, supporting the dynamic
addition of network devices.
· The system manager shall store a database of device errors, alarms, and
other system events. The comprehensive database shall be accessed and
searched through the system log window. The system manager shall allow
for connection to an intelligent uninterruptible power supply (UPS), and it
shall allow for a message to be sent to the UPS in the case of a power failure.
The system manager also supports data replication; a duplicate set of critical
system data can be stored on a second system manager, enabling quick and
easy transition to IP video CCTV equipment.
The IP video CCTV system encoders, workstations, cameras, monitors, alarms,
relays, etc., shall be configurable.
The system manager shall provide for an unlimited number of system operators
with personal identification numbers (PINs) that define priority levels, operator
facilities, system roles, and camera and monitor groupings.
The IP video CCTV system shall have the capability of the following
functionalities:
· The system shall be fully distributed in nature so that each system device
can remain operational in a majority of modes without dependence on other
devices.
· Each individual entry in a sequence shall have the capacity to trigger PTZ
camera pre-sets, patterns or auxiliaries.

· Multiple users shall be able to simultaneously view the same camera view or
sequence. The system shall utilize multicast streaming video to allow multiple
users to view the same video stream, though not necessarily synchronized
with each other, without affecting the bandwidth of the network.
· Video titling shall provide for a 100-character camera site description (on/off),
display time/date (on/off), set the display colour (black-white), display a site
message (on/off), and define the screen block position for the title.
· The IP video CCTV system shall be able to capability to create and execute
a system script used to control any system function, and it may be combined
into any order. The configuration of such scripts shall be easy to use and
follow the rules of drag and drop configuration. The IP video CCTV system
shall be capable of the following actions (minimal requirements):
· Display video from any camera to a specific monitor or screen division,
including changing screen division views
· Reset any monitor to its original screen division and image
· Move system PTZ cameras to a specified pre-set location
· Activate predefined patterns on system PTZ cameras
· Start/stop recording an event from any indicated video source
· Utilize script nesting, a means of running another script within any given
script
· Activate system relays and send e-mail notification to any recipient through
pop3
· Add wait times to any script command
The scripting language shall utilize a system function upload and will modify or
send out a global command to all components in the system.
Operator control of a camera or selection of monitors shall override the
sequence control of camera or monitor; sequence control of cameras or
selection of monitors shall not override operator control of camera of selection
of monitors.
The IP video CCTV system shall allow for programming of alarms and
associated incoming alarms with related parts of the system.
Individual, group, or all alarms shall be disabled by special sequences, which
can be initiated by the operator or automatically by time/day/date.
The IP video CCTV system shall log all alarms and events in the system
manager database.
The IP video CCTV system shall provide real time system status on the operator
graphical user interface (GUI). All alarms, current monitor activity, and selected
PTZ camera ID can be displayed in user-defined descriptive text.
The IP video CCTV system shall be capable of the following languages: English,
French, Spanish, German, Portuguese, Italian, Russian, and Chinese (simple).
The system also shall be capable of accepting new language packages from
one central point. The system shall allow for user profiles, by language, to be
loaded into any operational location including workstations and virtual matrix
controllers.

Workstation
The IP video CCTV system shall have the capability to display video onto a
standard analogue monitor, a video wall, or any number of VGA monitors
through a virtual matrix controller connected to a video console display device.
The video console device shall connect anywhere on the network and allow any
of the system encoded devices to be decoded and displayed on a standard
analogue monitor or the PC workstation, as well as control and program PTZ
cameras.
The PC workstation shall allow users with authority to configure devices, set up
users, adjust network settings, and create recording schedules. Permission to
access these functions and all other system services can be configured to a fine
level of detail. The PC workstation shall have advanced search capabilities,
event logging, and alarm interface displays. The PC workstation shall export
video and still images in multiple formats, including QuickTime MPEG-4, BMP,
and JPG. A front panel USB port and DVD/CD-RW drive make it capable of
exporting video clips and still images to external media. Authentication software
shall be exported automatically for any exports.
The system shall be capable of providing user-defined workspaces on any
workstation, based on an individual user profile.
The PC workstation application shall support the functionality to view
procedures; these procedures shall be triggered to appear during a certain
event, and they can be used to provide detailed written or verbal instructions to
the operator as to the actions to be taken.
The PC workstation application shall support digital zoom on any fixed camera’s
video streams.
The PC workstation application shall support digital zoom on a PTZ camera’s
live video streams.
The PC workstation application shall provide the ability to control and program
any camera equipped with PTZ. The PC workstation shall be capable of the
following:
· Manually control the PTZ
· Set the pan/tilt home positions for manual or alarm activation
· Automatically control the cameras through an alarm trigger
· Ability to set multiple pre-set positions
· Ability to set multiple tours
· Remotely set and clear the movement limits of the pan/tilt mechanism from
the control room, through a telemetry unit at an outdoor camera site
· Adjust the zoom lens
· The ability to control the camera menu and setup the camera through the
IP video CCTV system
The IP video CCTV system video workstation shall provide up to six predefined
and user-programmable views with up to 16 different camera views.
Additionally, the system shall be capable of providing user-defined workspaces
on any operational control point, based on an individual user profile.
The system shall be capable of providing quad screen playback, with each
quadrant playing video from different cameras and the same time/date stamp.

Virtual Matrix Controller

The system shall be capable of providing a virtual matrix keyboard that provides
rotation of modules for easy single- or dual-handed operation.
The system shall be capable of providing a virtual matrix keyboard that provides
control module interchangeability for both right- and left-handed operation of any
module
The video console display shall be a high performance, multiple stream
decoding unit. The video console display shall convert multiple MPEG-4
streams into video signal to be viewed on VGA or analogue monitors, and it shall
provide a user interface to the distributed network video surveillance system.
The video console display shall allow up to 16, 32, 48 or 64 streams to be
decoded and displayed simultaneously, and it shall allow video to be displayed
on NTSC/PAL composite, NTSC/PAL S-video, VGA monitors (maximum VGA
resolution 1024 x 768), or HDMI monitors (1920x1080). Every output option
shall display a single image, four images (2x2), nine images (3x3), or sixteen
images (4x4). When multiple images are displayed, the IP Video CCTV System
shall automatically provide the best video display frame rate for the selected
cameras and optimize video display.
The video console display provides a user interface to the IP video CCTV
system. When used with the keyboard controller, the video console display shall
allow a user to operate the system like a traditional matrix using the joystick, jog
shuttle, and keypad to control the video display. The video console display shall
also provide NVR-like functionality allowing users to record, play back, and
export video.
The video console display shall provide full access to operations, through user-
friendly, highly intuitive, and semi-transparent on-screen menus. An on-screen
graphical overlay shall allow users to turn on and off the overlay with a single
button push of the keyboard controller. The video console display shall have on-
screen PTZ, device playback, property controls, and alarm interface display.
The video console display system shall accommodate growth by adding
additional video console displays, keyboards, and monitors to decode additional
video inputs without adding additional user workstations. The video console
display shall allow for the installation of compatible four-channel decoders to
create a completely scalable virtual matrix, and it shall allow for multiple display
views for live or playback cameras or devices.
System Specification
The system to support open platform for IP megapixel platforms and must
support H264 MPEG-4 and MJPEG video formats and capable to be capable to
take other I/O devices. Each sever to be capable to take up to 64 channels and
that different servers can be linked.
The system to have multi-channel playback capabilities of up to 16 channels
with speeds of 1/16x to 64x. Video enhancement to include sharpen, brightness
and contrast. All recorded data to have a digital watermark.
Intelligent searches to include general motion, missing object, foreign object,
camera occlusion and signal lost.

Fixed Network Indoor Camera

The camera to be of the IP PoE based surveillance type, supporting the industry-
standard H.264, MPEG-4 and JPEG. It must be suited for CCTV surveillance of
high security buildings such as prisons. It shall be a HIKVision 4MP ColorVu
Fixed Turret Camera or equivalent as approved by the Engineer.
Fixed Network Outdoor Camera

high security buildings such as prisons. It shall be a HIKVision 4MP ColorVu
Fixed Bullet Camera or equivalent as approved by the Engineer.
PTZ Network Outdoor Camera

high security buildings such as prisons. It shall be a HIKVision 2MP Outdoor 25x
Zoom DarkfighterX IR Network Speed Dome Camera or equivalent as approved
by the Engineer.
Network Video Recorder

The network video recorder shall be HIKVision 64 Channel NVR 16 SATA or
equivalent as approved by the Engineer.
Video Decoder
The video decoder shall be HIKVision Decoder capable for 8 Monitors.
Video
The system must be capable of the following file compressions:
· H.264 up to 25/30 fps at 1280 x 800
· MPEG-4 up to 25/30 fps at 1280 x 800
· MJPEG up to 25/30 fps at 1280 x 800
The recording to be time and date stamped and to have authentication
watermark.
Day and Night

The camera to operate at a lighting level of minimum 0.001 Lux for Full Colour
and 0.0001 for Black/White.
Some areas require that the camera has to have a built in IR illuminator for
recordings of up to 50 m at 0 Lux lighting level.
Power Supply
The power supply to be Power-over-Ethernet. The power consumption to be
less than 4.5W per camera.

3.15.15 CCTV
The system to have multi-level user access with password protection, IP filtering,
HTTPS encrypted data transmission and 802.1X port-based authentication for
network protection.
3.15.16 Operating Environment

The system to be able to operate within the following environmental conditions:
Temperature range : -5 to 50ºC
Humidity : 95% RH
High corrosive environment
High UV environment
3.15.17 System Requirements

The system must be compatible with a Windows 10 and later operating system
for viewing.
3.15.18 Storage space and backup

The hard disc space to be of sufficient size to capture at least 180 days of
recording data, without any motion detection enabled, before any data will be
overridden.
3.15.19 Commissioning and hand-over

The Tenderer is to allow in his tendered price for the in-depth training of the
users staff members in the operation and maintenance of the system.
Before hand-over, the tenderer shall carry out the following: -
· Once the successful tenderer has satisfied himself that the works are
complete in every detail as specified in the contract documents, he shall
inform the Engineer in writing of a proposed date for a first delivery
inspection. The Engineer shall be given at least 7 day notice of such a date.
· The Engineer will confirm in writing the acceptability of such a date.
· All maintenance and operating manuals, drawings etc. shall be handed over
to the Engineer before the first delivery inspection takes place.
· At the inspection the successful tenderer shall carry out operational start-
up/shut-down and full load tests. All equipment required for the tests shall
be provided by the successful tenderer at his own expense. These tests
shall be carried out at the tenderers premises before delivery to site.
· The Engineer reserves the right to inspect any part of the works at any time
during the contract period.
· Final delivery inspection will be arranged on completion of the works on the
same basis as for first delivery inspection. Final delivery will not be carried
out before the last day of the guarantee period.
The completion certification will be issued to the tenderer only after the
satisfactory completion of the first and final delivery inspections.

PART IV PERIMETER FENCE MONITORING SYSTEM
SCOPE OF CONTRACT
The Perimeter Monitoring System Contractor here before and after called the Contractor, will
be responsible for the complete Perimeter Monitoring System installation and the proper
functioning of all equipment called for in this specification.
This Contract covers in broad terms the supply, delivery, erection, commissioning and
maintenance for 3 months and guarantee for 12 months of the Perimeter Monitoring System
installation as specified in this document.
The tenderer shall allow in his tender price for all material, labour, supervision, transport, tests
and all other items necessary to complete the Contract in its entirety.
In the event where the supply and/or installation of any item, material or equipment does not
form part of this Contract, it will be specifically indicated as such in his specification and/or
the accompanying drawings.
The Perimeter Monitoring System installation work shall comprise a new Perimeter
Monitoring System installation. It will include a fence monitoring system sensors/cable,
controller and integration into existing Alarm and CCTV security systems.
To minimise disturbances to the Employers business, some of the work within this contract
must be done on weekends and after hours. Costs for these works are deemed to be included in
tendered rates and no additional claims will be entertained.
DRAWINGS
One set Architects Drawings – available from WCE Offices if required. The Contractor shall,
on receipt of the Architect’s and Engineer’s drawings, minutely compare the corresponding
drawings and should any discrepancy, ambiguity or conflicting information be found thereon,
the Contractor shall correlate any such discrepancy, ambiguity or conflicting information with
the Engineer before proceeding with any of the relevant works as no claim for any extras due
to the Contractor having failed to comply with this instruction will be entertained.

GENERAL
Summary
A. Section describes a system to detect intrusions along a perimeter fence
employing fiber optic technology.
B. Product
A system consists of fiber optic cable, field termination modules, and central
processing equipment which is sensitive to vibration of the fiber optic cable.
The system can locate the appropriate area affected should a disturbance
occur.
References
Abbreviations and Acronyms
1. CPU – Central Processing Unit
2. dB – Decibel; a unit of optical loss
3. EMI – Electromagnetic Interference
4. FFT CAMS – Future Fibre Technologies Central Alarm Monitoring System
5. GB – Gigabyte; a unit of computer data storage
6. GUI – Graphical User Interface
7. HDD – Hard Disk Drive
8. LAN – Local Area Network
9. MB – Megabyte; a unit of amount of digital information used
10. MTBF – Mean Time Between Failures
11. MTTR – Mean Time to Repair
12. NAR – Nuisance Alarm Rate
13. nm – Nanometer; a unit of wavelength
14. OTDR – Optical Time Domain Reflectometry
15. PC – Personal Computer
16. PVC – Polyvinyl Chloride
17. RFI – Radio Frequency Interference
18. SDK – Software Development Kit
19. TCP/IP – Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
20. TPI – Third Party Interference
21. UPS – Uninterruptible Power Supply
22. Vac – Voltage Alternating Current

System description
FMS 3.3.1 Overview

System is a fence-mounted, intrusion detection sensor system based on multi-
core, single mode fiber optic cable. It employs coherent-OTDR technology for
the detection of perimeter intrusions. The fiber optic sensor cable is mounted
directly on a fence (types include chain link/mesh, palisade, welded mesh and
expanded metal) along the perimeter, or around an area to be protected.
The sensing cable is connected to a sensing controller that detects and locates
intrusions by monitoring and analyzing changes in reflected light due to
vibrations on the sensor cables.
When a sensor cable is cut, the system continues to detect and locate an
intrusion on the cable connected between the sensing controller and the cable
cut. When using two channels form a single sensing controller, it is also possible
to achieve cut-resilience where the sensing cable is still fully operational in the
event of a single cable cut.
FMS 3.3.2 Performance Requirements

Fence intrusion attempts comprising climbing, cutting, jacking or similar, will be
detected, and the associated area identified by the fiber optic sensing system.
1. Sensing Cable
i. There are two hardware channels per controller, each having up to
40 km (24.85 miles) of sensing cable. The sensing cable length can be
adjusted as specifically required for the site
ii. The sensor installed in the field is intrinsically safe and immune to
lightning strikes, EMI and RFI events
iii. Sensor cable can operate at temperatures between -30°C and +70°C
(-22°F and +158°F) without performance degradation.
2. Sensing Controller
Will contain the electronics and software required to:
i. Continuously monitor and detect real time intrusion events over the entire
length of the fiber optic sensing cable
ii. Have two separate channels that can be individually configured
iii. Raise an alarm when an intruder attempts to climb, cut or spread the
fence fabric to enter the monitored area
iv. Open or close Form C contacts for intrusion alarms on each channel,
system faults, or breaks in the fiber optic cable
v. MTBF > 50,000 hours, and a MTTR of less than 20 minutes
vi. Dual hot swappable power supplies for electronics and optics

3. FFT CAMS™
A PC-based alarm monitoring system with features including:
i. A GUI displaying site-specific maps with alarms
ii. Capability of acknowledging, processing, and reporting alarms for
multiple controllers
iii. Capability to control external cameras and contact outputs via a network
connection, interface to email systems, and utilize or integrate with
custom applications
iv. A general-purpose SDK available to interface and integrate with higher
level Security Management Systems
4. Intrusion Detection
The system is capable of monitoring dual continuous fiber optic sensor cables
deployed in open-loop or closed-loop configurations.
i. Detectable Intrusions
The system is capable of detecting the following types of intrusions:
· Direct climbing
· Cutting of the fence or fence fabric
· Spreading and lifting of the fence or fence fabric
ii. Probability of Detection

· A correctly installed and calibrated system can achieve a probability
of detection rate of not less than 95% with a
90 percent level of confidence using manufacturer supplied testing
methods
· Test TPI include those attempted by direct climbing, cutting,
spreading, and lifting of the fence or fence fabric
iii. Detection Location Accuracy

· A correctly installed and calibrated system can achieve an intrusion
location accuracy of ± 1 to 4 m (3.3 to 13 ft) using manufacturer
approved TPI tests on manufacturer approved installations
· Test TPI includes those attempted by direct climbing, cutting,
spreading, and lifting of the fence or fence fabric
iv. Time to Detection

· The system is capable of generating an alarm within one second
from the onset of an attempted breach that involves an aggressive
contact with the fence, such as one attempted by quick climbing
· Other detected intrusion attempts should be reported no later than
one second after the fence breach is completed

v. Nuisance Alarms (Environmental)

Defined as alarms generated by a properly functioning processor and attached
sensor where the cause is known or suspected (animal, wind-blown-debris, or
other) and is not an intentional intrusion attempt.
To combat nuisance alarms:
· The system will perform dynamic adjustments to compensate
environmental nuisance events such as rain or traffic noise.
Seasonal recalibration should not be required
· The system will be installed properly and maintained
· All fence mounted signs and other loose materials and fence
hardware including gates should be secured in place or removed as
needed to prevent banging on, or swaying of the fence
· The fence should be consistently taut throughout the entire perimeter
in accordance with recognized industry standards for security
fences. The cleared area should be at least three meters (10 feet)
wide on both sides of the fence. All gates are to be secured to
prevent movement or rattling
The site and fence will be prepared beforehand so that proper installation
minimizes the NAR due to the following possible causes:
· Vegetation up to 30 cm (one foot) high
· Rain
· Wind - speeds greater than 35 km/h (21.75 mi/h) require a site-
specific evaluation
· Low flying aircraft
· Temperature changes between -30°C and +70°C (-22°F and
+158°F) for the cable only.
· Snow
· Sandstorms
· Acoustic, RFI or EMI effects
· Lightning strikes in the vicinity, but not directly on the fabric of
the fence
vi. False Alarms (System generated)

Alarms caused by internal electronic processes (cables excluded) will not be
generated during normal system operation.

5. Sensor Cable Cut

i. The system can detect and alert/alarm if a sensor cable is cut, with an
accuracy of ± 2 m (6.6 ft). A cut or damaged sensor cable can be repaired
by fusion splicing, with additional cable as necessary. Manufacturer also
offers an alternative rapid repair kit.
ii. In the event of a cable cut, each channel continues to accurately detect
and locate intrusions on the cable connected between the controller and
to within 10m (33 ft) of the cable cut.
iii. The system can operate in a closed loop cut-resilient (or “cut-immune”)
mode whereby it continues to detect and locate intrusions along the
whole perimeter in the event of a single sensor cable cut.
Submittals
A. Product Data
1. Manufacturer’s printed or electronic data sheets
2. Manufacturer’s installation and operation manuals
B. Manufacturer’s Instructions
3. Fiber optic cable routing
4. Termination points and enclosures
5. Fixation methods to fence of fiber optic cable
6. Central processing (head-end) including equipment rack elevations
Quality assurance
A. Qualifications
Manufacturer is well-established and proven in the security industry, with more
than 15 years’ experience in the design, manufacture, and successful
implementation of fiber optic intrusion detection systems.
B. Product Certifications
1. The system complies with FCC regulations, EN55022, EN61000 and
CISPR 22 standards for radio-frequency emissions
2. The system complies with CE regulations and carries the CE mark for
European applications
3. The product is manufactured by an ISO 9001:2008 certified company
C. Field Samples
The sensor system is well proven in the field and has been installed and
operating in similar configurations. References can be provided for a minimum
of three operational sites.

D. Cybersecurity and Data Controls

1. System controller has documented testing against known CVE / CVSS
vulnerabilities
2. Windows based systems require authentication and authorization for
access and maintains audit trail for access and configuration
modifications
3. Windows based system controller shall contain ISO/IEC 11889 Trusted
Platform Module v2.0.
E. Privacy and Data Integrity

1. Client-server communication will be encrypted with 256-bit Rijndael
symmetric key
2. System data will remain local and will not contain mechanisms to transmit
data outside LAN environment (i.e. cloud, vendor data center etc.).
Delivery, Storage and handling

A. Delivery
Equipment system should arrive in the manufacturer’s original,
unopened, undamaged container with identification labels intact.
B. Shipping and Storage Temperatures

Ship and store the system (protected from mechanical and environmental
conditions) as designated by the manufacturer and in a temperature
environment as follows:
1. Head-end equipment: -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)
2. Fiber optic cable: -30°C to +70°C (-22°F to +158°F)
Site Conditions
A. Environmental
1. Normal Operating Temperatures

i. The sensor cable/s operates at temperatures between
-30°C to +70°C (-22°F to +158°F)
ii. The installed controller operates at temperatures between
5°C to +45°C (41°F to +113°F)
2. Sensor Operation in Frozen Conditions (-30°C/-22°F)

Sensor condition will not be impaired at temperatures within the range
of -30°C to +70°C (-22°F to +158°F). The freezing of the sensor cable
and/or fence will not cause degradation or damage to the sensing
cable/s. An optional cable is available that will operate from -55°C to
+85°C (-67°F to 185°F) for areas of extreme cold.

3. Humidity
The head end equipment operates in the relative humidity range of
5% to 80%, non-condensing.
4. Operation in Areas of High Moisture Content

The sensor cables and any underground connections will be
impervious to water ingress and degradation for a minimum of 20
years. The system will operate within specifications in water-saturated
environments when installed to the manufacturers’ specifications.
5. Terrain
The detection field is not limited to flat terrain or line-of-sight
operation. The system operates within specifications over uneven
terrain with a maximum grade change of 45% within 1 meter/3.3 feet,
and around corners with a minimum bend radius of 1 meter/3.3 feet.
B. Power requirements
1. The sensing controller requires an input voltage of 110 to 240 Vac, and
a power consumption of 280 W typical, 380 W max.
2. Connection to standard 110/240 Vac commercial power is supplied.
3. System should include a UPS or battery backup capable of sustaining
the system for a minimum of 20 minutes.
Warranty
The product warranty is 24 months from date of purchase and an ongoing
warranty extension program is available for the life of the product. Additionally,
the supplier will provide technical support and warrant that spare parts and
assemblies will be available for a minimum of five years after installation.
PRODUCT
Manufacturer
Model: FFT Aura Ai
Head Office: US Office:
Future Fibre Technologies Future Fibre Technologies
Limited (US) Inc.
10 Hartnett Close, Mulgrave 800 West El Camino Real,
Suite 180
Victoria 3170 Mountain View CA 94040
Australia USA
Phone: +61 3 9590 3100 Toll Free: +1 877 650 8900
Fax: +61 3 9560 8000 Outside USA: +1 650 903
2222
Fax: +1 435 417 6671

System components
A. Field Components
The system requires no mechanical, electrical or electronic components,
or electrical power in the field.
1. Fiber optic Sensor Cable

The system’s sensing element is an outdoor-grade fiber optic cable,
rated for aerial and duct installations according to accepted industry
standards
The outer jacket of the cable is made of black UV-resistant PVC and
carries length identification markings
The internal cable construction includes water-blocking materials, an
insect resistant nylon jacket, and non-metallic re-enforcement structures
such as strength members
The fiber optic sensor cable includes communication-grade central loose
tube single-mode optical fibers
At least one (1) fiber in one (1) tube should be reserved for the system
Remaining fibers in the cable may be used as spares for other
communication purposes
Optical loss of individual fibers is less than 0.25 dB/km @ 1550 nm
The sensor cable has a nominal lifetime of 20 years and includes no
conductive elements
The sensor cable will meet, as a minimum, the following additional
parameters:
Minimum Bend Radius:
Installation – 17 cm (6.69‘’)
Operation – 8.5 cm (3.35’’)
Maximum Pulling Tension – 1 kN
Crush Resistance – 2 kN/100 mm
2. Sensor Termination Modules and Enclosures

Sensor termination modules are to be used at the end of the fiber optic
sensor cable
The termination modules will utilize passive fiber optic components only
and utilize no electrical power
The termination components will be sealed inside outdoor-rated
fiber optic splice enclosure(s)
All fiber connections are to be permanent fusion splice connections

3. Installation hardware
Termination components are to be sealed inside outdoor-rated
fiber optic splice enclosure(s)
B. Head-end Components
1. Head-end components suit a standard 19” (48.3 cm) wide rack, where:
Mounting should be a minimum of 12” (30.5 cm) above floor level
Components should consume no more than 5 RU of vertical rack space,
including cable termination and user interface modules
The rack is to have at least 25” (63.5 cm) depth clearance with rear
access for module interconnects and unimpeded air circulation
The rack should have at least 2” (5.1 cm) of clearance in front of the
mounting rails
2. Head-end components include the following:

Sensor controller module – consists of optical components, contained in
transmitter and receiver modules
All optical components to be either fiber-based or sealed fiber-pigtailed
devices
The sensor controller module incorporates a Class 1 infra-red laser,
operating at 1550 nm
Fiber optic input and output connectors are to be SC/APC type
Auxiliary components
Fiber optic patch panel/splice tray, capable of supporting a minimum of
twelve (12) fiber optic splices
3. System Software
Initial configuration and calibration requires the use of a laptop/PC,
however normal operation utilizes an interface to FFT CAMS™ (or
acceptable third-party device or integration). There are currently more
than 60 integrations via TCP/IP and FFT CAMS to physical/information
security, video and access control management systems, cameras, relay
modules, other security devices and data interfaces.
Software is used as outlined to achieve the following functionality:
Sensing Controller
1. Sensor signal processing and analysis
2. Event detection and alarm generation

3. Alarms are generated upon the occurrence of a sensed “intrusion

event”. Such events are determined by the changes in optical signal
resulting from minute motion of the optical fibers within the sensor
cable
4. Event and alarm logging
5. Adjustment of detection parameters
6. Monitoring of the operating status of system components
7. Password login for configuration of device
8. Security Management Interface
i. Detection area definition and zone configuration
· Secure system access
· Provide at least three access levels:
· Operator level for routine operation
· Supervisor level for advanced system monitoring,
configuration, and troubleshooting
· Administrator level for advanced configuration and
troubleshooting
9. Hardware Monitoring and Control
i. Ability to alert local and remote operators of any detected system
component failure
10. Alarms
i. Software highlights the affected area
ii. Alarm Management
· Software will display complete information on all alarms until the alarm
is cleared by a local or remote operator. Information is then compiled
in a log
· If not manually cleared, once the number of alarms reaches the
configurable threshold (maximum 2000 alarms), alarms auto-
acknowledge, with alarm information compiled in a log
· Until cleared, alarm information is compiled in an expandable list,
which can display the following via pop-up panel:
o time label
o event duration
o event status
o event strength
o event area location
· Operator can:
o select any of the alarms from the table

o enter text notes regarding the cause of the alarm and the mitigation
measures
o clear the alarm
· Event Log
o The system maintains and displays an event log, including alarms,
system notifications, and user actions
o Operator notes as well as the alarm clearing event are to be recorded in
the event log
iii. Graphical Alarm Display
· Incorporate an image depicting the protected site with a schematic
perimeter overlay
· Subject to availability, the site image should be one of:
o satellite photo
o aerial photo
o map
o schematic
iv. Annunciation of each new alarm is via:
· flashing notification message
· area location marker displayed on the site image
Accessories
Refer to section 2.2-C for description of manufacturer offered software, FFT
CAMS™.
FFT CAMS™ has the following minimum requirements for:
PC Virtual Machine
Intel Core i5 or better CPU 4 CPU cores
8 GB memory 8 GB allocated memory
512 MB video card 512 MB allocated video card
500 GB HDD with 100 GB 160 GB separate HDD per

free space instance
DVDRW drive -
English language version of either Windows 7 Ultimate (or later) in 32

bit or 64 bit versions, or Windows Server 2008 R2 and above
100Base-T LAN interface

EXECUTION
Installers
The contractor’s installers and technicians will install, service and maintain the
system in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s recommended
procedures.
Examination
The contractor’s installers and technicians should perform a site check to ensure
appropriate environmental (see 1.7) and installation conditions are in
accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s recommended procedures.
Installation
A. Fiber Optic Sensor Layout Limits
1. Maximum total length of the fiber optic sensor cable per channel is
40 km (24.85 miles)
2. High security installations utilizing more aggressive sensor cable patterns
will have the maximum effective length of the protected perimeter
reduced
3. Total optical loss for each channel must not exceed 11 dB @1550 nm
B. Sensor Cable Installation
1. Chain-link Fence Requirements
i. Clearance area to be at least 3 m (10 feet) wide on each side of the
fence
ii. Fence signage to be reduced to the regulated minimum and securely
attached to fence posts
iii. Gates to be secured in closed position to eliminate any free movement
iv. Gates remaining open for extended periods of time should be secured
in the open position
v. Chain-link fence recommended for optimal fiber optic sensor
performance should have:
· Aluminum-oxide coated 9-gauge steel wire fabric, tensioned to
1000 lb (453.6 kg)
· Bottom rail with fabric twisted ends extending below it
· No top rails
· No intermediate-height rails in run sections
· Reinforcement rails in brace sections installed at ¾ height
· Fabric attached to posts and rails using 9-gauge galvanized steel
wire ties at least every 15” (5.1 cm)
· 7-gauge hardened galvanized steel tension wire installed 6” to 8”
(15.2 to 20.3 cm) below the top of the fabric

· Intermediate-height tension wire(s) recommended

· Fabric attached to tension wire(s) using 12-gauge galvanized steel
wires ties at least every 15” (5.1 cm)
· No aluminum wire ties and no hog rings
· Welded barb wire outriggers
vi. Chain-link fence should pass the following fabric tension test
· Apply 50 lb (22.7 kg) force pushing on the fence fabric at the
mid-point of the section
· Apply 50 lb (22.7 kg) force pulling on the fence fabric at the mid-
point of the section
· Total range of fabric deflection shouldn’t exceed 4” (10.2 cm)
· The test should be repeated for at least 10 representative locations
and for all suspect fence sections
2. Fiber Optic Sensor Cable Mounting
i. Sensor cable positioning
· The positioning of the sensor cable on the fence depends on the fence
type, trim, height, and condition
· Mounting on the top barbs of fences or on concertina wire is not
recommended in areas with birds
· Specific recommendations will be made following the site survey
· Unless otherwise specified, the following applies:
· The cable is to be mounted along the secure side of the fence
· As a minimum, the cable is to be mounted in a single straight horizontal
line along fence fabric, and up and down each post
· The height of the cable to be in the middle of the fence fabric
· A minimum bend radius of 17 cm (6.69”) should be maintained on all
cable turns
· Special cable patterns should be used around fence corners and brace
posts for added sensitivity
ii. Sensor cable attachment
· The sensor cable should be attached directly to the fence fabric
· The cable should be attached under manual tension
· The cable should be tied to the fence at wire crossing points
· The cable should be tied using standard cable ties
· Unless otherwise specified, the cable is to be tied to the fence fabric at
least every 12” (30 cm)

iii. Cable ties

Depending on the prevailing local weather conditions and/or security
requirements, one of the following two types of cable ties can be used
for cable attachment:
· 3/16” (4.8 mm) wide stainless steel cable ties
· 3/16” (4.8 mm) wide UV-stabilized nylon 12 cable ties
3. Gate Bypass
i. A gate mounted sensing cable is capable of monitoring swinging or
sliding gates to detect intruders climbing or cutting through the gate
ii. The gate can be configured (if required) as a separate zone that can
be armed and disarmed in isolation from the fence so that opening
and closing it does not cause unwanted alarms
4. Building Bypass
i. In the situations where the fence line is interrupted by a building or
other such structure, the sensor cable can be routed around or
through the obstacle in one of the following ways:
· Buried at the foot of the structure
· Securely attached to and around the side or over the top of the
structure. Subject to factory approval
· Routed through the structure and securely attached inside.
Subject to factory approval
5. Fiber Optic Sensor Termination
i. Termination enclosure(s) to be mounted in a safe location inside the
protected area
ii. Termination enclosure(s) to be mounted next to a fence post and
secured to the fence fabric, or buried near the base of the fence
iii. If mounted on the fence, the bottom of termination enclosure is to be
at least 12” (30.5 cm) above ground
iv. Termination enclosures only ever to be opened by factory-trained and
certified personnel
C. Head-end Equipment
Installation should be performed in accordance with standard procedures
available from the manufacturer, unless the manufacturer or a manufacturer
certified technician have consulted otherwise due to special circumstances.
D. System Software
The integration of a site image requires a detailed mapping of the perimeter,
performed at the time of system installation and calibration.

Field quality assurance

A. Commissioning
1. Acceptance tests should be performed in accordance with standard
procedures available from the manufacturer, to ensure the system
operates to manufacturer’s specifications.
2. Testing procedures should match the security level of the installation,
which should match the facility’s security level requirements.
Inappropriate testing (for the security level or procedures) and test results
not documented or approved by the manufacturer for the installation, will
be disregarded.
B. Recalibration
The system does not require periodic recalibration after installation acceptance.
However, an optional maintenance program is available to ensure optimum
system performance and reliability.
PART V SCHEDULE OF INFORMATION

Technical information to be submitted with Tender.
1. NETWORK CABINET
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED

2. ETHERNET SWITCH
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED
3. CABLING
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED

4. COPPER PATCH PANEL
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED
5. fibre optic patch panel
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED

6. CCTV SYSTEM
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED
7. MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED

8. fixed dome camera
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED
9. fixed bullEt camera
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED

10. fixed fisheye camera
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED
11. Network video recorder
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED

12. CCTV WORKSTATION
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED
13. VIDEO WALL
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED

14. CCTV STORAGE
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED
15. PERIMETER FENCE MONITORING SENSOR CABLE
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED

16. PERIMETER FENCE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROLLER
MANUFACTURER
TYPE AND MODEL
COMPLY WITH MINIMUM

(YES/NO)
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(YES/NO)
SHEETS INCLUDED

Section V- Employer’s Requirements 188
VOLUME 4: SECURITY OUTER PERIMETER FENCE

CONTENTS
OPF 1. SPECIFICATION FOR A SECURITY OUTER PERIMETER FENCE ................ 189
OPF 1.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................ 189

OPF 1.2 Standard Fencing Specifications ................................................................................... 189
OPF 1.2.1 Posts ................................................................................................................ 189
OPF 1.3 Covering Plate .............................................................................................................. 189
OPF 1.4 Top Rail........................................................................................................................ 189
OPF 1.5 Fixing Accessories ........................................................................................................ 190
OPF 1.6 Mesh panels .................................................................................................................. 190
OPF 1.7 Normative References ................................................................................................... 190
OPF 1.8 Raw Material ................................................................................................................ 191
OPF 1.9 Barbed Tape Concertina Coil ........................................................................................ 191
OPF 1.10 Gates – Manual sliding gates......................................................................................... 192
OPF 1.11 PVC Coating................................................................................................................. 192
OPF 1.12 PVC Coating Process .................................................................................................... 192
OPF 1.13 Installation .................................................................................................................... 192
OPF 1.14 Warrantees .................................................................................................................... 193
OPF 1.15 Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 193

OPF 1. SPECIFICATION FOR A SECURITY OUTER PERIMETER FENCE
OPF 1.1 Scope
- 4.5m bowed welded mesh security outer fence

- Gates
The product specified, is a high security fence from Betafence with a local footprint. The
material for the fence shall be free issued from the client complete with installation manuals
and drawings. The contractor installing the fence must however be certified to install
the fence and provide the required guarantees as set out in this document.
OPF 1.2 Standard Fencing Specifications
OPF 1.2.1 Posts
Curved 101.6mm diameter x 4.5mm wall thickness, Grade W300 Hot Dip Galvanized and
PVC coated Tubular Posts to radius specified with 3mm capping plate. Posts have predrilled
11mm diameter holes for M8 bolts to fit cover plate to posts. Posts to be positioned in Class
6, 103mm ID PVC x 2.58mm wall thickness x 1500mm long sleeves set in concrete
foundation.
OPF 1.3 Covering Plate
Cover plate required on all curved posts from ground to top of posts 50mm x 5mm flat iron
steel required, with predrilled 11mm for fixing mesh to posts. Grade W300 Hot Dip
Galvanized and PVC coated.
OPF 1.4 Top Rail
Equal angle iron profile 50mm x 50mm x 5mm, with predrilled holes before galvanizing.
The top rail to include flatiron profile cover plate 50mm x 5mm x fix razor tape to top rail.
Graded W300 Hot Dip Galvanized and PVC coated.
Razor wire
· 2.5mm² Stainless Steel Concertina Razor Wire Coil fixed to top rail with approved
clips, 5 clips per coil.
The posts, cover plate and top rails are after welding subsequently PVC coated and the layer
has a minimum thickness of 200 µm.

OPF 1.5 Fixing Accessories
The fixing of the cover-plate and mesh to posts shall be achieved with the following
accessories:
- M8 x 150mm cup square bolts – Stainless steel grade 316.
- M8 x 25mm x 2mm washers, Stainless steel grade 316
- M8 shear nuts – Stainless steel grade 316
The fixing of the top section of the mesh to the top rail shall be achieved with the following
accessories:
- M8 x 40mm cup square bolts – Stainless steel grade 316.
- M8 x 25mm x 2mm washers, Stainless steel grade 316
- M8 shear nuts – Stainless steel grade 316
OPF 1.6 Mesh panels
4mm Dublo welded mesh panels shall comply with the following specification:
Aperture: 76.2mm x 12.7mm
Wire dia: 4mm ± 0.05mm
Double vertical wires up to 3.0m
Tensile strength of wire: 600 – 750mmN/mm²
Weld strength: 50-70%
Weight: 10.92kg/m²
Solidity: 35%
Width of panel: 3050mm
Vertical heicht of panel: 4497mm
Coating: Zincalu super
The panels are after welding subsequently PVC coated and the layer has a minimum
thickness of 200µm. (See PVC coating specification)
OPF 1.7 Normative References
- AS 2423 (Australian Standard): Coated steel wire fencing products for terrestrial, aquatic
and general use.
- ASTM F 2453: Standard Specification for welded wire mesh fence fabric (Metal-coated
or Polymer coated) for meshes of 6 in ². (3871mm²) or less, in panels or rolls, with uniform
meshes.

- ASTM A 856: Standard Specification for Zinc-5% aluminum-mischmetal alloy – Coated

carbon steel wire.
- ASTM B 750: Standard Specification for 5 for Zinc-5% aluminum-mischmetal alloy in

ingot form for hot dip coatings.
- EN 10016-2: Non-alloy steel rod for drawing and/or cold rolling,
- EN 10223-7: Steel wire and wire products for fences – Part 7: Steel wire welded panels
for fencing
- EN 10244-2: Steel wire and wire products – Non-ferrous metallic coatings on steel wire
– Part 2: Zinc or zinc-alloy coatings on steel wire.
- EN 10245-2: Steel wires and wire products / organic coatings on steel wire part 2: PVC
finished wire.
OPF 1.8 Raw Material
Wire rod.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
ELEMENT %
C ≤ 0.10
Si ≤ 0.30
Mn ≤ 0.60
P ≤ 0.035
S ≤ 0.035
OPF 1.9 Barbed Tape Concertina Coil
Diameter: 730mm
Wire: 2.4m – Stainless steel grade 304
Tape: 0.5mm – Stainless steel grade 304
Loops: 56 loops per coil, 5 clips
Barb: Medium barb
Maximum stretch: 10m
The fixing of the barbed tape concertina shall be achieved by clamping the barbed tape
concertina with the flat bar to the top rail with the following accessories:
- M8 x 40mm cup square bolts – Stainless steel grade 316
- M8 x 25mm x 2mm washers – Stainless steel grade 316
- M8 nuts – Stainless steel grade 316

OPF 1.10 Gates – Manual sliding gates
The gate frame shall be constructed of 60 x 40 x 2mm rectangular tube and hot dip
galvanized. Each gate must consist of 2 leafs of the same size.
The gate shall have the same cladding with mesh as that of the fence.
The gap between the bottom of the gate and the road surface shall not be more than 50mm.
For detail of the construction of the gate, closing frame and side panels refer to detail
drawings.
The gate frames are after welding hot dip galvanized and subsequently PVC coated, and the
layer has a minimum thickness of 125µm.
OPF 1.11 PVC Coating
PVC is synthetic plastic commonly used to finish metal parts, tools and structural
components. It is available in a range of different colours and is highly chemically stable,
flexible, easy to sterilized and resistant to high temperatures.
OPF 1.12 PVC Coating Process
Process:
- Cleaning the parts to remove contaminants, improve adherence and prevent corrosion
- Priming and flash drying bake on the adhesive
- Dipping the heated part in the liquidized PVC and immersing it for a specified amount of
time, according to the desired thickness.
- Curing the parts in a special oven to complete the fusion process
- Cooling the finished product.
Only PVC heated coating products will be accepted. No Polyester/Powder coated products
will be accepted.
OPF 1.13 Installation
The erection of the fence must be done by a manufacturer certified installer. The
installation shall carry a full workmanship warranty of 10 years.
The certified installer shall make use of a local Namibian registered subcontractor and
transfer skills during the process and make sure the local subcontractor is registered as
a certified Betafence installer on completion of the product.

OPF 1.14 Warrantees
A manufacturers warrantee is to be issued on completion of the project before handover.

- 10 year Anti Corrosion on all fencing elements
- 10 year Workmanship on the full installation
OPF 1.15 Maintenance
The installer shall submit a full and detailed maintenance manual before handover of the
project certified by the manufacturer.
This will enable the client to fulfill the maintenance procedures to keep the warrantees in
place.
The manual shall also indicate prove required that maintenance is done as required to keep
the warrantee in place.

DRAWINGS
A book of drawings will be issued together with the bid documents and will consist of A3 size drawings
not to scale for bidding purposes. Once the successful Bidder is appointed, 3 sets of complete, to scale
A1 drawings will be issued for construction purposes.
TABLE OF DRAWINGS
Drawing No Description Status Rev No
P824505-C-00 Site Locality Layout Bidding B
P824505-Site-00 Site Layout Bidding B
P824505-CG-00 Setting Out and Installation Detail Bidding B
P824505-CG-01 Earthworks Layout Bidding B
P824505-CA-00 Guardhouse Renovations Layout Bidding B
P824505-ELSP-01 Electronic Site Plan Bidding B

Section VI- Bill of Quantities 195
Section VI – Bill of Quantities

PREAMBLE TO THE BILL OF QUANTITIES
1. This Bill of Quantities forms part of, and must be read in conjunction with the Instructions to Bidders,
the General and Special Conditions of Contract, the Particular Specifications and the Drawings. The
Price Summary is to reflect the total price carried forward from the Bill of Quantities, which itself need
not be submitted with the bidding documents.
2. No alteration, erasure or addition is to be made in the text of the Bill of Quantities. Should any erasure
or addition be made it will not be recognised but the original wording of the Bill of Quantities will be
adhered to.
3. The quantities in the Bill of Quantities are not to be considered as limiting or extending the amount of
work to be done and materials to be supplied.
4. Only major Items have been scheduled but the Bidder shall nevertheless include for all things he considers
necessary whether specified in detail or not to complete the work to specification.
No extra price will be considered for the provision of material or labour which should have been allowed
for in order to provide the completed works unless set out in detail and submitted separately by the Bidder
with his bid.
5. The completed Bill of Quantities shall detail the unit rate and total amount for material and labour
respectively for each Item. Bidders are advised to check their Item extensions and total additions since
no claim for mathematical errors will be considered.
6. All Items are deemed to include supply, delivery, installation and connection where appropriate, unless
specifically stated otherwise. The unit rate must include for all things necessary, whether specified in
detail or not, including all components, small installation materials, allowance for off-cuts, wastage, etc.
erection and fixings to complete the Item to the Particular Specifications and the Drawings in a
satisfactory and workmanlike manner in order to provide a complete and working system.
"Material Rate" shall include the supply and delivery of all items of material and equipment (plant) to the
site including all incidentals necessary for the completion of each Item, plus the profit but shall exclude
VAT which shall be added as a separate item in the Price Summary.
"Labour Rate" shall include the cost of all labour, both skilled and unskilled, including supervision and
profit required to complete the installation of all material covered by each item but shall exclude VAT
which shall be added as a separate item in the Price Summary.
“Rate” shall include “Material Rate” plus “Labour Rate”
7. A price or rate is to be entered against each item in the Bill of Quantities, whether the quantities are stated
or not. Any item against which no price is entered will be considered to have a price rate of N$ 0.00. It
will be accepted that items against which no price has been entered are covered by other prices or rates
in the Bill of Quantities.
8. The completed Bill of Quantities will be checked and the right is reserved to adjust any individual price
and to rectify any discrepancy. In the event of any arithmetical errors occurring in the totals in this Bill
of Quantities, such totals will be corrected on the assumption that the rates quoted are correct.

10. Unless stated to the contrary in the Particular Specifications, quantities, with the exception of cable,
trenches, bedding and cover sand, and pole holes, will not be measured on site in which case the
successful Bidder shall, within 60 days of notification of acceptance of his bid, notify the project manager
in writing of any discrepancies between the drawings, the Particular Specifications and the quantities of
any Item in the Bill of Quantities, listing each such discrepancy in detail. Where it is agreed by the project
manager that any such claims are valid, the contract price will be adjusted accordingly. No further claim
will be entertained except where the Employer changes the requirements of the Contract, in which case
such variations will be based on unit prices provided, where applicable.
11. Where alternative prices for equipment of different manufacture are offered, the lowest alternative price
for equipment to specification must be included, against the relevant Item in the Bill of Quantities. The
remaining alternative prices must be furnished separately.
Where such equipment is found not to comply with the Specification, the Contractor will be required to
provide equipment which does comply, without adjustment to the price in the Bill of Quantities.
12. In certain instances prices are requested for Items which may be required during the progress of the work,
but which are not included in the known quantities of material required. These Items are indicated by the
designation "R/O" (rate only) in the "Quantity" column, and the price is to be noted in the "Rate" columns
only and must not be carried forward.
13. The Bidder must price and extend each item and total of each Section in the Bill of Quantities in BLACK
INK.
14. No correction fluids may be used when completing the Bill of Quantities. All mistakes should be
strikethrough with a black pen and the corrected rate must be indicated above the correction in the Bill
of Quantities. The Bidder must initialize adjacent to any correction made on the Bill of Quantities.

LOT 1: CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

PART 1 : PRELIMINARY & GENERAL
ITEM PAYMENT DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE AMOUNT
NO N$ c
PART 1 SANS SECTION 1 : PRELIMINARY AND

1200 A GENERAL
8.3 FIXED-CHARGE ITEMS
1.1.1 8.3.1 Contractual Requirements Sum
8.3.2 Establish Facilities on the Site :
8.3.2.1 Facilities for Engineer
1.1.2 c) Nameboards (2 No. ONE SIDED) Sum
8.3.2.2 Facilities for Contractor
1.1.3 Offices and storage sheds Sum
1.1.4 Workshops Sum
1.1.5 Ablution and latrine facilities Sum
1.1.6 Tools and equipment Sum
1.1.7 Water supplies, electric power and

communications Sum
1.1.8 Access (Subclause 5.8) Sum
1.1.9 8.3.3 Other fixed-charge obligations Sum
1.1.10 8.3.4 Remove Contractor's Site establishment

on completion Sum
TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD

198

NO N$ c
BROUGHT FORWARD
8.4 TIME-RELATED ITEMS
1.1.11 8.4.1 Contractual Requirements Sum
8.4.2 Operate and maintain facilities on the

Site:
8.4.2.2 b) Facilities for Contractor for duration of

construction, except where otherwise
stated
1.1.12 Offices and storage sheds Sum
1.1.13 Workshops Sum
1.1.14 Ablution and latrine facilities Sum
1.1.15 Tools and equipment Sum
1.1.16 Water supplies, electric power and

communications Sum
1.1.17 Access (Subclause 5.8) Sum
1.1.18 8.4.3 Supervision Sum
1.1.19 8.4.5 Other time-related obligations Sum


NO N$ c
BROUGHT FORWARD
8.5 SUMS STATED PROVISIONALLY BY

ENGINEER
(b) 1) For work done by the client or a

non-nominated subcontractor.
1.1.20 Control tests ordered by the Engineer P C Sum 1.00 40,000 00
1.1.21 "As Built" Drawings P C Sum 1.00 40,000 00
(b) 2) Overheads, charges and profit on

items 7.1.4 to 1.1.25 incl. above for:
1.1.22 Control tests (item 1.1.20) % 40,000.00
1.1.23 "As Built Drawings" (Item 1.1.21) % 40,000.00
8.8 TEMPORARY WORKS
8.8.4 Existing services
1.1.24 The use of equipment for detection Sum 1.00
1.1.25 Excavate by hand in soft material to

expose existing services m³ 20.00
1.1.26 Temporary protection of existing

services Sum 1.00
TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY


PART 2 : BULK EARTHWORKS
NO N$ c
PART 2 SANS SECTION 1 : EARTHWORKS

1200 DM (ROADS, SUBGRADE)
EARTHWORKS
CLEAR and GRUB
2.1.1 (a)(1) Clear and grub from all rubble and

vegetation complete with ant and plant
poisoning ha 4.00
8.3.3 TREATMENT OF ROADBED
2.1.2 (a)(1) 150mm Road-bed preparation and

compaction of material to minimum of
93% of modified AASHTO maximum
density m³ 5,908.00
8.3.4 CUT TO FILL, BORROW TO FILL
BULK EARTHWORKS: ROADS &

PLATFORM
2.1.3 Cut to Fill and compact to minmum 93%

Mod. AASHTO m³ 195.00
2.1.4 Cut to Spoil and level m³ 18,578.47
2.2 SABS SECTION 2 : SUBBASE

1200ME
SUB BASE COURSE
2.2.1 8.3.1. Construct a 150mm subbase layer with

varying widths with materials excavated
from designated borrow pits and
compacted to 95% Modified AASHTO. m³ 5,908.00


PART 3 : FENCE BUILDING WORKS
NO N$ c
2.1 SABS SECTION 1: EARTHWORKS

1200 DB
8.3.2 EXCAVATION
2.1.1 8.3.2(a) Excavate 1.2m wide and backfill in all

materials for t-footings. Place spoil
material in designated area as indicated
by engineer. (Contractor to allow for
dewatering if deemed necessary) m³ 1,255.00


PART 3 : FENCE BUILDING WORKS
NO N$ c
BROUGHT FORWARD
PART 3 SABS SECTION 2: CONCRETE STRUCTURE

1200 GA
8.2 FORMWORK
8.2.1 Rough :
2.2.1 Vertical to T-footing m² 1,992.00
8.2.1 Rough :
2.2.2 Vertical to Apron Edge m² 1660
8.1.2 REINFORCEMENT
High-tensile steel bars
2.2.3 8.1.2.2 a) Basic price t 75.50
8.4 CONCRETE
Supply, cast and finish 30MPa concrete

with a minimum 30% fly ash content to;
2.2.4 T-Footing & Apron m³ 628.00
2.2.5 Capping m³ 46.00
BRICK WORK
2.26 Supply and construct 40 MPa Rockface

Brick Wall 0.9m high above apron level
complete with brick piers as per drawing m² 785.00
MISCELLANEOUS
2.27 Supply 1.3m long uPVC Class 6 sleeve

with 103mmø ID and cast into T-Footing No. 277.00
as indicated on drawings


PART 4 : GUARD HOUSE BUILDING WORKS
NO N$ c
PART 4 SANS SECTION 1 : EARTHWORKS

1200 DA
EXCAVATION
8.3.2(a) Excavate in all materials for trenches

backfill, compact, and dispose of
surplus/unsuitable material within
freehaul distance for Foundations of
size:
4.1.1 750 x 250 mm Strip Foundations m³ 13.50
4.1.2 600 x 250 mm Strip Foundations in

surfacebed m³ 34.00


NO N$ c
BROUGHT FORWARD
4.2 SECTION 2: BUILDING WORKS
SANS CONCRETE
1200 GB
8.2.5 Supply, cast and finish 25 MPa mass

concrete with a minimum Fly Ash
content of 30% to:
4.2.1 750 x 250 mm Strip Foundations m³ 42.00
4.2.2 600 x 250 mm Strip Foundations in

surfacebed m³ 13.00
4.2.3 100mm Surface Bed m³ 4.50
8.2.8 MOVEMENT JOINTS
Provide and install construction joints

complete as detailed with jointex,
backing strip and polysulphide sealant
4.2.4 Joints m 102.00
8.2.6 UNFORMED CONCRETE SURFACE

FINISHES
4.2.5 Steel Float to surface beds complete

with hardener
m² 44.00 Rate Only
8.2.6 FLOORING
4.2.6 Supply and install tiles as per description

layout.
Allow for N$250/m² tile purchase price.
Labour rate to be included in rate. m² 44.00


NO N$ c
BROUGHT FORWARD
BRICK WORK
4.2.7 Supply and construct 40 MPa Rockface

Brick Plinth for 1 brick walls complete
with galvanized brickforce up to surface
bed level as per drawings complete with
2 x layers of bitumen paint on inside of
walls m² 15.70
4.2.8 Supply and construct 14 MPa Brick Plinth

for 1 brick walls complete with
galvanized brickforce up to surface bed
level as per drawings complete with 2 x
layers of bitumen paint on inside of walls m² 2.70
4.2.9 Supply and construct 7 MPa 1 brick walls

complete with galvanized brickforce up
to soffits of slabs and beams m² 68.40
4.2.10 Supply and construct 7 MPa 0.5 brick

walls complete with galvanized
brickforce up to soffits of slabs and
beams m² 38.30
DPC
4.2.11 Supply and install 250-micron DPC

between foundation and superstructures
- 1 brick walls m 25.40
4.2.12 Supply and install 250-micron DPC

between foundation and superstructures
- 0.5 brick walls m 15.50
4.2.13 Supply and install 250-micron DPC below

surface beds. Allow for a minimum of
300mm overlap, securely taped for
waterproofing. m² 44.00


NO N$ c
BROUGHT FORWARD
8.2.1 FORMWORK
8.2.1.c Supply, erect and maintain during

project, smooth off shutter finish ,
vertical and horizontal formwork,
complete with all struts and ties for:
(Degree of accuracy : 1)
4.2.14 Apron Edge m² 1.00
PLASTERING
4.2.15 20mm Smooth Steel float Plaster inside

of building at all heights m² 133.00
4.2.16 20mm Smooth Wood float Plaster

outside of building at all heights m² 90.00
ROOF CONSTRUCTION
4.2.17 Supply and construct roof complete with

all trusses, beams, rafters, struts,
bracing, purlins, brandering, wall plates,
ceiling board, roof covering, cornices,
ridges, flashings, bird proofing, gutters,
downpipes, insulation, fixings, bolts,
nuts, washers and nails Sum 1.00
PAINTING
PAINT TO BRICK AND CONCRETE

WORK
4.2.18 Paint outside of building using a raw

cement primer as undercoat, followed by
two layers of acrylic PVA. Color to
clients specification. m² 90.00
4.2.19 Paint inside of building using a raw

cement primer as undercoat, followed by
two layers of acrylic PVA. Color to
clients specification. m² 133.00


NO N$ c
BROUGHT FORWARD
DOORS, WINDOWS and GLAZING
Supply and install all doors and windows

as per details on the window and door
schedule on drawings compelte with
plasterbands.
Windows
4.2.20 (W1) 1500 x 900 Bronze coated

Alluminium Window with 6mm Double
Glazed Safety Glass No. 1.000
4.2.21 (W2) 900 x 1200 Bronze coated

4.2.22 (W3) 900 x 900 Bronze coated

4.2.23 (W4) 600 x 600 Bronze coated

Doors
4.2.24 (D1) 944 x 2100 Solid hardwood single

leaf door complete with standard
hardwood door frame, solid brass
hinges, cylinder lock and handle finish to
be sanded and painted with 1 coat wood
primer and 2 coats enamel No. 2.000
4.2.25 (D2) 762 x 2100 6 Panel hollow core

door complete with standard hardwood
door frame, solid brass hinges, cylinder
lock and handle finish to be sanded and
painted with 1 coat wood primer and 2
coats enamel No. 5.000


NO N$ c
BROUGHT FORWARD
PLUMBING and DRAINAGE
4.2.26 Supply and install all internal waterlines,

5litre undercounter geyser and drainage.
This rate shall inculde all fittings,
workmanship and any additional details
as per drawings Sum 1.00
SANITARY FITTINGS
Supply and install all sanitary fittings

complete as per detail
4.2.27 Small white vitreous china vanity hand

wash basin complete with 1 tap hole for
No. 211 x 1/2" basin pillar tap, CP, with
tapered flow straightener by Cobra. PVC
P-trap, waste, plug and chain, PB towel
ring, complete. No. 2.000
4.2.28 Toilet to be 'Hibiscus' White close

coupled washdown suite 772601
complete with white seat, trap, waste
valves, ceramic toilet roll holder, etc. No. 2.000
4.2.29 Supply and install Basin Zinc to kitchen

complete with small cupboard, all fittings
and finishes No. 1.000
4.2.30 400 x 600 x 4mm Mirror screwed to wall

above hwb. Screws fitted with CP domed
headed caps. (4 off screws) complete
with 400x400mm white porcelain tile
splash back No. 2.000


NO N$ c
BROUGHT FORWARD
DEMOLITIONS
4.2.31 Item 1: Remove existing front door and

brick up opening as per Elevation 3:
Demolitions on drw: P824505.CA.00. Sum 1.000
4.2.32 Item 2: Remove existing window, cut

away section of wall and make good to
fit new window as per Elevation 3:

4.2.34 Item 4: Demolish and remove existing

toilet, internal brick walls, remove
existing window, and brick up opening
as per Elevation 1: Demolitions on drw:
P824505.CA.00. Sum 1.000
4.2.35 Item 5: Remove existing zinc and make

good plumbing to fit new zinc as per
drw: P824505.CA.00. Sum 1.000


away section of wall and make good into
arch as per Elevation 1: Demolitions on
drw: P824505.CA.00. Sum 1.000
4.2.38 Item 8: Remove existing asbestos roof

structure complete and dispose off as
per enviromental conditions as indicated
on drw: P824505.CA.00. Sum 1.000
4.2.39 Item 9: Chip away all plaster inside and

outside building and make good for new
plaster as per n drw: P824505.CA.00. Sum 1.000


NO N$ c
BROUGHT FORWARD
4.2.40 Item 10: Cut away section of brickwork

to levels indicated to tie into new
structure levels as per drw:
P824505.CA.00. Sum 1.000
4.2.41 Item 11: Demolish and remove existing

surfacebed and make good to construct
new surfacebed. Sum 1.000


NO N$ c
BROUGHT FORWARD
MISCELLANEOUS
4.2.42 Supply and install corner desk complete

with finishes and trimmings, hardwood
top and minimum 8 drawers and 2
cupboards. Sum 1.000
4.2.43 Supply and install minimum 12 x storage

lockers with a storage capacity of
minimum 300w x 600h x 600d complete
with locking mechanism. Sum 1.000

SUMMARY OF SECTIONS
SECTION DESCRIPTION AMOUNT

N$ c
PART 1 PART 1 : PRELIMINARY & GENERAL
PART 2 PART 2 : BULK EARTHWORKS
PART 3 PART 3 : FENCE BUILDING WORKS
PART 4 PART 4 : GUARD HOUSE BUILDING WORKS
Sub-total
10% CONTINGENCIES
Sub-total
15 % VAT :
TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF SCHEDULES

LOT 2: ELECTRICAL WORKS

PART 1 : GENERAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY MATERIAL LABOUR TOTAL AMOUNT
NO RATE RATE RATE $ c
PART 1 SECTION 1 : GENERAL
Tenderers shall allow for the

following items whatever cost they
may consider necessary for carrying
out and observance of the item:
1.1 Transport Sum 1
1.2 Site Establishment Sum 1
1.3 Setting Out Sum 1
1.4 Progress Meetings Sum 1
1.5 Attendance for measurement Sum 1
1.6 Site Supervision Sum 1
1.7 Insurance, Warranties Sum 1
1.8 Telephone, stationery etc. Sum 1
1.9 Tests and inspection prior to

completion. Sum 1
1.10 Submit As Built drawings to the

Engineers Sum 1
1.11 Arrangements and inspections with

ErongoRed Sum 1
Total Carried Forward To Summary


PART 2 : CIVIL WORK
PART 2 SECTION 2 : CIVIL WORK
Supply, deliver and installation of

sleeves including draw wire and
trenching back fill and compaction
2.1 - 110mm m 50
2.2 - 50mm m 50
Supply, deliver and installation of

long radius bends
2.3 - 110mm No 8
2.4 - 50mm No 8
2.5 Trenching in soft material for area

light cables complete including
backfill, warning tape and
compaction m 780


PART 3 : AREA LIGHTS
PART 3 SECTION 3 : AREA LIGHTS
Supply, delivery and installation of

1000V PVCSWAPVC cables:
3.1 a) 16mm² x 4C m 50
3.2 b) 10mm² x 4C m 820
3.3 c) 6mm² insulated copper earth m 820
Supply, delivery and installation of

termination units including clamps,
lugs, bolts, nuts, washers to
terminate the following cables: -
3.4 a) 16mm² x 4C No 2
3.5 b) 10mm² x 4C No 28
3.6 c) 6mm² insulated earth wire No 28
Supply delivery and installation of

reinforced area light poles complete
with 5A/SP/CB wiring.
3.7 a) 10,5m mounting height

No 14
3.8 Supply, deliver and install Thorn

bottom entry luminares No 14


PART 4 : GUARDHOUSE
PART 4 SECTION 4 : GUARDHOUSE
4.1 - Flush Wall mounted Enclosure

(DB-SEC) No 1
4.2 - 80A/TP isolator No 1
4.3 - 10-40A/TP/CB No 0
4.4 - 5-30A/SP/CB No 10
4.5 - 60A/DP earth leakage CB No 2
4.6 - 20A/TP contactor No 2
4.7 Supply and installation of flush

100 x 100 telephone/data points
complete with cover plates 25mm
conduit work, draw-wire
etc.excluding RJ11/RJ45 No 0
4.8 Supply and installation of tel/data

outlets in power skirting (excl
RJ11/RJ45) (craddle) No 2
4.9 Supply and installation of 16A single

socket outlets including 4mm² wiring
in power skirting No 8
Supply and installation of flush

socket outlet complete including
conduit, and 4mm² wiring
4.10 - DSO No 2
4.11 - SSO No 1
4.12 Supply and installation of flush 16A

red shaved earth double socket
outlet complete including 4mm²
wiring and conduit No 0
4.13 Supply and installation of 16A red

shaved earth single socket outlets in
power skirting including 4mm²
wiring No 0


PART 4 : GUARDHOUSE
Supply and installation of light
fittings as follows:
4.14 Type A No 2
4.15 Type B No 7
4.16 Type C No 4
4.17 Supply and installation of light point

complete including switch, conduit,
wiring and 5A socket No 12
4.18 Supply, deliver and install light point

complete including conduit, wiring
and switch No 0
4.19 Black on white etched treffolite

numbers fixed to front panel for
circuit breaker labelling Sum 1
4.20 Legend card complete with approved

holder and clear plastic cover fixed
to inside of DB door Sum 1
Supply and install new channel with

covers and fixings as following:
4.21 i) P8000 m 0
4.22 Supply and installation of three

compartment power skirting
complete including elbows and
endcaps m 8
Supply and installation of GS50 cable

basket complete with fixings:
4.23 i) 200 mm wide m 0
Supply and delivery and installation

of 1000V PVCSWAPVC cables
(copper)
4.24 - 16mm² x 4C m 80

of insulated copper earth wire
4.25 - 10mm² ICEW m 80


PART 4 : GUARDHOUSE
of stainless steel termination units
including mechanical clamps, lugs,
corrosion proof bolts, nuts, washers
etc. to terminate the following
cables:
4.26 - 16mm² x 4C No 2


PART 5 : MAINTENANCE
PART 5 SECTION 5 : MAINTENANCE
5.1 Cost for Earthing and bonding to

SANS 10142 Sum 1
5.2 Cost for all testing and

commissioning of the complete
installation Sum 1
5.3 Cost required for 12 months

maintenance including six visits to
site Sum 1

SUMMARY OF SECTIONS

N$ c
PART 1 PART 1 : GENERAL
PART 2 PART 2 : CIVIL WORK
PART 3 PART 3 : AREA LIGHTS
PART 4 PART 4 : GUARDHOUSE
PART 6 PART 5 : MAINTENANCE
Sub-total
15 % VAT :

LOT 3: ELECTRONIC WORKS

PART 1 : PRELIMINARY AND GENERAL
PART 1 SECTION 1 : PRELIMINARY AND
GENERAL

out and ovservance of the item:
1.1 General
1.1.1 Transport Sum 1
1.1.2 Site Establishment Sum 1
1.1.3 Setting Out Sum 1
1.1.4 Progress Meetings Sum 1
1.1.5 Attendance for measurement Sum 1
1.1.6 Site Supervision Sum 1
1.1.7 Insurance, Warranties Sum 1
1.1.8 Telephone, stationery etc. Sum 1
1.1.9 Tests and inspection prior to

completion. Sum 1
1.1.10 As-built drawings Sum 1
1.2 Maintenance and operation training

including manuals. Sum 1


PART 2 : CIVIL WORKS
PART 2 SECTION 2 : CIVIL WORKS
2.1 Brick joint pit for CCTV 300x300x600

complete with heavy duty cover No 9
2.2 Telephone/data manhole

800x800x800 with heavy duty
manhole cover No 7
2.3 Supply, delivery and installation of

uPVC sleeves class 6
2.3.1 50mm diameter m 100

slow bend cable entry
2.4.1 50mm diameter No 6
2.5 Trench in hard material for

power/data cables 600mm deep,
complete with warning tape, backfill
and compaction and removal of
surplus material m 840


PART 3 : POWER AND DATA CABLING
PART 3 SECTION 3 ; POWER AND DATA
CABLING
3.1 Supply, deliver, install of PVCPVC

1000V Cable complete with labelling.
3.1.1 2.5mm², 2 core m 0
3.1.2 4.0mm², 2 core m 0
3.1.3 6.0mm², 2 core m 0
3.1.4 10mm², 2 core m 621
3.1.5 2.5mm², 4 core m 0
3.1.6 4.0mm², 4 core m 0
3.1.7 6.0mm², 4 core m 0
3.1.8 10mm², 4 core m 0
3.2 Supply, deliver, install of

Green/Yellow Insulated Copper Earth
Wire (ICEW) complete with labelling.
3.2.1 6mm² m 621


PART 3 : POWER AND DATA CABLING
3.3 Supply, deliver and install of
Network Points complete with
labelling
3.3.1 CAT6 points from CCTV Field Cabinet

to CCTV Camera (10.5 meter
mounting height on high mast light
poles). No 32

to CCTV Camera (Mounted on
Gatehouse). No 5

to ANPR Camera (Mounted on Poles
at Gatehouse). No 2
3.3.4 Fiber optic 8 core from Server Room

to CCTV Field Cabinet No 5
3.3.5 Velcro Industrial ONE-WRAP Strap

20X330mm BLK Sum 1
3.3.6 LC to LC Ruggedized Multimode

Fiber Patch Leads No 12
3.3.7 CAT6 Patch Leads No 40
3.4 Supply, deliver and install of

additional Stainless Steel Conduit
work for CCTV Network Points. No 40


PART 4 : CCTV INSTALLATION
PART 4 SECTION 4 : CCTV INSTALLATION

CCTV management system including
all hardware, software and licenses No 1

CCTV 19" Rack Mount 64 channel
Network Video Recorder including all
hardware, software and licenses.
Minimum 6 months storage for
complete installation without motion
detection. No 1

CCTV Cameras designed for High-
Security application in High Corrosive
and UV Environment. All metal parts
shall be 316L Stainless Steel or
better.
4.3.1 Indoor, 4MP, Dome, Ceiling Mount

equivalent to HIKVision 4 MP
ColorVu Fixed Turret Network
Camera No 3
4.3.2 Indoor, 4MP, Dome, Wall Mount

equivalent to HIKVision 4 MP
ColorVu Fixed Turret Network
Camera No 0
4.3.3 Indoor, 6MP, Fisheye, 10m IR, WDR,

Ceiling Mount No 0
4.3.4 Outdoor IP67, 4MP, PoE Bullet, 30m

IR, Wall Mount equivalent to
HIKVision 4 MP ColorVu Fixed Bullet
Network Camera No 0

IR, Structure Mount equivalent to
Network Camera No 0

IR, Pole Mount equivalent to
Network Camera No 30


4.3.7 Outdoor IP66, Thermal Camera, Pole
Mount equivalent to HIKVision
Thermal & Optical Bi-spectrum
Network Stable PTZ Camera No 4
4.3.8 Outdoor IP66, ANPR Camera,

complete with mounting kit,
connection boxes and pole for
standalone mounting on concrete
plinth. All components shall be
ruggedized for harsh corrosive and
UV environments and shall be 316L
Stainless Steel or better. No 2
4.3.9 Outdoor IP66, 8MP, PTZ, 50m IR,

36x Zoom, Wall Mount equivalent to
Hikvision 8 MP 36x Network Outdoor
Laser Speed Dome No 0

36x Zoom, Structure Mount
equivalent to Hikvision 8 MP 36x
Network Outdoor Laser Speed Dome No 0

36x Zoom, Pole Mount equivalent to
Hikvision 8 MP 36x Network Outdoor
Laser Speed Dome No 0

25x Zoom, Wall Mount equivalent to
Hikvision 2 MP Outdoor 25×
DarkFighterX IR Network Speed
Dome No 0

25x Zoom, Structure Mount Mount
equivalent to Hikvision 2 MP Outdoor
25× DarkFighterX IR Network Speed
Dome No 0

25x Zoom, Pole Mount equivalent to
Hikvision 2 MP Outdoor 25×
DarkFighterX IR Network Speed
Dome No 4


the following equipment/components
complete with hardware, software,
licenses, wiring, labelling for the
Access Control Workstations
4.4.1 Workstations equiped with HEX 6-

way/6x HD/4K Display Ports
including 6x mDP to HDMI adapters No 1
4.4.2 TSVA MLE/ADV 4/T9V" U/LHED Flat

Smart Series 7 No 6

Network Cabinets complete with all
original manufacturer accessories
and labelling in Server room
4.5.1 27U Floor Standing 19" Rack Mount

Cabinet (800mm wide x 800mm
deep) including cooling fans, power
modules, etc. No 1
4.5.2 1U 19" Rack Mount Brush Panel No 4
4.5.3 1U 19" Rack Mount Blank Panel No 12
4.5.4 1U 19" Rack Mount 24 Port CAT-6

Patch Panel comepete with cable
management kit and labelling. No 1
4.5.5 1U 19" Rack Mount 24 Port LC Patch

Panel complete with LC Pigtails,
Fiber management kit and labelling. No 1
4.5.6 1U 24 port Cisco Catalyst C9200

PoE+ Switch with Layer 3
capabilities complete with -
all licenses
1x PSU modules
6x Duplex LC Multimode Fiber Inputs
19" Rack Mount Kit
No 1


Field Network Cabinets complete
with all original manufacturer
accessories and labelling on High
Mast Poles and Gatehouse
4.6.1 650x500x250mm 316L Stainless

Steel Lockable IP66 Panel complete
with Backplate, Din Rail, Slotted
trunking and switchgear (ABB), pole
mount kit, wiring and labelling No 5
4.6.2 Cisco Catalyst IE-3300 Managed

Layer 2 Swicth complete with -
all licenses incl. Network Essentials
PSU modules
2x Duplex LC Multimode Fiber Inputs
16x PoE+ Ports
Din Rail Mount Kit
No 5
4.6.3 8 port Fiber Optic Patch Panel, Din

Rail Mount, complete with pigtails,
fiber management kit, labelling and
LC Duplex Blanks on all ports No 5
4.6.4 16 port CAT Patch Panel, Din Rail

Mount, Complete with cable
management, labelling and RJ45
blanks on all ports No 5
4.7 Supply, Delivery and Installation of

5kVA UPS with 30 min Backup
equivalent to Eaton as approved by
the engineer. Complete with
connection Isolators and DB for
CCTV Installation. No 1
4.8 Configuration, setup and

commissioning of complete CCTV
System. Sum 1


PART 5 : PERIMETER FENCE MONITORING INSTALLATION
PART 5 SECTION 5 : PERIMETER FENCE
MONITORING INSTALLATION

the following hardware complete
with original accessories, wiring and
labelling for Perimeter Fence
Monitoring System.
5.1.1 FFT Aura Ai 10km (2 x 5km

channels), Part No. P702-2x5 No 1
5.1.2 FFT CAMS-3 Enterprise Edition (1

client plus 1 server) Software Only.
Requires a dedicated PC and
monitor., Part No. X822 No 1
5.1.3 Patchcord E2000 to SCA, 3m,

simplex, Part No. A076-5 No 2
5.1.4 12 Port rack mount optical patch

panel (12 loaded), Part No. A056 No 1
5.1.5 19" Rack Cabinet with cooling

system, PDU, Glass Front Door and
all equipment as required for
installation in Server Room No 1

the following field components
complete with original accessories,
wiring and labelling for Perimeter
Fence Monitoring System.
5.2.1 Aura End Element, Part No. A049 No 2
5.2.2 FFT 12 fiber sm central loose tube

sensor cable , Part No. P012 m 1,678
5.2.3 Nylon 12 UV Stabilised Cable Ties,

Part No. A099 No 6,000
5.2.4 24 fiber outdoor closures, Part No.

P051 No 3
5.2.5 Large Underground pits and lids,

Part No. A090 No 3


PART 5 : PERIMETER FENCE MONITORING INSTALLATION
5.2.6 FFT Prime Laser Scanner LMS142-
15100 Sensor – Black , Part No.
P750-0 No 2
5.2.7 FFT Prime Laser Scanner Pole/Wall

Mounting Kit, Part No. P750-1 No 2
5.2.8 FFT Prime Laser Scanner Weather

Hood (190 deg), Part No. P750-2 No 2
5.2.9 FFT Prime Cable Power, Part No.

P750-3 No 2
5.2.10 FFT Prime Cable Ethernet, Part No.

P750-4 No 2
5.2.11 24 Vdc 5 A Power Supply Option,

Part No. A069-6 No 2
5.2.12 Enclosure Only, IP65, Part No. A601-

3 No 2
5.2.13 Pole Mounting kit for IP65 Enclosure,

Part No. A601-4 No 2

the following items complete with
original accessories, wiring and
labelling for Perimeter Fence
Monitoring System.
5.3.1 Installation of FFT 12 fiber sm

central loose tube sensor cable ,
Part No. IPO 12 m 1,678
5.3.2 Installation of Gate Laser Scanner,

Part No. IP 750 No 2
5.3.3 Installation of Head Equipment, Part

No. IP 702 No 1
5.3.4 Fusion Splicing , Part No. FS No 48
5.4 Allowance for on-site inspection,

certification and training by
professional from the manufacturer
for the complete installation
including transport, accommodation
per diem and mobilization fees. Sum 1


PART 6 : TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE
PART 6 SECTION 6 : TESTING,
COMMISSIONING AND
MAINTENANCE
6.1 Cost required for all testing and

commissioning of the complete CCTV
installation including ancilliary
equipment. Sum 1
6.2 Cost required for all testing and

commissioning of the complete fence
monitoring installation including
ancilliary equipment. Sum 1
6.3 Cost required for the 12 months

maintenance period including
frequent inspections to site. Sum 1


PART 7 : UNSCHEDULED ITEMS
PART 7 SECTION 7 : UNSCHEDULED ITEMS
7.1 The tenderer to list any items that in

his mind are not covered above to
provide a "turn-key" and fully
functional installation. The items to
be priced on a lump sum basis.
7.1.1 Sum 1
7.1.2 Sum 1
7.1.3 Sum 1
7.1.4 Sum 1
7.1.5 Sum 1
7.1.6 Sum 1
7.1.7 Sum 1
7.1.8 Sum 1
7.1.9 Sum 1
7.1.10 Sum 1

SUMMARY OF SECTIONS

N$ c
PART 1 PART 1 : PRELIMINARY AND GENERAL
PART 2 PART 2 : CIVIL WORK
PART 3 PART 3 : POWER AND DATA CABLING
PART 4 PART 4 : CCTV INSTALLATION
PART 5 PART 5 : PERIMETER FENCE MONITORING

INSTALLATION
PART 6 PART 6 : TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE
PART 7 PART 7 : UNSCHEDULED ITEMS
Sub-total
10% CONTINGENCIES
Sub-total
15 % VAT :

LOT 4: HIGH SECURITY FENCE

PART 1 SECTION 1 : PRELIMINARY AND
GENERAL

out and ovservance of the item:
1.1 General
1.1.1 Transport Sum 1
1.1.2 Site Establishment Sum 1
1.1.3 Setting Out Sum 1
1.1.4 Progress Meetings Sum 1
1.1.5 Attendance for measurement Sum 1
1.1.6 Site Supervision Sum 1
1.1.7 Insurance, Warranties Sum 1
1.1.8 Telephone, stationery etc. Sum 1
1.1.9 Tests and inspection prior to

completion. Sum 1
1.1.10 As-built drawings Sum 1
1.2 Maintenance and operation training

including manuals. Sum 1

LOT 4: HIGH SECURITY FENCE

PART 2 SECTION 2 : FENCE INSTALLATION
2.1.1 Handle and install free issued

material for a 4.5m bowed welded
mesh security outer fence complete
with posts, mesh panels, top rails,
cover plates, bracings, diagonals and
all relevant required fittings and
finishes as per standard
specifications and manufacturers
details by Betafence. (This item
includes all items such as cast in
items, concrete works, fittings and
finishes deemed necessary to fully
complete the fence to manufacturers
specifications) m 830
2.1.2 Handle and install free issued

material for a 4.5m bowed welded
mesh security gates complete with
posts, mesh panels, top rails, cover
plates, bracings, diagonals and all
relevant required fittings and finishes
as per standard specifications and
manufacturers details by Betafence.
(This item includes all items such as
cast in items, concrete works,
fittings and finishes deemed
necessary to fully complete the gate
to manufacturers specifications) Sum 1
2.1.3 Contractor shall allow for all costs of

equipment, installation thereof,
tests, commissioning as required by
the Manufacturer, Beta Fence, to
certify and provide the 10 year
workmanship warrantee certification
on the Fence Installation. Sum 1
2.1.4 Contractor shall allow for all costs to

become a certified installer of Beta
Fence for both the maintenance of
the Fence Installation and for future
installations of the Beta Fence
Product range for the client. Sum 1

LOT 4: FENCE INSTALLATION
SUMMARY OF SECTIONS

N$ c
PART 1 PART 1 : PRELIMINARY AND GENERAL
PART 2 PART 2 : FENCE INSTALLATION
Sub-total
10% CONTINGENCIES
Sub-total
15 % VAT :

SUMMARY OF SECTIONS

N$ c
LOT 1 LOT 1 : CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS
LOT 2 LOT 2 : ELECTRICAL WORKS
LOT 3 LOT 3 : ELECTRONIC WORKS
LOT 4 LOT 4 : FENCE INSTALLATION
Sub-total
10% CONTINGENCIES
Sub-total
15 % VAT :

PART 3 – Conditions of Contract and

Contract Forms

Section VII- General Conditions of Contract 239
Section VII - General Conditions of Contract

(Section VII – Special Conditions of Contract also contained herein – Numbers F to J)
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 241
1. Definitions ................................................................................................................... 241

2. Interpretation .............................................................................................................. 242
3. Language and Law...................................................................................................... 243
4. Project Manager’s Decisions ...................................................................................... 243
5. Delegation .................................................................................................................... 243
6. Communications ......................................................................................................... 243
7. Subcontracting ............................................................................................................ 243
8. Other Contractors....................................................................................................... 243
9. Personnel and Equipment .......................................................................................... 243
10. Employer’s and Contractor’s Risk............................................................................. 243
11. Employer’s Risk .......................................................................................................... 244
12. Contractor’s Risk........................................................................................................ 244
13. Insurance ..................................................................................................................... 244
14. Site Data ...................................................................................................................... 245
15. Contractor to Construct the Works ........................................................................... 245
16. The Works to Be Completed by the Intended Completion Date ............................... 245
17. Approval by the Project Manager.............................................................................. 245
18. Safety ........................................................................................................................... 245
19. Discoveries ................................................................................................................... 245
20. Possession of the Site ................................................................................................... 245
21. Access to the Site ......................................................................................................... 245
22. Instructions ................................................................................................................. 246
23. Appointment of the Adjudicator ................................................................................ 246
24. Procedure for Disputes ............................................................................................... 246
B. Time Control ............................................................................................................... 247
25. Program ...................................................................................................................... 247

26. Extension of the Intended Completion Date .............................................................. 247
27. Acceleration................................................................................................................. 247
28. Delays Ordered by the Project Manager ................................................................... 247
29. Management Meetings ................................................................................................ 248
30. Early Warning .............................................................................................................. 248
C. Quality Control ........................................................................................................... 248
31. Identifying Defects ...................................................................................................... 248

32. Tests ............................................................................................................................. 248
33. Correction of Defects .................................................................................................. 248
34. Uncorrected Defects .................................................................................................... 248
D. Cost Control ................................................................................................................ 249
35. Contract Price ............................................................................................................. 249

36. Changes in the Contract Price.................................................................................... 249

37. Variations .................................................................................................................... 249

38. Cash Flow Forecasts ................................................................................................... 250
39. Payment Certificates ..................................................................................................... 250
40. Payments ..................................................................................................................... 250
41. Compensation Events ................................................................................................. 251
42. Tax ............................................................................................................................... 252
43. Currencies ................................................................................................................... 252
44. Price Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 252
45. Retention ..................................................................................................................... 252
46. Liquidated Damages ................................................................................................... 252
47. Bonus ........................................................................................................................... 253
48. Advance Payment ....................................................................................................... 253
49. Securities ..................................................................................................................... 253
50. Dayworks..................................................................................................................... 254
51. Cost of Repairs ............................................................................................................ 254
52. Labour Clause ............................................................................................................. 254
E. Finishing the Contract ................................................................................................ 255
53. Completion .................................................................................................................. 255

54. Taking Over ................................................................................................................ 255
55. Final Account .............................................................................................................. 255
56. Operating and Maintenance Manuals........................................................................ 255
57. Termination................................................................................................................. 256
58. Fraud and Corruption ................................................................................................ 256
59. Payment upon Termination........................................................................................ 257
60. Property ...................................................................................................................... 257
61. Release from Performance ......................................................................................... 257

A. General
1. Definitions
1.1 Boldface type is used to identify defined terms.

(a) The Accepted Contract Amount means the amount accepted in the Notification of award
for the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects.
(b) The Activity Schedule is a schedule of the activities comprising the construction,
installation, testing, and commissioning of the Works in a lump sum contract. It includes a
lump sum price for each activity.
(c) The Adjudicator is the person appointed jointly by the Employer and the Contractor to
resolve disputes in the first instance, as provided for in GCC 23.
(d) Bill of Quantities means the priced and completed Bill of Quantities forming part of the
Bid.
(e) Compensation Events are those defined in GCC Clause 41 hereunder.
(f) The Completion Date is the date of completion of the Works as certified by the Project
Manager, in accordance with GCC Sub-Clause 53.1.
(g) The Contract is the Contract between the Employer and the Contractor to execute,
complete, and maintain the Works. It consists of the documents listed in GCC Sub-Clause
2.3 below.
(h) The Contractor is the party whose Bid to carry out the Works has been accepted by the
Employer.
(i) The Contractor’s Bid is the completed bidding document submitted by the Contractor to
the Employer.
(j) The Contract Price is the Accepted Contract Amount stated in the Notification of award
and thereafter as adjusted in accordance with the Contract.
(k) Days are calendar days; months are calendar months unless otherwise stated.
(l) Dayworks are varied work inputs subject to payment on a time basis for the Contractor’s
employees and Equipment, in addition to payments for associated Materials and Plant.
(m) A Defect is any part of the Works not completed in accordance with the Contract.
(n) The Defects Liability Certificate is the certificate issued by Project Manager upon
correction of defects by the Contractor.
(o) The Defects Liability Period is the period named in the SCC pursuant to Sub-Clause 33.1
and calculated from the Completion Date.
(p) Adjudicator means the single person appointed under Clause 23.
(q) Drawings means the drawings of the Works, as included in the Contract, and any additional
and modified drawings issued by (or on behalf of) the Employer in accordance with the
Contract, include calculations and other information provided or approved by the Project
Manager for the execution of the Contract.
(r) The Employer is the party who employs the Contractor to carry out the Works, as specified
in the SCC.
(s) Equipment is the Contractor’s machinery and vehicles brought temporarily to the Site to
construct the Works.
(t) “In writing” or “written” means hand-written, type-written, printed or electronically made,
and resulting in a permanent record;
(u) The Initial Contract Price is the Contract Price listed in the Employer’s Notification of
award.
(v) The Intended Completion Date is the date on which it is intended that the Contractor shall
complete the Works. The Intended Completion Date is specified in the SCC. The Intended
Completion Date may be revised only by the Project Manager by issuing an extension of
time or an acceleration order.

(w) Materials are all supplies, including consumables, used by the Contractor for incorporation
in the Works.
(x) Plant is any integral part of the Works that shall have a mechanical, electrical, chemical, or
biological function.
(y) The Project Manager is the person named in the SCC (or any other competent person
appointed by the Employer and notified to the Contractor, to act in replacement of the
Project Manager) who is responsible for supervising the execution of the Works and
administering the Contract.
(z) SCC means Special Conditions of Contract
(aa) The Site is the area defined as such in the SCC.
(bb) Site Investigation Reports are those that were included in the bidding documents and are
factual and interpretative reports about the surface and subsurface conditions at the Site.
(cc) Specification means the Specification of the Works included in the Contract and any
modification or addition made or approved by the Project Manager.
(dd) The Start Date is given in the SCC. It is the latest date when the Contractor shall
commence execution of the Works. It does not necessarily coincide with any of the Site
Possession Dates.
(ee) A Subcontractor is a person or corporate body who has a Contract with the Contractor to
carry out a part of the work in the Contract, which includes work on the Site.
(ff) Temporary Works are works designed, constructed, installed, and removed by the
Contractor that are needed for construction or installation of the Works.
(gg) A Variation is an instruction given by the Project Manager which varies the Works.
(hh) The Works are what the Contract requires the Contractor to construct, install, and turn over
to the Employer, as defined in the SCC.
2. Interpretation
2.1 In interpreting these GCC, words indicating one gender include all genders. Words indicating the
singular also include the plural and words indicating the plural also include the singular. Headings
have no significance. Words have their normal meaning under the language of the Contract unless
specifically defined. The Project Manager shall provide instructions clarifying queries about these
GCC.
2.2 If sectional completion is specified in the SCC, references in the GCC to the Works, the
Completion Date, and the Intended Completion Date apply to any Section of the Works (other
than references to the Completion Date and Intended Completion Date for the whole of the
Works).
2.3 The documents forming the Contract shall be interpreted in the following order of priority:
(a) Agreement,
(b) Notification of award,
(c) Contractor’s Bid,
(d) Special Conditions of Contract,
(e) General Conditions of Contract,
(f) Specifications,
(g) Drawings,
(h) Bill of Quantities, and
(i) any other document listed in the SCC as forming part of the Contract.

3. Language and Law
3.1 The language of the Contract must be English and the law governing the Contract is the Law of
Namibia.
4. Project Manager’s Decisions
4.1 Except where otherwise specifically stated, the Project Manager shall decide contractual matters
between the Employer and the Contractor in the role representing the Employer.
5. Delegation
5.1 Otherwise specified in the SCC, the Project Manager may delegate any of his duties and
responsibilities to other people, except to the Adjudicator, after notifying the Contractor, and may
revoke any delegation after notifying the Contractor.
6. Communications
6.1 Communications between parties that are referred to in the Conditions shall be effective only when
in writing to the addresses specified in the SCC. A notice shall be effective only when it is
delivered.
7. Subcontracting
7.1 The Contractor may subcontract with the approval of the Project Manager, but may not assign the
Contract without the approval of the Employer in writing. Subcontracting shall not alter the
Contractor’s obligations.
8. Other Contractors
8.1 The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other contractors, public authorities,
utilities, and the Employer between the dates given in the Schedule of Other Contractors, as
referred to in the SCC. The Contractor shall also provide facilities and services for them as
described in the Schedule. The Employer may modify the Schedule of Other Contractors, and
shall notify the Contractor of any such modification.
9. Personnel and Equipment
9.1 The Contractor shall employ the key personnel and use the equipment identified in its Bid, to carry
out the Works or other personnel and equipment approved by the Project Manager. The Project
Manager shall approve any proposed replacement of key personnel and equipment only if their
relevant qualifications or characteristics are substantially equal to or better than those proposed in
the Bid.
9.2 If the Project Manager asks the Contractor to remove a person who is a member of the Contractor’s
staff or work force, stating the reasons, the Contractor shall ensure that the person leaves the Site
within seven days and has no further connection with the work in the Contract.
10. Employer’s and Contractor’s Risk
10.1 The Employer carries the risks which this Contract states are Employer’s risks, and the Contractor
carries the risks which this Contract states are Contractor’s risks.

11. Employer’s Risk
11.1 From the Start Date until the Defects Liability Certificate has been issued, the following are
Employer’s risks:
(a) The risk of personal injury, death, or loss of or damage to property (excluding the Works,
Plant, Materials, and Equipment), which are due to
i) use or occupation of the Site by the Works or for the purpose of the Works, which is
the unavoidable result of the Works or
ii) negligence, breach of statutory duty, or interference with any legal right by the
Employer or by any person employed by or contracted to him except the Contractor.
(b) The risk of damage to the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment to the extent that it is due
to a fault of the Employer or in the Employer’s design, or due to war or radioactive
contamination directly affecting the country where the Works are to be executed.
11.2 From the Completion Date until the Defects Liability Certificate has been issued, the risk of loss
of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials is an Employer’s risk except loss or damage due
to
(a) a Defect which existed on the Completion Date,
(b) an event occurring before the Completion Date, which was not itself an Employer’s risk, or
(c) the activities of the Contractor on the Site after the Completion Date.
12. Contractor’s Risk
12.1 From the Starting Date until the Defects Liability Certificate has been issued, the risks of personal
injury, death, and loss of or damage to property (including, without limitation, the Works, Plant,
Materials, and Equipment) which are not Employer’s risks, are Contractor’s risks.
13. Insurance
13.1 The Contractor shall provide, in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor, insurance
cover from the Start Date to the end of the Defects Liability Period, in the amounts and deductibles
stated in the SCC for the following events which are due to the Contractor’s risks:
(a) loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials;
(b) loss of or damage to Equipment;
(c) loss of or damage to property (except the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment) in
connection with the Contract; and
(d) personal injury or death.
13.2 Policies and certificates for insurance shall be delivered by the Contractor to the Project Manager
for the Project Manager’s approval within 21 days after issue of notification of award. All such
insurance shall provide for compensation to be payable in the types and proportions of currencies
required to rectify the loss or damage incurred.
13.3 If the Contractor does not provide any of the policies and certificates required, the Employer may
effect the insurance which the Contractor should have provided and recover the premiums the
Employer has paid from payments otherwise due to the Contractor or, if no payment is due, the
payment of the premiums shall be a debt due.
13.4 Alterations to the terms of insurance shall not be made without the approval of the Project
Manager.

13.5 Both parties shall comply with any conditions of the insurance policies.
13.6 The policies which are in the joint names of the Contractor and the Employer shall contain a clause
to include a waiver of subrogation of the Contractor's rights to the insurance carrier against the
Employer
14. Site Data
14.1 The Contractor shall be deemed to have examined any Site Data referred to in the SCC,
supplemented by any information available to the Contractor.
15. Contractor to Construct the Works
15.1 The Contractor shall construct and install the Works in accordance with the Specifications and
Drawings.
16. The Works to Be Completed by the Intended Completion Date
16.1 The Contractor may commence execution of the Works on the Start Date and shall carry out the
Works in accordance with the Program submitted by the Contractor, as updated with the approval
of the Project Manager, and complete them by the Intended Completion Date.
17. Approval by the Project Manager
17.1 The Contractor shall submit Specifications and Drawings showing the proposed Temporary
Works to the Project Manager, for his approval.
17.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for design of Temporary Works.
17.3 The Project Manager’s approval shall not alter the Contractor’s responsibility for design of the
Temporary Works.
17.4 The Contractor shall obtain approval of third parties to the design of the Temporary Works, where
required.
17.5 All Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the execution of the temporary or permanent Works,
are subject to prior approval by the Project Manager before this use.
18. Safety
18.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all activities on the Site.
19. Discoveries
19.1 Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedly discovered on the Site
shall be the property of the Employer. The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager of such
discoveries and carry out the Project Manager’s instructions for dealing with them.
20. Possession of the Site
20.1 The Employer shall, after receiving the Performance security, the insurance covers and the
Program for the Works all as per requirements, give possession of all parts of the Site to the
Contractor within thirty days for execution of works in accordance to the Program for the Works.
If possession of a part is not given by the date stated in the SCC, the Employer shall be deemed
to have delayed the start of the relevant activities, and this shall be a Compensation Event.
21. Access to the Site

21.1 The Contractor shall allow the Project Manager and any person authorized by the Project Manager
access to the Site and to any place where work in connection with the Contract is being carried
out or is intended to be carried out.
22. Instructions
22.1 The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Project Manager which comply with the
applicable laws where the Site is located.
22.2 The Contractor shall permit persons appointed by the Employer to inspect the Site and/or the
accounts and records of the Contractor and its sub-contractors relating to the performance of the
Contract, and to have such accounts and records audited by auditors appointed by the Employer
if required by the Employer. The Contractor’s attention is drawn to Sub-Clause 57.1 which
provides, inter alia, that acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the inspection and audit
rights provided for under Sub-Clause 22.2 constitute a prohibited practice subject to contract
termination.
23. Appointment of the Adjudicator
23.1 The Adjudicator shall be appointed jointly by the Employer and the Contractor, at the time of the
Employer’s issuance of the Notification of award. If, in the notification of award, the Employer
does not agree on the appointment of the Adjudicator, the Employer will request the Appointing
Authority designated in the SCC, to appoint the Adjudicator within 15 days of receipt of such
request.
23.2 Should the Adjudicator resign or die, or should the Employer and the Contractor agree that the
Adjudicator is not functioning in accordance with the provisions of the Contract; a new
Adjudicator shall be jointly appointed by the Employer and the Contractor. In case of
disagreement between the Employer and the Contractor, within 30 days, the Adjudicator shall be
designated by the Appointing Authority designated in the SCC at the request of either party,
within 30 days of receipt of such request.
24. Procedure for Disputes
24.1 If the Contractor believes that a decision taken by the Project Manager was either outside the
authority given to the Project Manager by the Contract or that the decision was wrongly taken, the
decision shall be referred to the Adjudicator within 15 days of the notification of the Project
Manager’s decision.
24.2 The Adjudicator shall give a decision in writing within 30 days of receipt of a notification of a
dispute.
24.3 The Adjudicator shall be paid by the hour at the rate specified in the SCC, together with
reimbursable expenses of the types specified in the SCC, and the cost shall be divided equally
between the Employer and the Contractor, whatever decision is reached by the Adjudicator. Either
party may refer a decision of the Adjudicator to an Arbitrator within thirty (30) days of the
Adjudicator’s written decision. If neither party refers the dispute to arbitration within the above
thirty (30) days, the Adjudicator’s decision shall be final and binding.
24.4 The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the arbitration procedures published by the
institution named and in the place specified in the SCC.

B. Time Control
25. Program
25.1 Within the time stated in the SCC, after the date of the Notification of award, the Contractor shall
submit to the Project Manager for approval a Program showing the general methods,
arrangements, order, and timing for all the activities in the Works. In the case of a lump sum
contract, the activities in the Program shall be consistent with those in the Activity Schedule.
25.2 An update of the Program shall be a program showing the actual progress achieved on each activity
and the effect of the progress achieved on the timing of the remaining work, including any changes
to the sequence of the activities.
25.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval an updated Program at intervals
no longer than the period stated in the SCC. If the Contractor does not submit an updated Program
within this period, the Project Manager may withhold the amount stated in the SCC from the next
payment certificate and continue to withhold this amount until the next payment after the date on
which the overdue Program has been submitted. In the case of a lump sum contract, the Contractor
shall provide an updated Activity Schedule within 15 days of being instructed to by the Project
Manager.
25.4 The Project Manager’s approval of the Program shall not alter the Contractor’s obligations. The
Contractor may revise the Program and submit it to the Project Manager again at any time. A
revised Program shall show the effect of Variations and Compensation Events.
26. Extension of the Intended Completion Date
26.1 The Project Manager shall extend the Intended Completion Date if a Compensation Event (as
defined in GCC 41) occurs or a Variation is issued which makes it impossible for Completion to
be achieved by the Intended Completion Date without the Contractor taking steps to accelerate
the remaining work, which would cause the Contractor to incur additional cost.
26.2 The Project Manager shall decide whether and by how much to extend the Intended Completion
Date within 21 days of the Contractor asking the Project Manager for a decision upon the effect
of a Compensation Event or Variation and submitting full supporting information. If the
Contractor has failed to give early warning of a delay or has failed to cooperate in dealing with a
delay, the delay by this failure shall not be considered in assessing the new Intended Completion
Date.
27. Acceleration
27.1 When the Employer wants the Contractor to finish before the Intended Completion Date, the
Project Manager shall obtain priced proposals for achieving the necessary acceleration from the
Contractor. If the Employer accepts these proposals, the Intended Completion Date shall be
adjusted accordingly and confirmed by both the Employer and the Contractor.
27.2 If the Contractor’s priced proposals for acceleration are accepted by the Employer, they are
incorporated in the Contract Price and treated as a Variation.
28. Delays Ordered by the Project Manager
28.1 The Project Manager may instruct the Contractor to delay the start or progress of any activity
within the Works.

29. Management Meetings
29.1 Either the Project Manager or the Contractor may require the other to attend a management
meeting. The business of a management meeting shall be to review the plans for remaining work
and to deal with matters raised in accordance with the early warning procedure.
29.2 The Project Manager shall record the business of management meetings and provide copies of the
record to those attending the meeting and to the Employer. The responsibility of the parties for
actions to be taken shall be decided by the Project Manager either at the management meeting or
after the management meeting and stated in writing to all who attended the meeting.
30. Early Warning

30.1 The Contractor shall warn the Project Manager at the earliest opportunity of specific likely future
events or circumstances that may adversely affect the quality of the work, increase the Contract
Price, or delay the execution of the Works. The Project Manager may require the Contractor to
provide an estimate of the expected effect of the future event or circumstance on the Contract
Price and Completion Date. The estimate shall be provided by the Contractor as soon as
reasonably possible.
30.2 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Project Manager in making and considering proposals for
how the effect of such an event or circumstance can be avoided or reduced by anyone involved in
the work and in carrying out any resulting instruction of the Project Manager.
C. Quality Control
31. Identifying Defects
31.1 The Project Manager shall check the Contractor’s work and notify the Contractor of any Defects
that are found. Such checking shall not affect the Contractor’s responsibilities. The Project
Manager may instruct the Contractor to search for a Defect and to uncover and test any work that
the Project Manager considers may have a Defect.
32. Tests
32.1 If the Project Manager instructs the Contractor to carry out a test not specified in the Specification
to check whether any work has a Defect and the test shows that it does, the Contractor shall pay
for the test and any samples. If there is no Defect, the test shall be a Compensation Event.
33. Correction of Defects
33.1 The Project Manager shall give notice to the Contractor of any Defects before the end of the
Defects Liability Period, which begins at Completion, and is defined in the SCC. The Defects
Liability Period shall be extended for as long as Defects remain to be corrected.
33.2 Every time notice of a Defect is given, the Contractor shall correct the notified Defect within the
length of time specified by the Project Manager’s notice.
34. Uncorrected Defects
34.1 If the Contractor has not corrected a Defect within the time specified in the Project Manager’s
notice, the Project Manager shall assess the cost of having the Defect corrected, and the Contractor
shall pay this amount.

D. Cost Control
35. Contract Price
35.1 In the case of an admeasurement contract, the Bill of Quantities shall contain priced items for the
Works to be performed by the Contractor. The Bill of Quantities is used to calculate the Contract
Price. The Contractor will be paid for the quantity of the work accomplished at the rate in the Bill
of Quantities for each item.
35.2 In the case of a lump sum contract, the Activity Schedule shall contain the priced activities for the
Works to be performed by the Contractor. The Activity Schedule is used to prepare interim
valuations of works done. Any errors or inconsistencies including front loading detected in the
Activity Schedule at any time during the execution of the project shall be resolved as directed as
by the Project Manager.
36. Changes in the Contract Price
36.1 In the case of an admeasurement contract:

(a) If the final quantity of the work done differs from the quantity in the Bill of Quantities for
the particular item by more than 25 percent, provided the change exceeds 1 percent of the
Initial Contract Price, the Project Manager shall adjust the rate to allow for the change.
(b) The Project Manager shall not adjust rates from changes in quantities if thereby the Initial
Contract Price is exceeded by more than 15 percent, except with the prior approval of the
Employer.
(c) If requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with
a detailed cost breakdown of any rate in the Bill of Quantities.
36.2 In the case of a lump sum contract, the Activity Schedule shall be amended by the Contractor to
accommodate changes of Program or method of working made at the Contractor’s own discretion.
Prices in the Activity Schedule shall not be altered when the Contractor makes such changes to
the Activity Schedule.
37. Variations
37.1 All Variations shall be included in updated Programs, and, in the case of a lump sum contract, also
in the Activity Schedule, produced by the Contractor.
37.2 The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a quotation for carrying out the Variation
when requested to do so by the Project Manager. The Project Manager shall assess the quotation,
which shall be given within seven (7) days of the request or within any longer period stated by the
Project Manager and before the Variation is ordered.
37.3 If the Contractor’s quotation is unreasonable, the Project Manager may order the Variation and
make a change to the Contract Price, which shall be based on the Project Manager’s own forecast
of the effects of the Variation on the Contractor’s costs.
37.4 If the Project Manager decides that the urgency of varying the work would prevent a quotation
being given and considered without delaying the work, no quotation shall be given and the
Variation shall be treated as a Compensation Event.
37.5 The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for costs that could have been avoided
by giving early warning.
37.6 In the case of an admeasurement contract, if the work in the Variation corresponds to an item
description in the Bill of Quantities and if, in the opinion of the Project Manager, the quantity of
work above the limit stated in Sub-Clause 38.1 or the timing of its execution do not cause the cost
per unit of quantity to change, the rate in the Bill of Quantities shall be used to calculate the value
of the Variation.

If the cost per unit of quantity changes, or if the nature or timing of the work in the Variation does
not correspond with items in the Bill of Quantities, the quotation by the Contractor shall be in the
form of new rates for the relevant items of work.
38. Cash Flow Forecasts
38.1 When the Program, or, in the case of a lump sum contract, the Activity Schedule, is updated, the
Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with an updated cash flow forecast.
39. Payment Certificates

39.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager monthly statements of the estimated value of
the work executed less the cumulative amount certified previously.
39.2 The Project Manager shall check the Contractor’s monthly statement and certify the amount to be
paid to the Contractor.
39.3 The value of work executed shall be determined by the Project Manager.
39.4 The value of work executed shall comprise:
(a) In the case of an admeasurement contract, the value of the quantities of work in the Bill of
Quantities that have been completed; or;
(b) In the case of a lump sum contract, the value of work executed shall comprise the value of
completed activities in the Activity Schedule.
39.5 The value of work executed shall include the valuation of Variations and Compensation Events.
39.6 The Project Manager may exclude any item certified in a previous certificate or reduce the
proportion of any item previously certified in any certificate in the light of later information.
39.7 Unless otherwise specified in the SCC Interim Payment may be made for Plant and Material
delivered on site ready for incorporation within reasonable period of time in the permanent works,
subject to the Contractor transferring ownership to the Employer and providing, where applicable,
the right of the transfer of ownership vested upon the Contractor by its supplier.
Notwithstanding the transfer of ownership, the responsibility for care and custody thereof together
with the risk of loss or damage thereto shall remain with the Contractor until taking over of the
works or part thereof in which such Plant and Materials are incorporated and shall make good at
its own cost any loss or damage that may occur to the works or part thereof from any cause
whatsoever during such period prior to the taking over.
40. Payments
40.1 Payments shall be adjusted for deductions for advance payments and retention. The Employer
shall pay the Contractor the amounts certified by the Project Manager within 30 days of the date
of each certificate. If the Employer makes a late payment, the Contractor shall be paid interest on
the late payment in the next payment. Interest shall be calculated from the date by which the
payment should have been made up to the date when the late payment is made at the prevailing
rate of interest at the legal rate.
40.2 If an amount certified is increased in a later certificate or as a result of an award by the Adjudicator
or an Arbitrator, the Contractor shall be paid interest upon the delayed payment as set out in this
clause. Interest shall be calculated from the date upon which the increased amount would have
been certified in the absence of dispute.
40.3 Unless otherwise stated, all payments and deductions shall be paid or charged in the proportions
to the Contract Price.
40.4 Items of the Works for which no rate or price has been entered in shall not be paid for by the
Employer and shall be deemed covered by other rates and prices in the Contract.

41. Compensation Events
41.1 The following shall be Compensation Events:

(a) The Employer does not give access to a part of the Site by the Site Possession Date pursuant
to GCC Sub-Clause 20.1.
(b) The Employer modifies the Schedule of Other Contractors in a way that affects the work of
the Contractor under the Contract.
(c) The Project Manager orders a delay or does not issue Drawings, Specifications, or
instructions required for execution of the Works on time.
(d) The Project Manager instructs the Contractor to uncover or to carry out additional tests upon
work, which is then found to have no Defects.
(e) The Project Manager unreasonably does not approve a subcontract to be let.
(f) Ground conditions are substantially more adverse than could reasonably have been assumed
before issuance of the Notification of award from the information issued to bidders
(including the Site Investigation Reports), from information available publicly and from a
visual inspection of the Site.
(g) The Project Manager gives an instruction for dealing with an unforeseen condition, caused
by the Employer, or additional work required for safety or other reasons.
(h) Other contractors, public authorities, utilities, or the Employer does not work within the
dates and other constraints stated in the Contract, and they cause delay or extra cost to the
Contractor.
(i) The advance payment is delayed.
(j) The effects on the Contractor of any of the Employer’s Risks.
(k) The Project Manager unreasonably delays issuing a Certificate of Completion.
(l) In situations of Force Majeure which makes the contractor’s performance of its obligations
under the Contract impossible or so impractical as to be considered impossible under the
circumstances. Such events shall be limited to:
a. reason of any exceptionally adverse weather conditions (as specified in the BDS) and
b. reason of civil commotion, strike or lockout affecting any of the trades employed upon
the Works or any of the trades engaged in the preparation, manufacture or transportation
of any of the goods or materials required for the Works.
41.2 If a Compensation Event would cause additional cost or would prevent the work being completed
before the Intended Completion Date, the Contract Price shall be increased and/or the Intended
Completion Date shall be extended. The Project Manager shall decide whether and by how much
the Contract Price shall be increased and whether and by how much the Intended Completion Date
shall be extended.
41.3 As soon as information demonstrating the effect of each Compensation Event upon the
Contractor’s forecast cost has been provided by the Contractor, it shall be assessed by the Project
Manager, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly. If the Contractor’s forecast is
deemed unreasonable, the Project Manager shall adjust the Contract Price based on the Project
Manager’s own forecast. The Project Manager shall assume that the Contractor shall react
competently and promptly to the event.
41.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation to the extent that the Employer’s interests
are adversely affected by the Contractor’s not having given early warning or not having cooperated
with the Project Manager.

42. Tax
42.1 The Project Manager shall adjust the Contract Price if taxes, duties, and other levies are changed
between the date 30 days before the submission of bids for the Contract and the date of the last
Completion certificate. The adjustment shall be the change in the amount of tax payable by the
Contractor, provided such changes are not already reflected in the Contract Price or are a result of
GCC Clause 44.
43. Currencies
43.1 Where payments are made in currencies other than the currency of the Employer’s country
specified in the SCC, the exchange rates used for calculating the amounts to be paid shall be the
exchange rates stated in the Contractor’s Bid.
44. Price Adjustment
44.1 Prices shall be adjusted for fluctuations in the cost of inputs only if provided for in the SCC. If
so provided, the amounts certified in each payment certificate, before deducting for Advance
Payment, shall be adjusted by applying the respective price adjustment factor to the payment
amounts due in each currency. A separate formula of the type indicated below applies to each
Contract currency:
Pc = Ac + Bc lmc/loc
Pc is the adjustment factor for the portion of the Contract Price payable in a specific currency “c.”
Ac and Bc are coefficients specified in the SCC, representing the nonadjustable and adjustable
portions, respectively, of the Contract Price payable in that specific currency “c;” and
Imc is the index prevailing at the end of the month being invoiced and Ioc is the index prevailing 28
days before Bid opening for inputs payable; both in the specific currency “c.”
44.2 If the value of the index is changed after it has been used in a calculation, the calculation shall be
corrected and an adjustment made in the next payment certificate. The index value shall be
deemed to take account of all changes in cost due to fluctuations in costs.
45. Retention
45.1 The Employer shall retain from each payment due to the Contractor the proportion stated in the
SCC until Completion of the whole of the Works.
45.2 Upon the issue of a Certificate of Completion of the Works by the Project Manager, in accordance
with GCC 53.1, half the total amount retained shall be repaid to the Contractor and half when the
Defects Liability Period has passed and the Project Manager has certified that all Defects notified
by the Project Manager to the Contractor before the end of this period have been corrected. The
Contractor may substitute retention money with an “on demand” Bank guarantee.
46. Liquidated Damages
46.1 The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Employer at the rate per day stated in the
SCC for each day that the Completion Date is later than the Intended Completion Date. The total
amount of liquidated damages shall not exceed the amount defined in the SCC. The Employer
may deduct liquidated damages from payments due to the Contractor. Payment of liquidated
damages shall not affect the Contractor’s liabilities.

46.2 If the Intended Completion Date is extended after liquidated damages have been paid, the Project
Manager shall correct any overpayment of liquidated damages by the Contractor by adjusting the
next payment certificate. The Contractor shall be paid interest on the overpayment, calculated
from the date of payment to the date of repayment, at the rates specified in GCC Sub-Clause 40.1.
47. Bonus
47.1 The Contractor shall be paid a Bonus calculated at the rate per calendar day stated in the SCC
for each day (less any days for which the Contractor is paid for acceleration) that the Completion
is earlier than the Intended Completion Date. The Project Manager shall certify that the Works
are complete, although they may not be due to be complete.
48. Advance Payment
48.1 The Employer shall make advance payment to the Contractor of the amounts stated in the SCC
by the date stated in the SCC, against provision by the Contractor of an Unconditional Bank
Guarantee in a form and by a bank acceptable to the Employer in amounts equal to the advance
payment. The Guarantee shall remain effective until the advance payment has been repaid, but the
amount of the Guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amounts repaid by the Contractor.
Interest shall not be charged on the advance payment.
48.2 The Contractor is to use the advance payment only to pay for Equipment, Plant, Materials, and
mobilization expenses required specifically for execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall
demonstrate that advance payment has been used in this way by supplying copies of invoices or
other documents to the Project Manager.
48.3 The advance payment shall be repaid by deducting proportionate amounts from payments
otherwise due to the Contractor, following the schedule of completed percentages of the Works
on a payment basis. No account shall be taken of the advance payment or its repayment in
assessing valuations of work done, Variations, price adjustments, Compensation Events, Bonuses,
or Liquidated Damages.
49. Securities
49.1 The Performance Security shall be provided to the Employer no later than the date specified in the
Notification of award and shall be issued in an amount specified in the SCC, by a bank and
denominated in the Namibian Dollars. The Performance Security shall be valid until a date 30
days from the date of issue of the Certificate of Completion in the case of a Bank Guarantee.
49.2 With reference to Margin of Preference and Preference Security:
(a) Where the contractor has benefitted from the application of the Margin of Preference for
employment of local manpower, it shall:
(i) in the execution of the contract, fulfill its obligation of maintaining local manpower
force for 80 % or more of the man-days deployed in the execution of the Works with
which it satisfied the criteria of eligibility for being awarded the contract in application
of the Margin of Preference; and
(ii) concurrently with the above performance security, provide a preference security to
guarantee it will fulfill its obligation in that respect.
(b) For contracts above N$ 5 M, the preference security shall be in the form of an “on demand”
bank guarantee for an amount in a convertible currency equivalent to the difference between
its bid price and the bid price of the lowest bid if the Margin of Preference was not
applicable. It shall be issued by a commercial bank located in the Republic of Namibia.

(c)For contracts up to N$ 5 M, an amount equal to the value of the preference security shall be
retained from progressive payments to the contractor, to constitute the guarantee for the
preference security.
(d) The preference security shall be valid until the Contractor has completed the Works and a
Completion Certificate has been issued by the Employer’s Representative as per GCC 53.
(e) The cost of providing the security shall be borne by the Contractor
49.3 Where a Preference Security is applicable:
(a) the Employer’s Representative shall monitor the employment of local manpower throughout the
execution of the contract and shall from time to time request a report from the contractor on the
percentage of total men-days deployed using local manpower.
(b) the Contractor shall submit the local manpower employment reports as often as it is reasonably
requested by the Employer’s Representative.
(c) the Employer’s and Contractor’s representatives shall consult each other to ensure that the
Contractor’s obligation towards local manpower employment is met during the Works
execution.
(d) At the time of works completion, the Contractor shall submit a certified audited report to the
Employer to substantiate the actual percentage of local manpower employed throughout the
execution of the works.
(e) The preference security shall be forfeited by the employer in case of failure on the part of the
contractor to employ at least 80% of the local manpower in the execution of the Works.
50. Dayworks
50.1 If applicable, the Dayworks rates in the Contractor’s Bid shall be used only when the Project
Manager has given written instructions in advance for additional work to be paid for in that way.
50.2 All work to be paid for as Dayworks shall be recorded by the Contractor on forms approved by
the Project Manager. Each completed form shall be verified and signed by the Project Manager
within two days of the work being done.
50.3 The Contractor shall be paid for Dayworks subject to obtaining signed Dayworks forms.
51. Cost of Repairs
51.1 Loss or damage to the Works or Materials to be incorporated in the Works between the Start Date
and the end of the Defects Correction periods shall be remedied by the Contractor at the
Contractor’s cost if the loss or damage arises from the Contractor’s acts or omissions.
52. Labour Clause
52.1 With reference to remuneration:

(a) The rates of remuneration and other conditions of work of the employees of the Contractor
shall not be less favourable than those established for work of the same character in the trade
concerned:
(i) by collective agreement applying to a substantial proportion of the workers and
employers in the trade concerned;
(ii) by arbitration awards; or
(iii) by Remuneration Regulations made under the Labour Act, 2007.
(b) Where remuneration and conditions of work are not regulated in a manner referred to at (a)
above, the rates of the remuneration and other conditions of work shall be not less favourable
than the general level observed in the trade in which the contractor is engaged by employers
whose general circumstances are similar.

52.2 No Contractor shall be entitled to any payment in respect of work performed in the execution of
the contract unless he has, together with his claim for payment, filed a certificate:
(a) stating the rates of remuneration and hours of work of the various categories of employees
employed in the execution of the contracts;
(b) stating whether any remuneration payable in respect of work done is due;
(c) containing such other information as the Chief Executive Officer of the Public Body
administering the contract may require to satisfy himself that the provisions under this clause
have been complied with.
52.3 Where the Chief Executive Officer of the Public Entity administering the contract is satisfied that
remuneration is still due to an employee employed under this contract at the time the claim for
payment is filed under subsection as per Employer’s filing database, he may, unless the
remuneration is sooner paid by the Contractor, arrange for the payment of the remuneration out of
the money payable under this contract.
52.4 Every Contractor shall display a copy of this clause of the contract at the place at which the work
required by the contract is performed.
E. Finishing the Contract

53. Completion
53.1 The Contractor shall request the Project Manager to issue a Certificate of Completion of the
Works, and the Project Manager shall do so upon deciding that the whole of the Works is
completed.
54. Taking Over
54.1 The Employer shall take over the Site and the Works within seven days of the Project Manager’s
issuing a certificate of Completion.
55. Final Account
55.1 The Contractor shall supply the Project Manager with a detailed account of the total amount that
the Contractor considers payable under the Contract before the end of the Defects Liability Period.
The Project Manager shall issue a Defects Liability Certificate and certify any final payment that
is due to the Contractor within 60 days of receiving the Contractor’s account if it is correct and
complete. If it is not, the Project Manager shall issue within 60 days a schedule that states the
scope of the corrections or additions that are necessary. If the Final Account is still unsatisfactory
after it has been resubmitted, the Project Manager shall decide on the amount payable to the
Contractor and issue a payment certificate.
56. Operating and Maintenance Manuals
56.1 If “as built” Drawings and/or operating and maintenance manuals are required, the Contractor
shall supply them by the dates stated in the SCC.
56.2 If the Contractor does not supply the Drawings and/or manuals by the dates stated in the SCC
pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 55.1, or they do not receive the Project Manager’s approval, the
Project Manager shall withhold the amount stated in the SCC from payments due to the
Contractor.

57. Termination
57.1 The Employer or the Contractor may terminate the Contract if the other party causes a fundamental
breach of the Contract.
57.2 Fundamental breaches of Contract shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
(a) the Contractor stops work for 30 days when no stoppage of work is shown on the current
Program and the stoppage has not been authorized by the Project Manager;
(b) the Project Manager instructs the Contractor to delay the progress of the Works, and the
instruction is not withdrawn within 30 days;
(c) the Employer or the Contractor is made bankrupt or goes into liquidation other than for a
reconstruction or amalgamation;
(d) a payment certified by the Project Manager is not paid by the Employer to the Contractor
within 60 days of the date of the Project Manager’s certificate;
(e) the Project Manager gives Notice that failure to correct a particular Defect is a fundamental
breach of Contract and the Contractor fails to correct it within a reasonable period of time
determined by the Project Manager;
(f) the Contractor does not maintain a Security, which is required;
(g) the Contractor has delayed the completion of the Works by the number of days for which
the maximum amount of liquidated damages can be paid, as defined in the SCC; or
(h) if the Contractor, in the judgment of the Employer, has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent
practices in competing for or in executing the Contract, pursuant to GCC Clause 57.1.
57.3 When either party to the Contract gives notice of a breach of Contract to the Project Manager for
a cause other than those listed under GCC Sub-Clause 56.2 above, the Project Manager shall
decide whether the breach is fundamental or not.
57.4 Notwithstanding the above, the Employer may terminate the Contract for convenience.
57.5 If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall stop work immediately, make the Site safe and
secure, and leave the Site as soon as reasonably possible.
58. Fraud and Corruption
58.1 If the Employer determines that the Contractor has engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive,
coercive or obstructive practices, in competing for or in executing the Contract, then the Employer
may, after giving 15 days’ notice to the Contractor, terminate the Contractor's employment under
the Contract and expel him from the Site, and the provisions of Clause 57 shall apply as if such
expulsion had been made under Sub-Clause 57.5 [Termination by Employer].
58.2 Should any employee of the Contractor be determined to have engaged in corrupt, fraudulent,
collusive, coercive, or obstructive practice during the execution of the Works, then that employee
shall be removed in accordance with Clause 9.
58.3 For the purposes of this Sub-Clause:
(a) “corrupt practice” is the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting, directly or indirectly, of
anything of value to influence improperly the actions of another party;
(b) “fraudulent practice” is any act or omission, including a misrepresentation, that knowingly
or recklessly misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party to obtain a financial or other benefit
or to avoid an obligation;
(c) “collusive practice” is an arrangement between two or more parties designed to achieve an
improper purpose, including to influence improperly the actions of another party;
(d) “coercive practice” is impairing or harming, or threatening to impair or harm, directly or
indirectly, any party or the property of the party to influence improperly the actions of a
party;
(e) “obstructive practice” is:

(i) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering or concealing of evidence material to the

investigation or making false statements to investigators in order to materially impede
an investigation into allegations of a corrupt, fraudulent, coercive or collusive practice;
and/or threatening, harassing or intimidating any party to prevent it from disclosing its
knowledge of matters relevant to the investigation or from pursuing the investigation;
or
(ii) acts intended to materially impede the exercise of an inspection and audit rights
provided for under Sub-Clause 22.2.
59. Payment upon Termination
59.1 If the Contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of Contract by the Contractor, the
Project Manager shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done and Materials ordered less
advance payments received up to the date of the issue of the certificate and less the percentage to
apply to the value of the work not completed, as indicated in the SCC. Additional Liquidated
Damages shall not apply. If the total amount due to the Employer exceeds any payment due to
the Contractor, the difference shall be a debt payable to the Employer.
59.2 If the Contract is terminated for the Employer’s convenience or because of a fundamental breach
of Contract by the Employer, the Project Manager shall issue a certificate for the value of the work
done, Materials ordered, the reasonable cost of removal of Equipment, repatriation of the
Contractor’s personnel employed solely on the Works, and the Contractor’s costs of protecting
and securing the Works, and less advance payments received up to the date of the certificate.
60. Property
60.1 All Materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment, Temporary Works, and Works shall be deemed to be
the property of the Employer if the Contract is terminated because of the Contractor’s default.
61. Release from Performance
61.1 If the Contract is frustrated by the outbreak of war or by any other event entirely outside the control
of either the Employer or the Contractor, the Project Manager shall certify that the Contract has
been frustrated. The Contractor shall make the Site safe and stop work as quickly as possible after
receiving this certificate and shall be paid for all work carried out before receiving it and for any
work carried out afterwards to which a commitment was made.

Section VIII – Special Conditions of Contract 258
Section VIII - Special Conditions of Contract

These clauses should be read in conjunction with the General Conditions of Contract.
GCC 1.1 (r) The Employer is:

P.O. Box: 13281
Block A & B
Goethe Street
Windhoek, Namibia
Authorized Representative:
Commissioner A. Nakale
Email: [email protected]
GCC 1.1 (v) The Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works shall be:
5 months (150 Calendar Days) from possession of site including builders’ holiday
GCC 1.1 (y) The Project Manager is:

Name: WCE Consulting Engineers
Address:
80 Sam Nujoma Avenue, Walvis Bay, Namibia
P.O. Box 800, Walvis Bay, Namibia
Tel : +264 64 20 6401
Fax: +264 64 20 6525
Email: [email protected]
Authorized Representative: Mr Christo van Wyk
GCC 1.1 The Site is located at: The site is located to the East of the Walvis Bay CBD and in the
(aa) townland’s boundaries of Walvis Bay and is defined on the drawings as per the
drawing table under Section V- Employer’s Requirements
GCC 1.1 The Start Date shall be:

(dd)
The date of possession of site.
GCC 2.2 Sectional Completions are: None

GCC 2.3(i) The following documents also form part of the Contract: None
GCC 3.1 The language of the contract is English.

The law that applies to the Contract is the law of Namibia.
GCC 4.1 The Project Manager shall obtain specific approval from the Employer before carrying
out any of his duties under the Contract which in the Project Manager’s opinion will
cause the amount finally due under the Contract to exceed the Contract Price or will
give entitlement to extension of time. This requirement shall be waived in an
emergency affecting safety of personnel or the Works or adjacent property.
GCC 5.1 The Project manager may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities.
GCC 6.1 Delivery address for notices is:

For the Employer, the address shall be that of the Project Manager, Windhoek
Consulting Engineers (Pty) Ltd.
For the Contractor, the address shall be as given on the first page of the Purchase
Order/Letter of Acceptance and the contact name shall be:
______________________________________
GCC 8.1 Schedule of other contractors: None
CC 13.1 Except for the cover mentioned in (d)(i) hereunder, the other insurance covers shall be
in the joint names of the Contractor and the Employer and the minimum insurance
amounts shall be:
(a) for the Works, Plant and Materials:
for the full amount of the works including removal of debris, professional fee etc. . .
(b) for loss or damage to Equipment:
for the replacement value of the equipment that the contractor intends to use on site
until the taking over by the Employer.
(c) for loss or damage to property (except the Works, Plant, Materials, and
Equipment) in connection with Contract for the amount of NAD 500 000.00.
(d) for personal injury or death:
(i) of the Contractor’s employees:
The Contractor shall take an adequate insurance cover for its employees for
any claim arising in the execution of the works
(ii) of other people:
This cover shall be for an adequate amount for Third Party extended to the
Employer and its representatives and shall be a minimum of N$ 2,000,000.00
per claim, number of claims unlimited.

(e) for loss or damage to materials on-site and for which payment have been included
in the Interim Payment Certificate, where applicable.
The Contractor shall choose to take the insurance covers indicated above as separate
covers or a combination of the Contractor’s All Risks coupled with the Employer’s
liability and First Loss Burglary, after approval of the Employer. All insurance covers
shall be of nil or the minimum possible deductibles at sole expense of the contractor.
GCC 14.1 Site Data are:

All drawings submitted to the Contractor including setting out data, this document and
the Quality Assurance Manual.
GCC 20.1 The Site Possession Date(s) shall be: Within 14 days after submission of Performance
Security, Insurance cover and Program of works.
GCC 23.1 Appointing Authority for the Adjudicator: to be selected and agreed upon by the
& Employer and the Contractor in writing before site handover.
GCC 23.2
GCC 24. An Adjudicator shall be appointed under the contract and arbitration shall apply. If
any dispute arises between the Employer and the Contractor in connection with or
arising out of the Contract, the parties shall seek the advice of the Adjudicator to
resolve any such dispute. If the Adjudicator fail to resolve such dispute by amicable
agreement, within 14 days after one party has notified the other in writing of the
dispute, then the dispute shall be referred to court by either party. The Adjudicator
shall be appointed by the Engineering Profession Association and cost of the
adjudicator shall be shared by both parties. The contractor shall make monthly full
payments for the Adjudicator and shall be reimbursed through the contract for the
Employer’s share.
GCC 24.3 Hourly rate and types of reimbursable expenses to be paid to the Adjudicator:
As per GCC 23.1 & 23.2.
GCC 24.4 Any dispute or difference in respect of which a notice of intention to commence
arbitration has been given shall be finally settled by arbitration in accordance with
Namibian Laws by an Arbitrator to be appointed by both parties to the dispute or in
any case of disagreement, by an Arbitrator to be appointed by a judge in Chambers of
Namibia. The Arbitrator fees will be borne by the losing party. Any decision of the
Arbitrator shall be final and binding to both parties”.
GCC 25.1 The Contractor shall submit for approval a Program for the Works within 14 days
from the date of the Notification of award.
GCC 25.3 The period between Program updates is 30 days.

The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated Program is 5% of the
interim certificate.

GCC 33.1 The Defects Liability Period is: 365 days.
GCC 39.7 Interim Payment for Plant and Material on site is applicable as follows:
100% payment for materials on site for the full value of all material on presentation
of the supplier’s tax invoices, proof of payment and by cession of rights from the
Supplier to the Contractor and from the Contractor to the Employer.
GCC 40 The amount certified by the Project Manager shall be paid in full within 30 days of
receipt by the Employer of an invoice, supported by:
(a) the payment certificate
GCC 41.1 A delay caused by inclement weather conditions will be regarded as a delay only if, in
(l) the opinion of the Project Manager, all progress on an item or items of work on the
critical path of the working programme of the contractor has been brought to a halt.
Delays on working days only (based on a five-day working week) will be taken into
account for the extension of time, but the contractor shall make provision in his
programme of work for an expected delay 36 working days caused by normal rainy
weather, for which he will not receive any extension of time.
Extension of time during working days will be granted to the degree to which actual
days, as defined above, exceed the number of 36 working days.
GCC 43.1 The currency of the Employer’s country is: Namibian Dollars (NAD) (N$).
GCC 44.1 The Contract is not subject to price adjustment.
GCC 45.1 The proportion of payments retained is: 10% of Interim Payment Certificate (Excl.
MOS)
The maximum amount of retention is 5% of the Accepted Contract Amount (excl.
Contingencies & VAT)
Half of the retention money will be released after formal taking over of the Works and
the remaining shall be released after the Defect Liability Period subject to the
Contractor making good all defects.
GCC 46.1 The liquidated damages for the whole of the Works is N$ 10,000.00 (Ten Thousand
Namibia Dollars) per day.
The maximum amount of liquidated damages for the whole of the Works is 10% (ten)
of the Accepted Contract Amount.
GCC 47.1 No Bonus for early completion shall be applicable.
GCC 48.1 No advance payment shall be made.
GCC 49.1 A Performance Security in the form of a Bank Guarantee representing 10% of the
Accepted Contract Amount shall be required.

GCC 56.1 Operating and maintenance manuals should be submitted to the employer by the
contractor before the practical completion certificate is issued.
GCC 56.2 As-built drawings should be submitted to the employer by the contractor before the
practical completion certificate is issued.
GCC 59.1 The percentage to apply to the value of the work not completed, representing the
Employer’s additional cost for completing the Works, is 10%.

263
Section IX - Contract Forms
Table of Forms
CONTRACT AGREEMENT ....................................................................................................... 264
PERFORMANCE SECURITY (BANK GUARANTEE) ............................................................ 266
INVITATION FOR BIDS (IFB) ................................................................................................... 267
Notes:
The following Pro-Forma documents must not be completed at Bidding stage, but will be completed by
the successful Bidder after the award of the Contract to the Successful Bidder.

Section IX – Contract Forms 264
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
THIS CONTRACT AGREEMENT is made the …………… day of
…………………………………, 20…….
BETWEEN
(1) Ministry of Safety and Security, Department of Namibian Correctional Service
(hereinafter called “the Employer”), and
(2) ………………………………………………………………………………………… a
company incorporated under the laws of Namibia and having its principal place of business at
………………………………………………………………………………………………..(herei
nafter called “the Supplier”).
WHEREAS the Employer invited bids for certain Goods and related services, viz., Procurement of
a Contractor for The Construction of a Gravity Waterborne Sewer Reticulation Network for
Omatjete Township, Erongo Region, Phase 4 and has accepted a Bid by the Supplier for the supply
of those Goods and Services in the sum of N$................................................................] (hereinafter
called “the Contract Price”).
The Employer and the Contractor agree as follows:
1. In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are respectively
assigned to them in the Contract documents referred to.
2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this
Agreement. This Agreement shall prevail over all other Contract documents.
(a) the Notification of award
(b) the Bid
(c) the Addenda Nos . . . . . ………………………………….………insert addenda numbers if any
(d) the Appendix to the General Conditions of Contract
(e) the General Conditions of Contract;
(f) the Specification
(g) the Drawings; and
(h) the completed Schedules,
3. This Contract shall prevail over all other Contract documents. In the event of any discrepancy
or inconsistency within the Contract documents, then the documents shall prevail in the order
listed above.

4. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as indicated

in this Agreement, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to execute the Works
and to remedy defects therein in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the Contract.
5. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution and
completion of the Works and the remedying of defects therein, the Contract Price or such
other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the times and in the
manner prescribed by the Contract.
IN WITNESS whereof the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed in
accordance with the laws of Namibia on the day, month and year indicated above.
Signed by: Signed by:

for and on behalf of the Employer for and on behalf the Contractor
in the in the
presence of: presence of:
Witness, Name, Signature, Address, Date Witness, Name, Signature, Address, Date

PERFORMANCE SECURITY (BANK GUARANTEE)

[The bank, as requested by the successful Bidder, shall fill in this form in accordance with the instructions indicated]
Date: …………………………………………………………….
Procurement Reference No. and title: W\ONB\06-05\2019, PROCUREMENT OF A

CONTRACTOR FOR: THE CONSTRUCTION OF A HIGH SECURITY FENCE AT THE
WALVIS BAY CORRECTIONAL FACILITY
Bank’s Branch or Office: …………………………………………………………..
Beneficiary: ……………………………………………………………………………..
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE No.: ……………………………………………….
We have been informed that ………………………………………………………… (hereinafter

called "the Supplier") has entered into Contract No. ……………………………………….. dated
…………………………………. with you, for THE CONSTRUCTION OF A HIGH SECURITY
FENCE AT THE WALVIS BAY CORRECTIONAL FACILITY (hereinafter called "the Contract").
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, a Performance Guarantee
is required.
At the request of the Supplier, we hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum(s) not exceeding
……………………………………………….upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing
declaring the Supplier to be in default under the Contract, without cavil or argument, or your needing
to prove or to show grounds or reasons for your demand or the sum specified therein.
This Guarantee shall expire no later than the ……………………. day of

………………………………………. and any demand for payment under it must be received by us
at this office on or before that date.
..........................................Bank’s seal and authorized signature(s) .......................................

The Bank shall insert the amount(s) specified in the SCC and denominated, as specified in the SCC, in the currency of the
Contract.
Dates established in accordance with Clause 18.4 of the General Conditions of Contract (“GCC”), taking into account any
warranty obligations of the Supplier under Clause 16.2 of the GCC intended to be secured by a partial Performance
Guarantee. The Purchaser should note that in the event of an extension of the time to perform the Contract, the Purchaser
would need to request an extension of this Guarantee from the Bank. Such request must be in writing and must be made
prior to the expiration date established in the Guarantee. In preparing this Guarantee, the Purchaser might consider adding
the following text to the Form, at the end of the penultimate paragraph: “We agree to a one-time extension of this Guarantee
for a period not to exceed [six months] [one year], in response to the Purchaser’s written request for such extension, such
request to be presented to us before the expiry of the Guarantee.”

INVITATION FOR BIDS (IFB)

Republic of Namibia
W\ONB\06-05\2019, PROCUREMENT OF A CONTRACTOR FOR: THE CONSTRUCTION

OF A HIGH SECURITY FENCE AT THE WALVIS BAY CORRECTIONAL FACILITY
1. Bids are invited through Open National Bidding (Works)
2. Interested eligible bidders may obtain further information from:
Commissioner A. Nakale (The Ministry of Home Affairs, Immigration, Safety and

Security, Department of Namibian Correctional Service) for administrative information
and Mr C van Wyk (Windhoek Consulting Engineers) for technical information. The
bidder may inspect the Bidding Documents at the address given below:
The Executive Director

P.O. Box: 13281
Block A & B
Goethe Street
Windhoek, Namibia

BiddingDocument 20200619

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BiddingDocument 20200619

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BiddingDocument 20200619

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MINISTRY OF HOME AFFAIRS,

IMMIGRATION, SAFETY AND

PROCUREMENT REFERENCE NO: W\ONB\06-05\2019

CONTRACT AMOUNT (ALL INCLUSIVE): …………………………………………………….

Section I - Instructions to Bidders..................................................................................................... 2

PART 2 – Employer’s Requirements ............................................................................................. 51

Section V - Employer’s Requirements ............................................................................................ 52

PART 3 – Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms .............................................................. 238

Section VII - General Conditions of Contract ............................................................................... 239

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

PART 1 – Bidding Procedures

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

Section I - Instructions to Bidders

1. Scope of Bid ..................................................................................................................... 4

B. Contents of Bidding Document ...................................................................................... 9

7. Sections of Bidding Document.......................................................................................... 9

C. Preparation of Bids ....................................................................................................... 10

11. Cost of Bidding............................................................................................................... 10

D. Submission and Opening of Bids .................................................................................. 14

22. Sealing and Marking of Bids ........................................................................................... 14

E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids ............................................................................ 15

27. Confidentiality ................................................................................................................ 15

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

32. Margin of Preference ...................................................................................................... 16

F. Award of Contract ........................................................................................................ 18

37. Award Criteria ................................................................................................................ 18

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

Section I - Instructions To Bidders

1.2 The successful Bidder shall be expected to complete the Works

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

4.2 The Employer will reject a proposal for award if it determines

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

(a) they have a controlling partner in common; or

5.4 Government-owned enterprises in the Republic of Namibia

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

6.2 Bidders shall include the information and documents listed

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

B. Contents of Bidding Document

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

(d) the following (Compulsory) documentary evidence in full,

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

D. Submission and Opening of Bids

(a) bear the name and address of the Bidder;

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

the opinion of the Employer there is an obvious

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

(i) name of the successful Bidder, and the Price it offered,

(ii) an executive summary of the Bid Evaluation Report.

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

PREPARED BY WCE CONSULTING ENGINEERS

Section II - Bidding Data Sheet (BDS)

ITB 1.1 The Public Entity is:

Dated on day of , _